703815
47
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/310
Next page
SLC
Operator's Manual
Mercedes-Benz
Your Operator's Manual
Digital form inside the vehicle
Familiarize yourself with the contents of the Operator's Manual directly via your
vehicle's multimedia system (Menu item "Vehicle").
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to the vehicle's Operator's Manual, you can obtain the complete multi-
media system Supplement from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
You can find the Operator's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.
Digital form as an App
The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free on the Apple
®
App store or
Google Play.
Apple® iOS Android™
Order no. P172 0238 13 Part no. 172 584 72 02 Edition A 2020
É1725847202IËÍ
1725847202
SLC Operator's Manual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz
vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trade-
marks of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of
Johnson Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trade-
marks of Apple Inc.
R
Logic 7
®
is a registered trademark of Har-
man International Industries.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of
iBiquity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are reg-
istered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to
dangers that could lead to damage to your
vehicle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succes-
sion indicate an instruction with sev-
eral steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can
find more information about a topic.
YY
This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the
next page.
Dis‐
Dis‐
playplay
This text indicates a message on the
multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
Example
G
WARNING
If the front passenger air bag has been acti-
vated, a child on the front passenger seat
may be hit by the front passenger air bag in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or fatal injury.
NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a seat protected by an ACTIVE
FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the CHILD can occur.
Read the chapter "Children in the vehicle" .
As at 08.09.2018
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For yourown safety and a
longer vehiclelife,follow the instructions and
warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them
couldresult in damage to the vehicleorper-
sonal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehiclemay vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reservesthe right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technicalfeatures
The equipment in yourvehiclemay therefore
differfrom that showninthe descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integralcomponents of the
vehicle:
R
DigitalOperator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicleatall
times. If you sell the vehicle, alwayspassall
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The DigitalOperator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on yourvehicle's equipment
and multimediasystem. It contains infor-
mative animations, individuallanguage
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manualand the afore-
mentioned digital media, you alsohave
the option to obtainacomprehensive
printed versionofthe Supplement for
yourmultimediasystem from your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet
provides easy access to all information
regarding yourvehicleand multimedia
system. It alsoprovides helpful anima-
tions, interesting background information
and awidearrayofsearch options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp,
you can view all the information on your
vehicleand multimediasystem via mobile
Internet or download it independently of
network access. Availablefor smart-
phones or tablets.
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App may not yet be available in yourcountry.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada,Inc.
ADaimler Company
1725847202
É1725847202IËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22
Introduction........................................... 22
Operation ............................................... 22
Introduction ......................................... 23
Protecting the environment ...................23
Genuine Mercedes-Benzparts............... 23
Operator's Manual ................................. 24
Service and vehicle operation ................24
Operating safety .................................... 26
QR code for rescue card ........................ 28
Data storage .......................................... 28
Information on copyright ....................... 30
At aglance ........................................... 31
Cockpit .................................................. 31
Instrument cluster ................................. 32
Multifunction steering wheel ................. 33
Center console ...................................... 34
Overhead control panel .........................36
Doorcontrolpanel ................................. 37
Safety ................................................... 38
Panic alarm............................................ 38
Occupant safety .................................... 38
Childreninthe vehicle........................... 53
Pets in the vehicle................................. 56
Driving safety systems ........................... 56
Protection against theft .........................64
Opening and closing ........................... 66
SmartKey ............................................... 66
Doors ..................................................... 71
Trunk ..................................................... 73
Side windows ......................................... 75
Roof .......................................................78
Seats, steering wheel and mir-
rors ....................................................... 85
Correct driver's seat position ................85
Seats ..................................................... 85
Steering wheel ....................................... 89
Mirrors................................................... 92
Memory function ................................... 95
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97
Exterior lighting ..................................... 97
Interior lighting .................................... 101
Replacing bulbs................................... 101
Windshield wipers ................................ 103
Climate control ................................. 106
Overview of climate control systems ... 106
Operating the climate control sys-
tems .................................................... 110
Setting the airvents ............................ 115
Drivingand parking .......................... 117
Notesonbreaking-in anew vehicle..... 117
Driving ................................................. 117
DYNAMIC SELECT button .................... 124
Automatictransmission....................... 125
Refueling ............................................. 132
Parking ................................................ 134
Driving tips.......................................... 137
Driving systems ................................... 142
On-board computer and displays .... 168
Important safety notes ........................ 168
Displays and operation ........................ 168
Menusand submenus ......................... 171
Displaymessages ................................ 183
Indicatorand warning lamps ............... 209
Multimediasystem ........................... 218
Generalnotes ...................................... 218
Important safety notes ........................ 218
Function restrictions ............................ 218
Operating system ................................ 219
Stowageand features ...................... 226
Stowageareas ..................................... 226
Features.............................................. 228
Maintenanceand care ...................... 241
Engine compartment ........................... 241
2
Contents
Overview of the engine compart-
ment ....................................................245
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 245
Care ..................................................... 246
Breakdownassistance ..................... 252
Where will Ifind...? .............................. 252
Flat tire ................................................ 253
Battery (vehicle).................................. 258
Jump-starting ....................................... 261
Towing and tow-starting ......................264
Fuses................................................... 266
Wheels and tires ............................... 268
Important safety notes ........................ 268
Operation ............................................ 268
Winter operation.................................. 270
Tire pressure ....................................... 271
Loading the vehicle .............................. 280
All about wheels and tires ................... 282
Changing awheel ................................ 289
Wheeland tire combinations ...............293
Emergency spare wheel ....................... 294
Technical data ................................... 297
Information regarding technical data
............................................................. 297
Vehicle electronics .............................. 297
Identification plates .............................298
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 299
Vehicle data ......................................... 305
Contents
3
1, 2, 3...
12 Vsocket
see Sockets
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 184
Function/notes ................................ 57
Important safety notes .................... 57
Warninglamp .................................211
Accident
Automatic measuresafter an
accident ...........................................53
Acoustic lockingverificationsig-
nal
Activating/deactivating (multi-
media system) ...............................179
Activatingmedia mode
General notes ................................ 224
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 110
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 176
Display message ............................ 189
Function/notes ................................ 58
Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC
Calling up aspeed................. 146,147
Cruise control lever ....................... 146
Deactivating ................................... 150
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Displays in the multifunction dis-
play ................................................ 149
Driving tips.................................... 150
Function/notes............................. 144
Important safety notes .................. 145
Indicatorand warning lamp ........... 216
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 149
Stopping ........................................ 148
Storing aspeed .............................. 147
Warning lamp ................................. 216
Active light function ......................... 100
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes................................ 59
Adaptive brake lights .......................... 60
Adaptive Damping System
Function/notes............................. 153
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Displaymessage ............................ 195
Function/notes............................. 100
Switching on/off........................... 100
Additives(engine oil) ........................ 302
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Adjustingthe volume
Multimedia system ........................ 219
Airbags
Deployment ..................................... 50
Displaymessage ............................ 192
Front airbag (driver, front
passenger)....................................... 44
Headbag ......................................... 45
Important safety notes .................... 43
Introduction ..................................... 43
Knee bag.......................................... 45
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 39
Sideimpact airbag .......................... 45
Airvents
Important safety notes .................. 115
Setting ........................................... 115
Setting the blower outputofthe
AIRSCARFvents ............................. 116
Setting the center airvents ........... 115
Setting the sideair vents ............... 115
Switching AIRSCARFon/off............ 89
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRGUIDE ............................................. 82
AIRSCARF
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
Switching on/off.............................. 89
AIRSCARF vents
Setting the blower output.............. 116
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)......... 64
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 64
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 64
4
Index
Alarmsystem
see ATA(Anti-Theft Alarmsystem)
Ambient lighting
Setting thebrightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 178
Setting thecolor (on-board com-
puter) .............................................178
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 180
AMG sports suspension
(Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
Function/notes .............................153
Anti-lockbraking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Anti-theft alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 230
Assistancedisplay (on-board
computer) .......................................... 176
Assistancemenu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................175
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying aservice message ........246
Hiding aservice message .............. 246
Resetting the service intervaldis-
play................................................ 246
Service message ............................ 245
Specialservice requirements ......... 246
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 64
Function ...........................................64
Switching off the alarm .................... 64
ATTENTIONASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 176
Displaymessage ............................ 198
Function/notes............................. 163
Audiomenu(on-board computer) .... 174
Audiosystem
see Digital Operator's Manual
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
AUTO lights
Displaymessage ............................ 194
see Lights
Automatic car wash(care) ............... 247
Automatic engine start (ECO
start/stopfunction) .......................... 122
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stopfunction) .......................... 121
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 97
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedalposition ............. 128
Changing gear............................... 128
Displaymessage ............................ 204
Drive program................................ 128
Drive programdisplay .................... 125
Driving tips.................................... 128
DYNAMIC SELECT button .............. 124
Emergency running mode.............. 132
Engaging drive position .................. 127
Engaging neutral ............................ 126
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 126
Engaging reverse gear................... 126
Engaging the park position ............ 126
Gearshift recommendation ............ 131
Kickdown....................................... 128
Manualshifting .............................. 129
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ...... 180
Overview ........................................ 125
Problem (malfunction) ................... 132
Pulling away ................................... 120
Selector lever ................................ 125
Starting the engine ........................ 120
Steering wheelpaddleshifters ...... 129
Transmission position display ........ 125
Transmission positions .................. 127
Automatic transmissionemer-
gencymode ....................................... 132
B
Back button ....................................... 219
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 57
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 69
Important safety notes .................... 68
Replacing ......................................... 69
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 260
Displaymessage ............................ 196
Index
5
Important safety notes .................. 258
Jump starting .................................261
Overview ........................................ 258
Replacing ....................................... 261
Belt
see Seat belts
Belt warning ......................................... 42
BlindSpot Assist
Activating/deactivating ................. 176
Display message ............................ 199
Notes/function .............................. 164
Bluetooth
®
Searching for amobile phone ........222
Searching for amobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 223
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
Telephony ...................................... 222
Brake Assist System
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 189
Notes ............................................. 302
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Adaptive ...........................................60
Display message ............................ 194
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 57
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 59
BAS .................................................. 57
Brake fluid (notes).........................302
Display message ............................ 184
EBD ..................................................63
High-performance brake system .... 141
Important safety notes .................. 139
Maintenance .................................. 140
Parking brake ................................ 135
Riding tips ...................................... 139
Warning lamp ................................. 211
Breakdown assistance
Reflective safety jacket .................. 252
Where will Ifind...? ........................ 252
see Flattire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 32
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
C
California
Important notice for retail cus-
tomers and lessees.......................... 24
Calling up amalfunction
see Displaymessages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Carwash........................................ 247
Exhaust pipe..................................251
Exterior lights ................................ 250
Matte finish ................................... 249
Notes ............................................. 246
Paint .............................................. 248
Power washer ................................ 248
Rearview camera .......................... 251
Sensors ......................................... 251
Washing by hand ........................... 247
Wheels ...........................................250
Windows ........................................ 250
Wiper blades .................................. 250
CD
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
CD player (on-board computer) ........174
Center console
Lowersection .................................. 35
Uppersection .................................. 34
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 179
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........66
Changing bulbs
Sidemarker lamps (rear)............... 103
Child
Restraintsystem .............................. 55
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 56
On thefront-passenger seat ............ 56
Rearward-facingrestraint system .... 56
6
Index
Children
Special seat belt retractor............... 54
Children in thevehicle
Important safety notes....................53
Cigarettelighter ................................ 230
Cleaning
Mirror turnsignal ...........................251
Climate control
Air-conditioning system ................. 106
Automatic climate control (dual-
zone) .............................................. 108
Controlling automatically ...............111
Cooling with airdehumidification .. 110
Defrosting the windows ................. 113
Defrosting the windshield .............. 112
General notes ................................ 106
Indicator lamp ................................ 111
Information about using auto-
matic climate control ..................... 109
Maximum cooling .......................... 113
Notes on using the air-condition-
ing system ..................................... 107
Overview of systems ......................106
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 114
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 111
Refrigerant ..................................... 304
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 305
Setting the airdistribution ............. 112
Setting the airvents ......................115
Setting the airflow ......................... 112
Setting the temperature ................ 111
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 114
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Switching residualheaton/off ...... 114
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 113
Switching the ZONE function
on/off ............................................ 112
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 31
see Instrument cluster
Collapsiblespare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 296
see Emergency spare wheel
Combination switch ............................ 99
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 239
Calling up ....................................... 238
Setting ...........................................239
ConnectingaUSB device
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
Consumptionstatistics(on-board
computer) .......................................... 171
Controller ...........................................219
Convenience closing feature .............. 77
Coolant(engine)
Checking the level......................... 243
Display message ............................ 195
Filling capacity ............................... 303
Important safety notes .................. 303
Temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ...... 180
Temperature gauge ........................ 169
Warning lamp ................................. 214
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 30
Corneringlight function
Display message ............................ 194
Function/notes ................................ 99
Cruisecontrol
Cruise control lever....................... 142
Deactivating ................................... 144
Display message ............................ 201
Driving system ............................... 142
Function/notes .............................142
Important safety notes .................. 142
Setting aspeed.............................. 143
Storing and maintaining current
speed............................................. 143
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 229
Important safety notes .................. 228
Customer AssistanceCenter
(CAC) ..................................................... 28
Customer Relations Department ....... 28
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Index
7
Data
see Technicaldata
Datacarrier
Selecting ........................................ 174
Daytime runninglamps
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Function/notes ................................ 97
Switchingon/off(on-boardcom-
puter) .............................................177
Declarations of conformity ................. 27
Decorative film
Cleaning instructions ..................... 249
Delayedswitch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 178
Interior lighting .............................. 178
Diagnosticsconnection ......................27
Digital Operator's Manual
Help .................................................22
Introduction .....................................22
Digital speedometer .........................172
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 245
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 183
Driving systems .............................198
Engine ............................................ 195
General notes ................................ 183
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 183
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 208
Lights ............................................. 194
Safety systems .............................. 184
SmartKey ....................................... 207
Tires............................................... 202
Vehicle ...........................................204
Distancerecorder
see Odometer
see Trip odometer
Distancewarning (warning lamp) .... 216
Distancewarning function
Function/notes ................................ 58
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 179
Automatic locking (switch) ...............73
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) .......................................66
Control panel ...................................37
Display message ............................ 206
Emergency locking ........................... 73
Emergency unlocking ....................... 73
Important safety notes.................... 71
Opening (frominside)...................... 72
Overview .......................................... 71
Drinking and driving ......................... 137
Drive program
Automatictransmission ................. 128
Display........................................... 125
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ............... 181
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving
Towing vehicles ............................. 124
Drivingabroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 246
Drivingonfloodedroads .................. 141
Drivingsafety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 58
Drivingsafety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57
ADAPTIVEBRAKE............................. 64
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 59
Adaptive brake lights ....................... 60
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 57
Distance warning function ............... 58
EBD (electronicbrake force dis-
tribution) .......................................... 63
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 60
Important safety information ........... 57
Overview .......................................... 56
Drivingsystem
AMG sports suspension
(Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ............... 153
Drivingsystems
Adaptive Damping System ............. 153
ATTENTIONASSIST ........................ 163
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 164
Cruise control ................................ 142
Displaymessage ............................ 198
DISTRONIC PLUS........................... 144
HOLD function ............................... 152
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 166
Lane Tracking package.................. 164
Parking Guidance ........................... 157
PARKTRONIC ................................. 154
8
Index
Rear viewcamera .......................... 160
Driving tips
Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC....................................150
Automatictransmission .................128
Brakes ...........................................139
Break-in period .............................. 117
Downhill gradient ........................... 140
Drinking and driving ....................... 137
Driving in winter .............................141
Driving on flooded roads................ 141
Driving on wet roads......................141
Exhaustcheck ............................... 138
Fuel ................................................ 137
General .......................................... 137
Hydroplaning ................................. 141
Icy road surfaces ........................... 141
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads....................................... 140
Snow chains .................................. 271
Subjecting brakes to aload........... 140
Wet road surface ........................... 140
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 174
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
DYNAMICSELECTbutton .................. 124
E
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 179
Function/notes ................................ 91
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive .............................92
Function/notes ................................ 91
Switching on/off ........................... 179
EBD (electronic brake forcedistri-
bution)
Displaymessage............................ 186
Function/notes................................ 63
ECOdisplay
Function/notes............................. 138
On-board computer....................... 171
ECOstart/stopfunction
Automaticengine start .................. 122
Automaticengine switch-off .......... 121
Deactivating/activating ................. 122
Generalinformation ....................... 121
Important safety notes .................. 121
Introduction ................................... 121
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automaticmeasures afteran
accident ........................................... 53
Emergencyrelease
Driver's door.................................... 73
Trunk ............................................... 75
Vehicle............................................. 73
Emergencyspare wheel
Generalnotes ................................ 295
Important safety notes .................. 294
Removing ....................................... 295
Storage location ............................ 295
Stowing .......................................... 295
Technical data ............................... 295
EmergencyTensioningDevices
Activation ......................................... 50
Emissionscontrol
Service and warranty information .... 24
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 214
Displaymessage ............................ 195
ECO start/stop function ................ 121
Engine number ............................... 299
Irregularrunning ............................ 123
Jump-starting ................................. 261
Overview ........................................ 245
Starting problems .......................... 123
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 120
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 120
Switching off .................................. 135
Tow-starting (vehicle)..................... 266
Engine electronics
Notes............................................. 297
Problem (malfunction) ................... 123
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 242
Additives ........................................ 302
Checking the oillevel ..................... 242
Checking the oillevel using the
dipstick .......................................... 242
Displaymessage ............................ 197
Filling capacity ............................... 302
Index
9
General notes................................302
Notes about oil grades ...................302
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 242
Temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ...... 180
Entering an address
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 181
Characteristics ................................. 61
Deactivating/activating (except
SLC 43 AMG) ................................... 61
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................. 62
Display message ............................ 184
Function/notes ................................ 60
General notes .................................. 60
Important safety information ........... 61
Warning lamp ................................. 212
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
System) ................................................ 61
Exhaustcheck ................................... 138
Exhaustpipe (cleaning instruc-
tions) ..................................................251
Exterior lighting
Setting options ................................ 97
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 92
Calling up astored parking posi-
tion ..................................................95
Dipping (automatic) .........................93
Folding in whenlocking (on-
board computer) ............................ 180
Folding in/out(automatically)......... 93
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93
Outofposition (troubleshooting)..... 93
Setting and storing the parking
position for reverse gear.................. 94
Setting and storing the parking
position using the memory but-
ton ................................................... 94
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 95
Storing the parking position ............. 94
Eyeglassescompartment ................. 227
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 220
Filler cap
see Refueling
Fillingcapacities(Technical data) ... 299
Flat tire
MOExtended tires.......................... 254
Preparing the vehicle..................... 253
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 255
see Emergency spare wheel
Flexible Fuelvehicles ........................ 300
Floormats ........................................... 239
Frequencies
Mobilephone ................................. 297
Two-way radio ................................ 297
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 301
Consumption statistics .................. 171
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 172
Displaying the range...................... 172
Driving tips.................................... 137
E10 ................................................ 300
Fuelgauge ....................................... 32
Grade (gasoline)............................ 300
Important safety notes .................. 300
Problem (malfunction) ................... 134
Refueling ........................................ 132
Tank content/reserve fuel............. 300
Fuelfillerflap
Opening ......................................... 133
Fuellevel
Calling up the range(on-board
computer) ...................................... 172
Fueltank
Capacity ........................................ 300
Problem (malfunction) ................... 134
Fuseallocationchart (vehicletool
kit) ...................................................... 253
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 266
Before changing ............................. 266
Fusebox in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 267
10
Index
Fusebox in the trunk ..................... 267
Important safety notes .................. 266
G
Garage dooropener
Clearing the memory ..................... 238
Generalnotes ................................ 235
Important safety notes .................. 236
Opening/closing the garagedoor..238
Problems whenprogramming ........ 237
Programming (button in the rear-
viewmirror) ................................... 236
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 236
Gear indicator(on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ......... 180
Genuineparts ...................................... 23
Glove box ........................................... 226
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
H
Harmful substances
Information ...................................... 26
Hazard warning lamps
Displaymessage............................ 207
Switching on/off .............................. 99
Head bags
Displaymessage............................ 191
Operation ......................................... 45
Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 89
Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 87
see NECK-PRO headrestraints
Headlamps
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
Highbeamflasher ............................... 99
High-beam headlamps
Displaymessage............................ 194
Replacing bulbs............................. 103
Switching on/off.............................. 99
Hillstart assist .................................. 120
HOLDfunction
Activating ....................................... 152
Activation conditions ..................... 152
Deactivating ................................... 152
Displaymessage ............................ 198
Generalnotes ................................ 152
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Hood
Closing ........................................... 242
Displaymessage ............................ 206
Important safety notes .................. 241
Opening ......................................... 241
Horn ...................................................... 31
Hydroplaning ..................................... 141
I
Ignitionlock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 64
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 32
Instrument clusterlighting .............. 168
Interior lighting
Automaticcontrol .......................... 101
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 178
Reading lamp ................................. 101
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 178
iPod
®
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 253
Using ............................................. 291
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 261
Index
11
K
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 118
SmartKey .......................................118
KEYLESS-GO
Activating ......................................... 66
Convenience closing feature ............ 77
Deactivation ..................................... 66
Display message ............................ 208
Locking ............................................ 66
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 119
Start/Stop button .......................... 118
Starting the engine ........................ 120
Unlocking ......................................... 66
Kickdown
Driving tips ....................................128
Manual gearshifting ....................... 131
Kneebag .............................................. 45
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane KeepingAssist
Activating/deactivating ................. 176
Display message ............................ 199
Function/information.................... 166
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 181
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 194
Light function, active
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Light sensor(display message) ....... 194
Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-
riorlighting delayedswitch-off ....... 178
Active light function ....................... 100
Automaticheadlamp mode.............. 97
Cornering light function ................... 99
Hazard warning lamps ..................... 99
Highbeamflasher............................ 99
High-beam headlamps..................... 99
Light switch ..................................... 97
Low-beamheadlamps...................... 98
Parking lamps .................................. 98
Rear fog lamp .................................. 98
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 178
Standing lamps ................................ 98
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off(on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 177
Switching the exteriorlighting
delayedswitch-off on/off(on-
board computer) ............................ 178
Switching the surround lighting
on/off(on-board computer) .......... 178
Turn signals ..................................... 99
see Interior lighting
see Replacing the bulbs
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic........................................ 73
Emergency locking ........................... 73
From inside (central locking but-
ton) .................................................. 72
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 179
Low-beam headlamps
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Replacing bulbs............................. 102
Switching on/off.............................. 98
Luggagecover
see Trunk partition
Lumbar support ................................... 88
M
M+S tires ............................................ 270
MAGIC SKYCONTROL ......................... 83
Malfunctionmessage
see Displaymessages
Matte finish(cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 249
Mechanical key
Function/notes................................ 68
Generalnotes .................................. 68
Inserting .......................................... 68
Locking vehicle................................ 73
Removing ......................................... 68
12
Index
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 73
Media Interface
see Digital Operator's Manual
Memory card (audio) .........................174
Memory function ................................. 95
Mercedes me connect
Call priority ....................................234
General notes ................................ 231
Info call button .............................. 234
Mercedes-Benz emergency call ..... 232
Remote Vehicle Health Check ....... 234
Roadside Assistance call button .... 233
Self-diagnosis ................................ 231
System .......................................... 231
Mercedes-Benz IntelligentDrive
Rearview camera .......................... 160
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................183
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-view mirror
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) .............................................. 222
Connecting (device manager) ........223
Frequencies ................................... 297
Installation..................................... 297
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 174
Transmissionoutput (maximum).... 297
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................67
MOExtended tires .............................. 254
Mountingwheels
Lowering the vehicle...................... 293
Mounting anew wheel................... 292
Preparing the vehicle.....................290
Raising the vehicle ......................... 291
Removing awheel .......................... 292
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 290
MP3
Operation ....................................... 174
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
Multifunctiondisplay
Function/notes .............................170
Permanent display......................... 177
Multifunctionsteering wheel
Operating the on-board com-
puter.............................................. 169
Overview .......................................... 33
Multimedia system
Switching on and off ......................219
Music files
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
N
Navigation
Entering adestination .................... 220
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 172
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
Navigation menu
Important safety notes .................. 172
NECK-PRO head restraints
Important safety notes .................... 52
Operation ......................................... 52
Resetting triggered .......................... 53
Notes on breaking-inanew vehi-
cle ....................................................... 117
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 46
Faults ............................................... 49
Operation ......................................... 46
Self-test ...........................................48
Occupant safety
Air bags ...........................................43
Automatic measures after an
accident ........................................... 53
Beltwarning ..................................... 42
Childreninthe vehicle..................... 53
Important safety notes.................... 38
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 38
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 46
Index
13
PASSENGERAIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 39
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 56
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ...............................53
Restraintsystem warninglamp ........ 39
Seat belt .......................................... 39
OCS
Faults ...............................................49
Operation ......................................... 46
Self-test ...........................................48
Odometer ...........................................171
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 180
Assistance menu ........................... 175
Audiomenu ................................... 174
Convenience submenu .................. 179
Display messages .......................... 183
Displaying aservice message ........246
Factory settings submenu ............. 180
Important safety notes .................. 168
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 177
Lighting submenu .......................... 177
Menu overview .............................. 171
Message memory .......................... 183
Navigation menu ............................ 172
Operation ....................................... 169
RACETIMER ................................... 181
Service menu ................................. 177
Settings menu ............................... 177
Standard display............................ 171
Telephone menu ............................ 174
Tripmenu ...................................... 171
Vehiclesubmenu ........................... 179
Video DVD operation ..................... 174
Operatingsafety
Declaration of conformity ................ 27
Important safety notes .................... 26
Operatingsystem
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual................ 22
Operator's Manual
Vehicleequipment ........................... 24
Outside temperature display ........... 168
Overhead controlpanel ...................... 36
P
Paddleshifters
see Steering wheelpaddleshifters
Paint code number ............................ 298
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 248
Panic alarm .......................................... 38
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 134
Parking brake ................................ 135
Position of exteriormirror, front-
passenger side ................................. 94
Rear viewcamera .......................... 160
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Parking Guidance ........................... 157
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 156
Important safety notes .................. 154
Problems (malfunctions)................ 157
Sensorrange................................. 154
Warning display ............................. 155
Parking brake
Applying automatically................... 136
Applying or releasing manually ...... 136
Displaymessage ............................ 186
Electric parking brake .................... 135
Emergency braking ........................ 136
Generalnotes ................................ 135
Releasing automatically................. 136
Warning lamp ................................. 213
Parking Guidance
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Important safety notes .................. 157
Parking lamps
Switching on/off.............................. 98
PARKTRONIC
Driving system ............................... 154
Function/notes............................. 154
PASSENGER AIRBAG
Displaymessage ............................ 192
Indicatorlamps ................................ 39
Problems (malfunction) .................. 192
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 56
14
Index
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 218
Pivoting draft stop
see AIRGUIDE
Power washers ..................................248
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection)
Display message ............................ 189
Operation ......................................... 53
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 64
Immobilizer...................................... 64
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 23
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 120
General notes ................................ 120
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 28
Qualifiedspecialist workshop ........... 27
R
RACETIMER (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 181
Radio
Selecting astation......................... 174
see DigitalOperator's Manual
Radio mode
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sioninthe vehicle
Declarationofconformity ................ 27
Readinglamp ..................................... 101
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 194
Switching on/off .............................. 98
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear viewcamera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 251
Display in the multimediasystem .. 161
Function/notes .............................160
Switching on/off ........................... 160
Rear window defroster
General notes ................................ 113
Problem (malfunction) ................... 114
Switching on/off ........................... 113
Rear-viewmirror
Anti-glare (manual).......................... 92
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 93
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 304
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Important safety notes .................. 132
Refueling process.......................... 133
see Fuel
Remote control
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 236
Replacing bulbs
High-beam headlamps ................... 103
Important safety notes .................. 101
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 102
Low-beam headlamps .................... 102
Overview of bulbtypes.................. 102
Reporting safety defects .................... 28
Rescue card ......................................... 28
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Displaymessage ............................ 198
Warning lamp ................................. 214
Residual heat(climate control) ........ 114
Restraintsystem
Displaymessage ............................ 190
Introduction ..................................... 38
Warning lamp ................................. 213
Warning lamp (function) ................... 39
Reversegear
Engaging (automatictransmis-
sion) ............................................... 126
Reversible floor panel(trunk) .......... 228
Index
15
Reversingfeature
Sidewindows................................... 75
Reversinglamps (displaymes-
sage) ................................................... 194
Roadside Assistance(breakdown) .... 25
Roof
Displaymessage............................ 206
Important safety notes .................... 78
Opening/closing (with roof
switch) ............................................. 79
Opening/closing (with SmartKey).... 80
Overview .......................................... 78
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 84
Relocking ......................................... 80
Roofcarrier ........................................ 228
Roofswitch .......................................... 79
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Route guidanceactive ...................... 173
S
Safety
Childreninthe vehicle..................... 53
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 225
Inserting/removing ........................ 224
Removing ....................................... 225
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Selecting ........................................ 174
Search &Send
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Seat
Correct driver'sseatposition ........... 85
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver'sand front-
passenger seatbelt......................... 42
Correct usage.................................. 41
Fastening ......................................... 42
Important safety guidelines............. 40
Introduction ..................................... 39
Releasing ......................................... 42
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 180
Warning lamp ................................. 209
Warning lamp (function) ................... 42
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 87
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 87
Adjusting the 4-waylumbarsup-
port.................................................. 88
Adjusting the headrestraint ............ 87
Important safety notes .................... 85
Overview .......................................... 85
Seatheating problem ...................... 89
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 95
Switching AIRSCARFon/off............ 89
Switching seatheating on/off......... 88
Selectorlever
Positions ........................................ 125
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 251
Servicemenu(on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 177
Servicemessage
see ASSYST PLUS
Serviceproducts
Brake fluid ..................................... 302
Coolant (engine) ............................ 303
Engine oil....................................... 302
Fuel................................................ 300
Important safety notes .................. 299
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 304
Washerfluid ................................... 304
Settingthe air distribution ............... 112
Setting the airflow ............................ 112
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Settingthe language
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Settingthe time
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 180
On-board computer....................... 177
16
Index
SETUP (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 181
Side impact air bag ............................. 45
Side marker lamp
Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 103
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 194
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 250
Convenienceclosing feature ............ 77
Important safety information ........... 75
Opening/closing (all) ....................... 76
Opening/closing (front)................... 76
Overview .......................................... 75
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78
Resetting ......................................... 77
Reversing feature ............................. 75
SIRIUSservices
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 69
Changing the programming ............. 67
Checking the battery ....................... 69
Displaymessage ............................ 207
Door centrallocking/unlocking ....... 66
Important safety notes .................... 66
Loss................................................. 70
Mechanical key ................................ 68
Opening/closing the roof................ 80
Overview .......................................... 66
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 118
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70
Starting the engine ........................ 120
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Snowchains ...................................... 271
Sockets
Center console .............................. 231
Generalnotes ................................ 230
Sound
Switching on/off........................... 219
Special seat belt retractor .................. 54
Specialist workshop ............................ 27
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 172
In the Instrument cluster ................. 32
Segments ...................................... 168
Selecting the display unit............... 177
Sport handlingmode
Activating/deactivating
(Mercedes-AMGSLC 43) ................. 62
Warning lamp ................................. 213
Standinglamps
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Switching on/off.............................. 98
Start/stopfunction
see ECO start/stop function
Starting(engine) ................................ 119
Steering
Displaymessage ............................ 206
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 90
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 90
Buttonoverview ............................... 33
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 169
Important safety notes .................... 89
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 95
Steering wheelpaddle shifters ........ 129
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 181
Stowageareas ................................... 226
Stowagecompartments
Armrest (under)............................. 226
Center console .............................. 227
Cupholders ................................... 228
Door ............................................... 227
Eyeglasses compartment ............... 227
Glove box ....................................... 226
Important safety information ......... 226
Rear wall ........................................ 227
Stowagenet ................................... 227
Stowagenet ....................................... 227
Summertires ..................................... 270
Sun visor ............................................ 229
Surround lighting (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 178
Switchingair-recirculationmode
on/off ................................................. 114
Switchingonmediamode
Via the device list .......................... 224
Index
17
T
Tachometer ........................................ 168
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 194
see Lights
Tank content
Fuelgauge ....................................... 32
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 299
Emergency spare wheel................. 295
Information.................................... 297
Tires/wheels ................................. 293
Vehicledata................................... 305
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 234
Emergency call.............................. 232
Generalnotes ................................ 231
MB info callbutton ........................234
Roadside Assistance button .......... 233
Self-test ......................................... 231
System .......................................... 231
Vehicle Health Check .................... 234
Telephone
Accepting acall (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 175
Authorizing amobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 222
Authorizing amobile phone via
the device manager (connecting) ... 223
Connecting amobile phone
(device manager) ........................... 223
Connecting amobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 222
Display message ............................ 206
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 174
Number from the phone book ........175
Redialing ........................................ 175
Rejecting/ending acall ................. 175
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................218
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 169
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ 180
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ................ 180
Outside temperature ......................168
Setting (climate control) ................ 111
Transmissionoil (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG SLC 43) ...... 180
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 181
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 275
Checking manually ........................ 274
Display message ............................ 202
Maximum ....................................... 274
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 257
Notes ............................................. 273
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 257
Recommended ............................... 271
Tire pressure losswarning sys-
tem
General notes ................................ 274
Important safety notes .................. 275
Restarting ...................................... 275
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 277
Function/notes .............................275
General notes ................................ 275
Important safety notes .................. 276
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 279
Restarting ...................................... 278
Warning lamp ................................. 217
Warning message .......................... 277
Tire-change tool kit ........................... 253
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 255
Important safety notes .................. 255
Storage location ............................ 253
Tire pressure not reached .............. 257
Tire pressure reached .................... 257
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 288
Averageweight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 287
Bar (definition) ............................... 287
Changing awheel .......................... 289
Characteristics .............................. 287
Checking ........................................ 268
Curb weight (definition) ................. 288
Definition of terms ......................... 287
Direction of rotation...................... 290
Displaymessage ............................ 202
18
Index
Distributionofthe vehicleoccu-
pants (definition) ............................ 289
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 287
DOT, Tire IdentificationNumber
(TIN) ............................................... 286
GAWR(GrossAxle Weight Rat-
ing)(definition) .............................. 288
GVW(GrossVehicleWeight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 288
GVWR (GrossVehicleWeight
Rating)(definition) .........................288
Important safety notes .................. 268
Increasedvehicle weight due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 287
Information on driving .................... 268
Kilopascal (kPa)(definition) ........... 288
Labeling (overview)........................ 284
Loadbearing index (definition) ...... 289
Loadindex ..................................... 286
Loadindex (definition) ................... 288
M+S tires....................................... 270
Maximumloadonatire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 288
Maximumloaded vehicleweight
(definition) ..................................... 288
Maximumpermissibletire pres-
sure (definition) ............................. 288
Maximumtire load ......................... 286
Maximumtire load (definition) ....... 288
MOExtended tires.......................... 270
Optionalequipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 289
Overview ........................................ 268
PSI (pounds persquare inch)
(definition) ..................................... 288
Replacing ....................................... 289
Service life ..................................... 269
Sidewall(definition) ....................... 289
Speed rating (definition) ................ 288
Storing ........................................... 290
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 287
Summer tires................................. 270
Temperature .................................. 283
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 289
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 289
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 288
Tire pressures (recommended)...... 287
Tire size (data)............................... 293
Tire size designation, load-bear-
ing capacity, speed rating .............. 284
Tire tread....................................... 269
Tire tread(definition) ..................... 289
Totalloadlimit (definition) ............. 289
Traction......................................... 283
Traction(definition) ....................... 289
Tread wear ..................................... 283
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards...................................... 282
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards(definition) .................... 287
Wearindicator (definition) ............. 289
Wheel and tire combination ........... 293
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 288
see Flattire
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 266
Important safety notes .................. 264
Towing
Permittedtowing methods ............ 265
Towingaway
Important safety guidelines........... 264
Installing the towing eye................ 264
Removing the towing eye............... 265
Transporting the vehicle................ 266
With both axles on the ground ....... 265
With the rearaxleraised ................ 265
Trafficreports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Transmission
Overview of transmission posi-
tions .............................................. 125
Selector lever ................................ 125
see Automatictransmission
Transmissionposition display ......... 125
Transporting the vehicle .................. 266
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 171
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 171
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 172
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 74
Index
19
Important safety notes .................... 73
Locking separately ........................... 74
Opening/closing (manually from
outside) ............................................ 74
Overview .......................................... 73
Trunk lid
Displaymessage............................ 205
Opening dimensions ...................... 305
Trunk partition
Displaymessage ............................ 206
Generalnotes .................................. 80
Opening/closing .............................. 81
Turn signals
Displaymessage ............................ 194
Switching on/off.............................. 99
Two-wayradio
Frequencies................................... 297
Installation ..................................... 297
Transmission output(maximum) .... 297
Type identificationplate
see Vehicleidentification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 73
From inside the vehicle(central
unlocking button) ............................. 72
Upshiftindicator
(on-board computer, Mercedes-
AMG SLC 43) ................................. 180
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 225
V
Vehicle
Correct use...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Displaymessage ............................ 204
Electronics ..................................... 297
Equipment ....................................... 24
Individualsettings .......................... 177
LimitedWarranty ............................. 28
Loading .......................................... 280
Locking (inanemergency) ............... 73
Locking (SmartKey).......................... 66
Lowering ........................................ 293
Maintenance .................................... 25
Parking for alongperiod................ 137
Pulling away ................................... 120
Raising ........................................... 291
Reporting problems ......................... 28
Securing from rolling away ............ 290
Tow-starting ................................... 264
Towing away .................................. 264
Transporting .................................. 266
Unlocking (inanemergency) ........... 73
Unlocking (SmartKey)...................... 66
Vehicledata................................... 305
Vehiclebattery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicledata ....................................... 305
Vehicledimensions ........................... 305
Vehicleemergencylocking ................ 73
Vehicleidentificationnumber
see VIN
Vehicleidentificationplate .............. 298
Vehicletoolkit .................................. 253
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 174
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
VIN
Seat............................................... 299
Type plate ...................................... 298
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 211
Active Brake Assist ........................ 216
Brake Assist ................................... 216
Brakes ........................................... 211
Check Engine ................................. 214
Coolant .......................................... 214
Distance warning ........................... 216
ESP
®
.............................................. 212
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 213
Fueltank ........................................ 214
Generalnotes ................................ 209
Parking brake ................................ 213
PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 39
Reserve fuel................................... 214
Restraint system ............................ 213
Seatbelt........................................ 209
20
Index
SPORThandling mode................... 213
Tire pressure monitor .................... 217
Warranty .............................................. 24
Washerfluid
Displaymessage ............................ 207
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 218
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 293
Wheel bolt tighteningtorque ........... 293
Wheel chock ...................................... 290
Wheels
Changing awheel .......................... 289
Checking ........................................ 268
Cleaning ......................................... 250
Emergency spare wheel ................. 294
Important safety notes .................. 268
Information on driving .................... 268
Interchanging/changing ................ 289
Mounting anew wheel ................... 292
Mounting awheel .......................... 290
Overview ........................................ 268
Removing awheel .......................... 292
Storing ........................................... 290
Tightening torque ........................... 293
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 293
Windscreen
Inserting and removing .................... 81
Preparing for installation .................. 81
see AIRGUIDE
Windows
see Sidewindows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 112
Windshieldwasher fluid
see Windshield washersystem
Windshieldwasher system
Adding washerfluid ....................... 244
Important safety notes .................. 304
Windshieldwipers
Displaymessage ............................ 207
Problem (malfunction) ................... 105
Replacing the wiperblades............ 104
Switching on/off........................... 103
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 270
Slippery roadsurfaces ................... 141
Snow chains .................................. 271
Winter operation
Overview ........................................ 270
Winter tires
M+S tires....................................... 270
Wiperblades
Cleaning ......................................... 250
Important safety notes .................. 104
Replacing ....................................... 104
Workshop
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off........................... 112
Index
21
Introduction
The printedOperator's Manual providesinfor-
mation about thesafeoperation of your vehi-
cle.The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensiveand specifically adapted infor-
mation on your vehicle's equipmentand multi-
media system. You can call up theDigital
Operator's Manual via themultimedia system.
i
You will notincur any costswhen calling
up theDigital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connect-
ing to theInternet.
Thereare three ways to access thetopicsof
theDigital Operator's Manual:
R
Visualsearch
The visual search allows you to exploreyour
vehicle"virtually". Starting from either the
vehicleexteriorvieworinteriorview, you
can access manyofthe differenttopicscov-
eredbythe Digital Operator's Manual. To
access thevehicleinteriorsection,select
the"Vehicleinterior" view.
R
Keywordsearch
The keyword search allows you to search for
akeyword by enteringcharacters.
R
Contents
You can select individual sectionsinthe
contents.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
tedfor safetyreasonswhile driving.
Operation
Calling up theDigital Operator's
Manual
X
Press the Ø buttoninthe center con-
sole.
The overview relating to thevehicleappears.
X
Selectthe "Operator's Manual" menuitem
by turning 3 or pressing 7 thecontrol-
ler.
X
Confirm 7 themessage about thewarning
and safetynotes.
The basic menufor theDigital Operator's
Manual appears.
Operating theDigital Operator's
Manual
General notes
Pleaseobservethe information about the
operation of thecontroller (Y page 219).
Content pages
The contentpages can be accessed by means
of avisual search,akeyword search or using
thecontents.
X
To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
thecontroller.
X
To displayinfull-screen or animation:
slide 8 thecontroller to theleft :.
X
To select information texts or savebook-
marks: slide 9 thecontroller to the
right ;.
X
To select alink: slide 6 thecontroller
downwards =.
X
To exit acontent page: select % sym-
bol ?.
X
To call up thebasic menuofthe Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol
A.
X
To switch functions to themultimedia
system using thebuttonsonthe center
console: press the $, %, Õ or
Ø button.
The selected menuappears. The Digital
Operator's Manual remainsopen in the
background.
22
Digital Operator's Manual
Protecting the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in amanner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affec-
ted by these factors:
R
operating conditionsofyour vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel
consumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer
need them.
R
aregularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal
when startingthe engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain asafe dis-
tance from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine
speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con-
sumption.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the operating instructions require
you to dispose of materials, first try to regen-
erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant
environmental rules and regulations when dis-
posing of materials. In this way you will help to
protect the environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also suppliesreconditioned
major assemblies and parts which are of the
same quality as new parts. They are covered
by the same Limited Warranty entitlements
as new parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrumentcluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out
repairs or welding. You could impair the
operating efficiency of the restraint sys-
tems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels
as well as accessories relevant to safety which
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
23
Introduction
Z
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rele-
vant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only
genuine Mercedes-Benzparts or parts of equal
quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories
that have been specifically approved for your
vehicle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benzparts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benzparts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benzparts are available for
Mercedes-Benzmodels.
All authorized Mercedes-BenzCenters main-
tain asupply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts
for necessary service and repair work. In addi-
tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-
ters provide quick and reliableparts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification num-
ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-
Benz parts (Y page 298).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all mod-
els and all standard and optional equipment
of your vehicle available at the time of going
to print. Country-specific differences are
possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may
not feature all functions described here.
This also applies to safety-relevant systems
and functions. The equipment in your vehi-
cle may therefore differ from that shown in
the descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and should
be kept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies
in accordance with the warranty terms and
conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System War-
ranty
R
State warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are cov-
ered by the Mercedes-BenzParts and Acces-
sories warranties. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
i
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter arrange for a
replacement. The new Service and Warranty
Information booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in Califor-
nia
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or arefund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after areason-
able number of repair attemptsMercedes-
Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or
service facilities fail to fix one or more sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle
that are covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
29,000 km (approximately 18,000 miles) on
the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, areasonable number of repair attempts
is presumed for aretail buyer or lessee if one
or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-
tion results in acondition that is likely to
24
Service and vehicleoperation
Introduction
cause death or seriousbodilyinjury if the
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-
tion hasbeensubject to repairtwo or
more times, and youhavedirectlynotified
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the
need for its repair.
(2) the samesubstantialdefect or malfunc-
tion of alessseriousnature than category
(1) hasbeensubject to repairfourormore
timesand youhavedirectlynotified
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for
its repair.
(3) the vehicle is outofservice by reason of
repairofthe sameordifferent substantial
defects or malfunctions for acumulative
total of more than 30 calendardays.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
CustomerAssistance Center
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
SandySprings, GA 30328
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all
the necessarymaintenance work which should
be done at regularintervals.
Alwayshavethe Service and Warranty Booklet
with youwhenyou bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service
advisor will recordevery service for youinthe
Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance Pro-
gramoffers technical helpinthe event of a
breakdown. Callstothe toll-free Roadside
Assistance Hotline are answeredbyour agents
24 hours aday,365 days ayear.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additionalinformation, refertothe
Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet
(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-
erature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of achange of address, please
send us the "Notification of Address Change"
in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply
callthe Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada)at
1-800-387-0100.Thiswillassistusincontact-
ing youinatimely mannershouldthe need
arise.
If yousellyourMercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehiclesothatitis
available to the next owner.
If youhavepurchased ausedcar,pleasesend
us the "NotificationofUsedCar Purchase" in
the Service and Guarantee bookletorsimply
callthe Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada)at
1-800-387-0100.
Vehicleoperationoutside the USA
and Canada
Whenyou are abroadwithyourvehicle,
observe the following points:
R
Service facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
R
Lead-freefuelfor vehicles with acatalytic
converter may not be available.Leadedfuel
can cause damagetothe catalytic con-
verter.
R
The fuelmay have aconsiderably lower
octane number. Unsuitablefuelcan cause
engine damage.
Some Mercedes-Benz modelsare available for
delivery in Europe throughour European Deliv-
ery Program. For details,consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
SandySprings, GA 30328
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Serviceand vehicle operation
25
Introduction
Z
EuropeanDelivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto,Ontario M4G 4C9
Possible danger due to substances
hazardous to health
In compliance with Proposition65(“Prop65”),
the following detachable labelhas been added
to each vehiclesoldinCalifornia:
Operatingsafety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If youdonot have the prescribedservice/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carriedout,thiscan resultinmalfunctions
or system failures. There is ariskofanacci-
dent.
Alwayshavethe prescribedservice/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
carriedout at aqualified specialistwork-
shop.
G
WARNING
Flammablematerial such as leaves, grass or
twigs mayignite if theycome into contact
with hot parts of the exhaust system.There
is ariskoffire.
When drivingonanunpaved roadoroff-
road, check the vehicleundersideregularly.
In particular,remove trapped plant parts or
otherflammablematerial.Contact aquali-
fiedspecialistworkshop immediatelyifdam-
ageisdetected.
G
WARNING
Modification to electronic components, their
software or wiringcould impairtheir func-
tionand/or the functionofothernetworked
components. In particular,systemsrelevant
to safety could also be affected. As aresult,
these maynolongerfunctionproperly
and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased riskof
accident and injury.
Youmustnot tamperwithwiring, electronic
components, or their software. Youshould
have allworkonelectrical and electronic
components carriedout at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
!
There is ariskofdamagetothe vehicleif:
R
the vehiclebecomesstuck, e.g.onahigh
curboranunpaved road
R
youdrive too fast overanobstacle,e.g.a
curb, aspeed bump or apotholeinthe
road
R
aheavy object strikes the underbodyor
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body,the under-
body,chassisparts, wheels or tirescould be
damagedwithoutthe damage being visible.
Components damagedinthisway can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the caseofanaccident,
no longerwithstand the loadstheyare
designedto.
If the underbodypaneling is damaged, com-
bustiblematerialssuchasleaves, grass or
twigs can gatherbetween the underbody
and the underbodypaneling.Ifthese materi-
alscome in contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system,theycan catchfire.
In such situations, have the vehiclechecked
and repaired immediatelyataqualified spe-
cialist workshop.Ifoncontinuing your jour-
ney younotice thatdrivingsafety is
impaired,pulloverand stop the vehicle
immediately, paying attentiontoroadand
trafficconditions. In such cases, consulta
qualified specialistworkshop.
26
Operatingsafety
Introduction
Declarations of conformity
Vehiclecomponentswhich receive
and/ortransmitradio waves
USA: "The wirelessdevices of this vehicle
complywithPart15ofthe FCC Rules.Opera-
tion is subjecttothe twofollowingtwo condi-
tions: 1) These devices may notcause harmful
interference, and 2) These devices must
accept any interferencereceived, including
interferencethatmay cause undesired opera-
tion.Changes or modificationsnot expressly
approved by theparty responsible forcompli-
ancecould void theuser’s authoritytooperate
theequipment."
Canada: "The wirelessdevices of this vehicle
complywithIndustry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s).Operation is subjecttothe
followingtwo conditions: (1) These devices
may notcause interference, and (2) These
devices mustaccept any interference, includ-
inginterferencethatmay cause undesired
operation of thedevice."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnosticsconnectionisused forcon-
nectingdiagnostic equipmentataqualified
specialistworkshop.
G
WARNING
If you connectequipmenttoadiagnostics
connection in thevehicle, it may affectthe
operation of vehicle systems.Asaresult,
theoperatingsafetyofthe vehicle could be
affected. There is ariskofanaccident.
Only connectequipmenttoadiagnostics
connection in thevehicle, whichisapproved
foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G
WARNING
Objects in thedriver's footwell may restrict
theclearancearound thepedals or blocka
depressed pedal. Thisjeopardizes theoper-
atingand road safetyofthe vehicle. There is
ariskofanaccident.
Stow all objects securely in thevehicle so
that they do notget into thedriver's foot-
well. Whenusingfloormatsorcarpets, make
surethattheyare properly securedsothat
they do notslip or obstruct thepedals. Do
notplaceseveralfloormatsorcarpetson
topofone another.
!
If theengineisswitched offand equip-
mentonthe diagnosticsconnectionisused,
thestarter battery may discharge.
Connectingequipmenttothe diagnosticscon-
nection can lead to emissionsmonitoring
information beingreset,for example. Thismay
lead to thevehicle failingtomeetthe require-
ments of thenextemissionstestduringthe
main inspection.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-BenzCenterisa
qualified specialistworkshop.Ithas theneces-
saryspecialistknowledge,tools and qualifica-
tionstocorrectly carry out theworkrequired
on your vehicle. Thisisespecially thecasefor
workrelevant to safety.
Observethe notesinthe Maintenance Book-
let.
Always havethe followingworkcarriedout at
an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter:
R
workrelevant to safety
R
serviceand maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation workand modifica-
tions
R
workonelectronic components
Correct use
If you removeany warningstickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognizecertaindangers.
Leave warningstickersinposition.
Observethe followinginformation when driv-
ingyour vehicle:
R
thesafetynotes in this manual
R
technical datafor thevehicle
R
traffic rulesand regulations
R
laws and safetystandardspertainingto
motorvehicles
Operating safety
27
Introduction
Z
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience aproblem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
your satisfaction,please discuss the problem
again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter or, if necessary, contact us at one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer AssistanceCenter
One Mercedes-Benz Drive
Sandy Springs, GA 30328
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has adefect
which could cause acrash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration (NHTSA)inaddition to notifying
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation,and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it
may order arecall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA,you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153);goto
http://www.safercar.gov;orwrite to:
Administrator, NHTSA,400 SeventhStreet,
SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
!
Observe the notes in this Operator's Man-
ual regarding the correct operation of your
vehicle and possible damage to the vehicle.
Damage to the vehicle which is caused by
violation of these notes is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or the
new or used-vehicle warranty.
QR code for rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate
rescue card for your vehicle. The current res-
cue card contains the most important informa-
tion about your vehicle in acompact form, e.g.
the routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information at http://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Data storage
Data storage
Awide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
the vehicle's operating state
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
mentsthe state of acomponent, amodule, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditionsofsystem components.
For example, fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of
its individual components, e.g. number of
wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in
movement,lateral acceleration, accelerator
pedal position
28
Data storage
Introduction
R
malfunctions and defects in important sys-
tem components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehiclereactions and operating conditions
in specialdriving situations, e.g. air bag
deployment, intervention of stability control
systems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outsidetempera-
ture
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehiclefunctions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehiclefunctions
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When yourvehicleisserviced,technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data mem-
ory and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranties
R
quality assurance
The vehicleisread out by employeesofthe
service network (including the manufacturer)
using specialdiagnostic testers. More detailed
informationisobtained from it, if required.
After amalfunction has been rectified,the
informationisdeleted from the malfunction
memory or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are
conceivable in which this technical data, in
connection with other information(if neces-
sary,under consultation with an authorized
expert), could be traced to aperson.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been
contractuallyagreeduponwith the customer
allow certain vehicledata to be conveyed by
the vehicleaswell. The additional functions
include, for example, vehiclelocation in case
of an emergency.
COMAND/Mercedes me connect
(Canada: TELEAID)
If the vehicleisequippedwith COMAND or
Mercedesmeconnect, additional data about
the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle
in certain situations, and the locationofthe
vehicleiscompiled through COMAND or the
Mercedesmeconnect system.
For additional information, please refer to the
COMAND User ManualorDigital Operator's
Manualand/or the Mercedesmeconnect
Terms and Conditions.
Event data recorders
USA only:
This vehicleisequippedwith an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicleisequippedwith
an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting aroad obstacle, data
that willassist in understanding how avehi-
cle's systems performed.The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicledynamics and
safety systems for ashort periodoftime, typi-
cally30seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicleisdesigned to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in yourvehiclewere
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all)the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
R
How fast the vehiclewas traveling
These data can help provideabetter under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuriesoccur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by yourvehicleonly if anon-triv-
ial crash situation occurs; no data are recor-
ded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personaldata (e.g. name, gender,
age and crash location) are recorded.How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinelyacquired
during acrash investigation.
Access to the vehicleand/or the EDR is nee-
ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR,
and specialequipment is required. In addition
Data storage
29
Introduction
Z
to the vehiclemanufacturer,otherpartiesthat
have the special equipment, such as law
enforcement, can readthe information by
accessing the vehicleorthe EDR.
EDR data maybeusedincivil and criminal
matters as atoolinaccident reconstruction,
accident claimsand vehiclesafety.Since the
CrashData RetrievalCDR toolthatisusedto
extract data fromthe EDR is commercially
available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA")
expresslydisclaims any and allliability arising
fromthe extractionofthisinformation by
unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
withoutthe consent of the vehicleowners or,
if the vehicleisleased, withoutthe consent of
the lessee. Exceptions to thisrepresentation
includeresponsestosubpoenas by law
enforcement; by federal, state or local govern-
ment; in connectionwithorarising outofliti-
gationinvolvingMBUSA or its subsidiariesand
affiliates;or, as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is acomponent of the
Restraint System Module. Tamperingwith,
altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-
ponent mayresultinamalfunctionofthe
Restraint System Moduleand othersystems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federalregulation arepre-emp-
ted.Thismeans thatinthe event of such con-
flict, the federalregulation governs. As of
December2016, 17 states have enacted laws
relating to EDRs.
Informationoncopyright
General information
Informationonlicensefor freeand open-
source software used in your vehicleand its
electronic components is availableonthe fol-
lowing website:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
30
Informationoncopyright
Introduction
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers 129
;
Combination switch 99
=
Instrumentcluster 32
?
Horn
A
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display 154
B
Overhead control panel 36
C
Climatecontrol systems 106
D
Ignition lock 118
Start/Stopbutton 118
Function Page
E
Adjusts thesteering wheel
manually 89
F
Adjusts thesteering wheel
electrically 89
G
Cruisecontrol lever 142
H
Electric parking brake 135
I
Diagnostics connection 27
J
Opensthe hood 241
K
Lightswitch 97
Cockpit
31
At aglance
Instrumentcluster
Function Page
:
Speedometer withseg-
ments 168
Warning and indicator
lamps:
Electric parking brake(red) 213
F USAonly
! Canadaonly
! Electric parking brake
(yellow) 213
· Distancewarning
216
å ESP
®
OFF
212
! ABS
211
Brakes(red) 211
$ USAonly
J Canadaonly
L Low-beam headlamps
98
T Parking lamps
98
K High-beam headlamps
99
÷ ESP
®
212
;
#! Turn signals
99
=
Multifunction display 170
?
Tachometer 168
Function Page
Warning and indicator
lamps:
M SPORT handlingmode
in theMercedes-AMG
SLC43 213
R Rear fog lamp
98
N This indicator lamp
has no function
; CheckEngine
214
h Tirepressuremonitor
217
6 Restraintsystem
39
ü Seat belts
209
A
Coolanttemperature gage 169
Warning and indicator
lamps:
? Coolant
214
B
Fuellevel indicator
Warning and indicator
lamps:
8 Reserve fuel level with
fuel filler flap location indi-
cator (right) 214
C
Instrumentclusterlighting 168
Information on displayingthe outside tempera-
tureinthe multifunction display can be found
under "Outside temperature display"
(Y page 168).
32
Instrumentcluster
At aglance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 170
;
Multimediasystem display
= ?
Switches on voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Con-
trol System
8
Mute
WX
Adjusts the volume
~
Rejects or endsacall 174
Exits the telephone book/
redialmemory
6
Makes or accepts acall
Switchestothe redialmem-
ory
Function Page
?
=;
Selects amenu 169
9:
Selects asubmenu or
scrolls through lists 169
a
Confirmsaselection 169
Hides display messages 183
%
Back 169
Switches off voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Con-
trol System
i In vehicles with multimediasystem
COMAND youcan find further information:
R
on the multimediasystem in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
i In vehicles with multimediasystem
Audio 20 youcan find further information:
R
on the multimediasystem in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the voice-operated control of the navi-
gation in the manufacturer'soperating
instructions
Multifunctionsteering wheel
33
At aglance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
Multimedia system 219
;
c Seat heating
88
=
Ò AIRSCARF
89
?
c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC 154
A
è ECO start/stopfunc-
tion
121
Function Page
B
£ Hazard warning lamps
99
C
a PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFFindicator lamp 46
D
å ESP
®
61
E
à DYNAMIC SELECT but-
ton 124
i In vehicleswiththe COMAND multimedia
system, you can findfurther information:
R
on themultimedia system in theDigital
Operator's Manual
R
on theVoiceControl Systeminthe sepa-
rateOperator's Manual
i In vehicleswiththe Audio20multimedia
system, you can findfurther information:
R
on themultimedia system in theDigital
Operator's Manual
R
on voice-controlled navigation in theman-
ufacturer'soperatinginstructions
34
Center console
At aglance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
F
Stowage compartment 227
Ashtray 230
Cigarettelighter 230
Socket 231
G
Selector lever 125
H
Stowage compartment
Cup holder 228
I
Stowage compartmentwith
Media Interface 226
Function Page
J
Roof switch cover 79
K
Multimedia system control-
ler
L
p Manual driveprogram
for theautomatic transmis-
sion 129
Center console
35
At aglance
Overheadcontrol panel
Function Page
:
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off 101
;
c Switches the interior
lighting on/off 101
=
µ Operates MAGIC SKY
CONTROL 83
?
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off 101
A
| Switches the auto-
matic interior lighting con-
trol on/off 101
Function Page
B
Eyeglasses compartment 227
C
ï MB Infocall button
234
D
Rear-view mirror 92
E
Buttons for the garage door
opener 238
F
F Breakdown assistance
call button 233
G
G Emergencycall/SOS
button 232
36
Overheadcontrol panel
At aglance
Door controlpanel
Function Page
:
Opens thedoor 72
;
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 72
=
Adjusts the seats electri-
cally 87
?
r 45=
Stores seat, exterior mirror
and steering column adjust-
ment settings 95
A
ö Folds the exterior mir-
rors in/out 93
Function Page
B
\ Selects the right exte-
riormirror 92
C
W Opens/closes the
right sidewindow 75
D
W Opens/closes the left
sidewindow 75
E
7 Adjusts the exterior
mirrors 92
F
Z Selects the left exte-
riormirror 92
Door control panel
37
At aglance
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press ! button : for at
least one second.
Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of
vehicle occupants coming into contact with
parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an
accident. In the event of an accident, the
restraint system can also reduce the forces to
which the vehicle occupants are subjected.
The restraint system includes the following
components:
R
Seat belt system
R
Air bags
The components of the restraint system work
in conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times,
all vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 41)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 85)
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (Y page 85).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed(Ypage 43).
An air bag supplements acorrectly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For
example, if, in the event of an accident, the
protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient,
the air bags are not deployed. When an acci-
dent occurs, only the air bags that increase
protection in that particular accident situation
are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags
generally do not protect against objectspene-
tratingthe vehicle from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags"
(Y page 50).
See "Children in the vehicle" for information
on children traveling with you in the vehicle as
well as on child restraint systems
(Y page 53).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in
an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for
example. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate aperson
with disabilities, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
for further information contact our Customer
AssistanceCenter at 1-800FOR-MERCEDES
(18003676372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
38
Occupant safety
Safety
Restraint system warninglamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checkedafterthe ignition is switched on and
at regular intervalswhile the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
goodtime.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp on
the instrument cluster lights up when the igni-
tion is switched on. It goesout no later than a
few seconds afterthe vehicleisstarted. The
restraint system is operational.
Amalfunction hasoccurred if the 6
restraint system warning lamp:
R
doesnot light up afterthe ignition is
switched on
R
doesnot go outafterafew seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up againwhile the engine is running
G
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig-
gered unintentionally or may not be trig-
gered as intended in the event of an acci-
dent. Thismay affect the Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices or airbags, for example.
There is ariskofinjury.
Have the restraint system checkedand
repaired immediately at aqualified specialist
workshop.
PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp :
and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS).
The indicator lamps display the statusofthe
front-passenger front airbag:
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF): the front-passenger front airbag is
able to deployinthe event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up:the
front passenger front airbag is deactivated.
It will then not be deployedinthe event of
an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
catorlampshows the statusofthe front-
passenger front airbag.The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be litcontinu-
ously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bagmusteither be deactivated or enabled;
see the following points. Youmustmake sure
of this both before and during ajourney.
R
Childreninachild restraintsystem:
whetherthe front-passenger front airbag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the
installed child restraint system, and the age
and size of the child.Therefore, be sure to
observe the notes on the "Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS)" (Y page 46)and on
"Childreninthe vehicle" (Y page 53).
There youwillalsofind instructions on rear-
ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems on the front-passenger seat.
R
Allotherpersons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front airbag is
enabled or deactivated (Y page 46). Be
sure to observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (Y page 39) and "air bags"
(Y page 43). There youcan also find infor-
mation on the correct seatposition.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seatbelts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicleoccupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicleroll-
ing over. Thisreducesthe riskofvehicleoccu-
pants coming into contact with parts of the
vehicleinteriororbeing ejectedfrom the vehi-
cle.Furthermore, the seatbelthelps to keep
Occupantsafety
39
Safety
Z
the vehicleoccupant in the best positionin
relation to the airbag.
The seat belt systemcomprises:
R
Seatbelts
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices and seat belt
force limiters
If the seat belt is pulled quicklyorsharplyby
the seat belt guide, the inertia reellocks. The
belt strapcannot be extracted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body.Howeveritdoesnot pull the
vehicleoccupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not
correct an incorrect seat positionorthe rout-
ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered,aseatbeltforce limiter helps
to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on
the vehicleoccupant.
The seat belt force limiters aresynchronized
with the front airbagswhich absorbpartof
the decelerationforce. Thiscan reduce the
force exerted on the vehicleoccupants during
an accident.
!
If the front-passengerseatisnot occupied,
do not engagethe seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passengerseat. Other-
wise,inthe event of an accident the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and the side
impact airbag,inadditiontoothersystems,
maybetriggered and have to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The useofseatbelts and child restraint sys-
tems is required by lawin:
R
all50states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the DistrictofColumbia
R
allCanadianprovinces
Even where thisisnot required by law, allvehi-
cle occupants shouldcorrectlyfastentheir
seat belts beforestartingthe journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can-
not perform its intendedprotective function.
An incorrectly fastened seat belt can also
cause injuries, for example, in the event of
an accident or when braking or changing
directionabruptly. This posesanincreased
riskofinjury or evenfatal injury.
Alwaysensurethatall vehicleoccupants
have their seat belts fastened correctlyand
aresitting properly.
The component parts of the restraint system
work in conjunctionwitheachother. They can
onlydeploytheir protective functionif, at all
times,all vehicleoccupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(Y page 41)
R
have the seat and head restraint adjusted
properly (Y page 85)
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended
level of protection if youhavenot moved the
backrest to an almostverticalposition.
When braking or in the event of an accident,
youcould slideunderneath the seat belt and
sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for exam-
ple. This posesanincreasedriskofinjury or
evenfatal injury.
Adjust the seat properly beforebeginning
your journey.Alwaysensurethatthe back-
restisinanalmostverticalpositionand that
the shouldersectionofyourseatbeltis
routed across the centerofyourshoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons less than5ft(1.50m)tallcannot
wear the seat belt correctlywithoutanaddi-
tional and suitablerestraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
formits intendedprotective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. Thisposes an increasedriskof
injury or evenfatal injury.
For thisreason,alwayssecurepersons
under 5ft(1.50m)tallinsuitableadditional
restraint systems.
40
Occupant safety
Safety
If achild younger than twelve years old and
under 5ft(1.50m)inheight is travelinginthe
vehicle:
R
always securethe child in achild restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz
vehicle. The child restraint system must be
appropriate to the age, weight and size of
the child.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(Y page 53) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation
and operating instructions
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)" (Y page 46)
G
WARNING
Seat belts may not be able to perform their
protective function in the followingsitua-
tions, in particular:
R
The seat belt is damaged, modified,
extremely dirty, bleachedordyed
R
The seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
Modificationshave been performedonthe
Emergency TensioningDevice, belt
anchorage or inertia reel
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
althoughthe damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modifiedordam-
aged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an
accident.ModifiedEmergency Tensioning
Devices could accidentally trigger or not
function as intended.This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modifythe seat belts,Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchoragesorinertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean.Have
the seat belts checked immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop after an acci-
dent.
Only use seat belts that have been approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of theseat belts
Observe the safetynotes on the seat belt
(Y page 40).
Every vehicle occupant must observe the fol-
lowing notes to ensure aproperly worn seat
belt can provide full protection. Also make
sure that all vehicle occupantsare always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
When fasteningthe seat belt, always make
sure that:
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is inserted only
intothe belt buckle belonging to that seat
R
the seat belt is pulled tightacross your body
Avoid wearingbulky clothing,e.g. awinter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted
Only thencan the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shoulder section of the belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder
The shoulder section of the seat belt should
not touchyour neckorberouted under your
arm or behindyour back.
R
the lap belt is taut and passes across your
lap as low down as possible
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdo-
men.This applies particularly to pregnant
women.Ifnecessary, push the lap belt down
to your hip jointand pull it tightusing the
shoulder section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp,
pointed or fragile objects
If you have such itemslocated on or in your
clothing,e.g. pens,keys or eyeglasses,
store these in asuitable place.
R
only one personisusing aseat belt
Infantsand children must never travel sit-
tingonthe lap of avehicle occupant.Inthe
eventofanaccident,theycould be crushed
betweenthe vehicle occupant and seat belt.
R
objectsare never secured with aseat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of
the vehicle's occupants
Also ensure that there are never objects
betweenapersonand the seat, e.g. cush-
ions.
Seat belts are only intended to secureand
restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the
notes in the "Stowage options/compartments"
Occupant safety
41
Safety
Z
section for securing objects, luggage or loads
(Y page 226).
Fastening seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page 41).
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 85).
The seat backrest must be in an almost
upright position.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat belt
guide = and engage belt tongue ; into
belt buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
matically,see "Belt adjustment"
(Y page 42).
X
If necessary, pull up on the shouldersection
of the seat belt to tighten the belt across
your body.
In order to attach the child restraint system
securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the
front-passenger seat is equipped with aspe-
cial seat belt retractor.Further information on
the "Special seat belt retractor"(Ypage 54).
Releasing seat belts
!
Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
will be trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This could damage the door,
the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-
aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their
protective function and must be replaced.
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the
belt back.
Seat belt adjustment
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the seat belt
adjustment function is not available.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE
®
convenience function. This
function adjusts the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt to the upper body of the
vehicle occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and
R
the ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply acertain
retraction force if any slack is detected
between the vehicle occupant and the seat
belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on
and off in the on-board computer
(Y page 180).
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is areminder that all vehicle
occupants must wear their seat belts. It may
light up continuously or flash. In addition,
there may be awarning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt
has alreadybeen fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up for six seconds each
time the engine is started. If the doors are
closed and the driver's or front-passenger seat
belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up againafter the six sec-
onds. As soon as the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are fastened or afront
door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. The warning tone switches off
after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt
is fastened.
42
Occupant safety
Safety
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarn-
ing tone sounds. Awarning tone also sounds
with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or
until the driver or front passenger have fas-
tened their seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt
warning is activated again.
Air bags
Introduction
The installation point of an airbag can be rec-
ognized by the AIRBAG marking.
An airbag complements the correctly fastened
seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt.
When deployed,anairbag can increase the
protection providedfor the respective vehicle
occupant.
Not all airbags are deployed in an accident.
The variousairbags work independently of
each other (Y page 50).
However, no system available today can com-
pletelyeliminate injuries and fatalities.
It is also not possible to rule out arisk of injury
causedbyanairbag due to the high speed at
which the airbag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the front passenger air bag has been acti-
vated, achild on the front passenger seat
may be hit by the front passenger air bag in
the event of an accident. There is arisk of
injury or fatal injury.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
system on aseat protected by an ACTIVE
FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY
to the CHILD can occur.
When installing achild restraint system on the
front passenger seat observe the vehicle-spe-
cific notes (Y page 56). You must observe
the notes on rearward and forward-facing child
restraint systems on the front-passenger seat.
G
WARNING
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot perform its intended pro-
tective function and deployment may even
cause further injuries. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid any risks, each vehicle occupant
must always make sure of the following:
R
Fasten the seat belt correctly. In the case
of pregnant women in particular, make
sure that the lap belt is never routed
across the stomach or abdomen.
R
Adopt the correct seat positionand keep
as far awayaspossible from the air bags.
R
Observe the following notes.
Alwaysmake sure that there are no objects
betweenthe air bag and vehicle occupant.
All vehicle occupants must observe the follow-
ing notes to avoid risks posed by the air bag
when it deploys.
R
Adjust the seats properlybefore beginning
yourjourney. Alwaysmake sure that the
seat is in an almostupright position. The
center of the head restraint must support
the head at abouteye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat
positionmust allow the vehicle to be driven
safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.
R
Alwaysleanagainst the backrest whiledriv-
ing. Do not leanforward or leanagainst the
door or side window.You may otherwise be
in the deployment area of the air bags.
R
Alwayskeep yourfeet in the footwell in
front of the seat. Do not put yourfeet on the
dashboard, for example.Your feet may oth-
erwisebeinthe deployment area of the air
bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5ft(1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint
systems. Up to this height, the seat belt
cannot be worn correctly.
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
If achild is traveling in yourvehicle, also
observe thefollowing notes:
R
Always secure childrenundertwelve years
of age and less than 5ft(1.50m)tallinsuit-
able child restraint systems.
R
Secure achild to the front-passengerseat
onlywhenthe front-passengerfront airbag
is disabled,and thenonlyinarearward-
facing child restraint system. The front-
passengerfront airbag is disabled when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
litcontinuously (Y page 39).
R
Alwaysobserve the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)"(Ypage 46) and on "Children
in the vehicle" (Y page 53)inadditionto
the child restraint systemmanufacturer's
installationand operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may restrict
the air bag fromfunctioningcorrectly. To
avoidrisks resulting fromthe speedofthe air
bagasitdeploys, vehicleoccupants must
ensurethe following points.
Before commencing your journey,ensurethat:
R
there arenopeople, animals or objects
between the vehicleoccupants and an air
bag
R
there arenoobjects between the seat, door
and B-pillar
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attachedtothe vehiclewithinthe deploy-
ment area of an airbag,e.g.todoors or side
windows
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are
in the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in asuitableplace
G
WARNING
If youmodify the coverofanair bagoraffix
objects such as stickerstoit, the airbag
can no longerperform its intendedfunction.
There is an increasedriskofinjury.
Never modify the coverofanair bagoraffix
objects to it.
G
WARNING
Sensors to controlthe airbagsare located
in the doors.Modifications or work not per-
formed correctlytothe doors or door panel-
ing,aswellasdamaged doors,can lead to
the functionofthe sensors being impaired.
The airbagsmight therefore not function
properly anymore. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicleoccupants as
theyare designedtodo. There is an
increasedriskofinjury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.Alwayshaveworkonthe doors or
door paneling carriedout at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Front air bags
!
Do not place heavyobjects on the front-
passengerseat. Thiscould cause the sys-
tem to identify the seat as being occupied.
In the event of an accident, the restraint
systems on the front-passengersidemay be
triggered and have to be replaced.
Driver's airbag : deploysinfront of the
steering wheel. Front-passengerfront air
bag ; deploysinfront of and above the glove
box.
When deployed,the front airbagsoffer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the driver's and front-passenger
seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informsyou aboutthe status of the front-
passengerfront airbag (Y page 39).
The front-passengerfront airbag will only
deploy if:
R
the system, basedonthe OCSweightsen-
sor readings,detects thatthe front-
passengerseatisoccupied (Y page 46).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is not lit(Ypage 46)
R
the restraint systemcontrolunitpredicts a
high accident severity
44
Occupant safety
Safety
Knee bags
Driver'skneebag : deploys under thesteer-
ing column and front-passenger knee bag ;
under theglovebox.The driver's and front-
passenger knee bags are triggered together
withthe frontair bags.
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection.
Sideimpact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat coverscan obstruct or pre-
ventdeployment of theair bags integrated
intothe seats. Consequently, theair bags
cannotprotect vehicleoccupantsasthey
are designed to do. In addition,the opera-
tion of theoccupant classification system
(OCS)could be adversely affected. This
poses an increased riskofinjury or even
fatal injury.
You should only use seat coversthathave
been approvedfor therespective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Sideimpact air bags : deploy next to the
outer bolsterofthe seat backrest.
Whendeployed, theside impact air bag offers
additional thoraxprotection.However, it does
notprotect the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
If therestraintsystem control unitdetects a
side impact,the side impact air bag is
deployed on theside on whichthe impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on thefront passenger
side deploys under thefollowingconditions:
R
theOCS system detects that thefront
passenger seat is occupied or
R
theseat belt buckletongueisengagedin
thebelt buckleofthe frontpassenger seat
If thebelt tongue is engagedinthe belt
buckle, theside impact air bag on thefront
passenger side deploys if an appropriateacci-
dentsituation occurs. In this case, deployment
is independentofwhether thefront passenger
seat is occupied or not.
Headair bags
Headbags : deploy in thearea of theside
windows at thefront.
Whendeployed, thehead bag enhancesthe
level of protection for thehead.However, it
does notprotect the:
R
chest
R
arms
If therestraintsystem control unitdetects a
side impact,the head bag is deployed on the
side on whichthe impact occurs.
If thesystem determinesthattheycan offer
additional protection to that provided by the
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
seat belt, ahead bag may be deployed in other
accident situations (Y page 50).
The head bag on the front-passenger side
deploysunder the following conditions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged in
the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle, the head bag on the front-passenger
side deploysifanappropriate accident situa-
tion occurs. In this case, deployment is inde-
pendent of whether the front-passenger seat is
occupied or not.
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger
seat. Depending on that result, the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger
knee bag are either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the headbag
R
the EmergencyTensioning Devices
Requirements
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
R
with their feet resting on the floor, if possi-
ble
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce afalse classifi-
cation, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on avehicle armrest
R
sits in such away that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If you install achild restraint system on the
front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
correct positioning of the child restraint sys-
tem. Never place objects under or behind the
child restraint system, e.g. acushion. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must lie as flat as
possible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to aload by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform you whether the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once or twice,
or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must
light up simultaneouslyfor approximately six
seconds.
Then the indicator lamps displaythe status of
the front-passenger front air bag:
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for
60 seconds, subsequently both indicator
lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
46
Occupant safety
Safety
OFF): the front-passenger front air bag is
able to deploy in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
It will then not be deployed in the event of
an accident.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger front air bag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
If the status of the front-passenger front air
bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an
air bag displaymessage appears in the instru-
ment cluster (Y page 192). When the front-
passenger seat is occupied, always pay atten-
tion to the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp. Be aware of the status of the front-
passenger front air bag both before and during
the journey.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag
is disabled. It will not be deployed in the
event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function. Aperson in the
front-passenger seat could then, for exam-
ple, come into contact with the vehicle's
interior, especially if the person is sitting too
close to the dashboard. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the
front-passenger seat is correct and the
front-passenger front air bag is enabled or
disabled in accordance with the person in
the front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure achild in arearward-facing
child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-
passenger front air bag can deploy in the
event of an accident. The child could be
struck by the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been deactivated. The PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
NEVER use arearward-facing child restraint
on aseat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT
AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS
INJURY to the child can occur.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install arearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System" (Y page 49).
G
WARNING
If you secure achild in aforward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat
too close to the dashboard, in the event of
an accident, the child could:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back
as possible.Alwaysmake sure that the
shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle belt guide to the shoulderbelt
guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulderbelt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the vehicle belt guide.
Alwaysobserve the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
If OCS determines that:
R
The front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up after the self-test and remains lit.
This indicates that the front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupiedbya
child of up to twelve months old, in astand-
ard child restraint system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after
the self-test and remains lit. This indicates
that the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of atwelve-month-old
child, in astandard child restraint system,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp can go out after the self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is enabled. The resultofthe classification is
dependent on, among other factors, the
child restraint system and the child's stat-
ure. Make sure that the conditions for acor-
rect classification are met. If the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains off, do not install achild restraint
system on the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupiedbya
person of smaller stature (e.g. ateenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp either lights up and remains
lit after the self-test depending on the result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes
out.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, aperson of smaller stature
shouldnot use the front-passenger seat.
R
The front-passenger seat is occupiedbyan
adult or aperson of corresponding stature,
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp goes out after the self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger front air bag
is enabled.
If childrenare traveling in the vehicle,besure
to observe the notes on "Childreninthe vehi-
cle" (Y page 53).
When the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint
system warning lamp on the instrument clus-
ter and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
tor lamp light up simultaneously. The front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated in this
case and does not deploy during an accident.
Have the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a
qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
recommends that you use an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
the seat cushionare damaged, have the nec-
essary repairwork carried out at aqualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Deployment of the driver's air bag does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag
deploys as well.The Occupant Classification
System (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on that
result, the front-passenger front air bag is
either enabled or deactivated.
Self-check of the Occupant Classifica-
tion System (OCS)
G
DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsdo
not both lightupduring the self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at
all in the event of an accident with high
deceleration. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may
not be used.Donot install achild restraint
system on the front-passenger seat. Have
the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
checked and repaired immediately at a
qualifiedspecialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident.
In this case, the front-passenger front air
48
Occupant safety
Safety
bag cannot performits intended protective
function,e.g. when aperson is seated in the
front-passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the
front-passenger seat is correct and the
front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or
deactivated in accordance with the per-
son in the front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with acor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not,the
front-passenger seat must not be used. Do
not install achild restraint system on the
front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) checked and
repaired immediately at aqualified specialist
workshop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS
operation.This could result in the front-
passenger air bag not functioning as inten-
ded during an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the seat cushion of the
front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facingchild restraint system must,
as far as possible, be resting on the back-
rest of the front-passenger seat. Always
comply with the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation instructions.
After the self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF or the PASSENGER AIR BAGONindicator
lamp displays the status of the front-
passenger frontairbag (Y page 46). If the
front-passenger frontairbag is enabled, the
PASSENGER AIR BAGONindicator lamp lights
up for 60 seconds and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGONindicator lamp
is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi-
cator lamp shows the status of the front-
passenger frontairbag. The PASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF indicator lamp may be lit continu-
ously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see
"Problems with the Occupant Classification
System"(Ypage 49).
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 48).
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains
lit, even though the
front-passenger seat is
occupied by an adult or
aperson of astature
correspondingtothat of
an adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditionsfor acorrect classification of the per-
son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 46).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the
front-passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up
and/or does not stay
on.
The front-passenger
seat is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied by the
weight of achild up
to twelve months old
in achild restraint
system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothingbetween the seat cushion and the
child seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests
on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of
the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possi-
ble against the backrest of the front passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the
seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-
passenger seat adjustment.This could result in the seat belt and
the child restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply aload to the
child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint
accordingly.
X
Make sure that no objectsare applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off
and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do
not install achild restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Deployment of Emergency Tension-
ing Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is arisk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployedair bag replaced at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
Adeployedair bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to aqualified spe-
cialist workshop in order to have adeployed
air bag replaced.
For your own safety and that of your front
passenger, it is important that you have
deployedair bags replaced and defective air
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the
air bags continue to perform their protective
50
Occupant safety
Safety
function for the vehicleoccupants in the event
of acrash.
G
WARNING
Emergency Tensioning Devices that have
deployedpyrotechnically are no longer
operational and are unable to perform their
intended protective function. This posesan
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Have pyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at
aqualified specialist workshop.
An electric motor is usedbyPRE-SAFE
®
to
trigger the tightening of the seatbeltinhaz-
ardous situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bagsare deployed, you willhearabang,
and some powder may alsobereleased. The
6 restraint system warning lamplights up.
Only in rare cases willthe bang affect your
hearing. The powder that is releasedgenerally
does not constitute ahealth hazard, but it may
causeshort-term breathing difficulties in peo-
ple with asthma or other respiratory problems.
Provided it is safe to do so, you should leave
the vehicleimmediately or open the window in
order to prevent breathing difficulties.
Air bagsand pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-
ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-
rial,which may require special handling and
regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal.InCal-
ifornia,see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of acollision, the
restraint system control unit evaluates impor-
tant physical data relating to vehicledecelera-
tion or acceleration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data,the
restraint system control unit triggersthe Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices during ahead-on or
rear-end collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational.You can find further information
under "Restraint system warning lamp"
(Y page39)
R
the seatbeltbuckle tongue has engaged in
the beltbuckle of the respective seat
If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint systemare activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Front air bagsaswellasdriver's and front-
passenger knee bags
Depending on the personinthe front-
passenger seat, the front-passenger front air
bag is either enabled or disabled. The front-
passenger front air bag can be deployedinan
accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lampisoff. Observe the information
on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps
(Y page39).
Yourvehiclehas two-stage front air bags.
The activation thresholdofthe Emergency
Tensioning Devices and the air bagsisdeter-
mined by evaluating the rate of vehicledecel-
eration or acceleration which occurs at various
points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tive in nature. Deployment should take place
in good time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicledeceleration or accelera-
tion and the direction of the force are essen-
tially determined by:
R
the distribution of forces during the collision
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehi-
cle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehiclehas collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after acollision has occurred do not playa
decisive role in the deployment of an air bag.
Nor do they provide an indication of air bag
deployment.
The vehiclecan be deformedconsiderably,
without an air bag being deployed. This is the
case if only parts which are relatively easily
deformedare affected and the rate of deceler-
ation is not high.Conversely,air bagsmay be
deployedeven though the vehiclesuffers only
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
minor deformation. This is the case if, for
example, very rigid vehicleparts such as longi-
tudinalbody members are hit, and sufficient
decelerationoccurs as aresult.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
side impact or if the vehiclerolls over, the
applicable components of the restraint system
are deployedindependently of each other
depending on the apparent type of accident.
R
Side impact air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the Emergency Tensioning
Device and the use of the seat belt on the
driver'sseat
The side impact air bag on the front
passenger side deploys under the following
conditions:
-
the OCS system detects that the front
passenger seat is occupied or
-
the seat belt buckle tongue is engagedin
the belt buckle of the front passenger
seat
R
Head bag on the side of impact, independ-
ently of the use of the seat belt and inde-
pendently of whether the front-passenger
seat is occupied
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the sys-
tem determines that deployment can offer
additional protection in this situation
R
Head bags on the driver'sand front-
passenger side in certain situations when
the vehiclerolls over, if the system deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
i
Not all air bags are deployedinanacci-
dent. The various air bags work independ-
ently of each other .
How the air bag works is determined by the
severity of the accident detected, especially
the vehicledecelerationoracceleration and
the apparent type of accident:
R
Head-on collision
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
NECK-PRO head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
R
attach objects such as coat hangers to
the head restraints, for example
R
use head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the
event of an accident. In addition, objects
attached to the head restraints could endan-
ger other vehicleoccupants. There is an
increasedrisk of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head
restraints and do not use head restraint cov-
ers.
Method of operation
NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli-
hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK-
PRO head restraints on the driver'sand front-
passenger seats are moved forwards and
upwards in the event of arear-end collision of
acertain severity. This provides better head
support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been
triggeredinanaccident, you must reset the
NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’sand
front-passenger seat (Y page 53).Other-
wise,the additional protection willnot be
available in the event of another rear-end colli-
sion. You can recognize when NECK-PRO head
restraints have been triggered by the fact that
they have moved forwards and can no longer
be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for
functionality at aqualified specialist workshop
after arear-end collision.
52
Occupant safety
Safety
Resetting triggeredNECK-PRO head
restraints
Do not insert your finger between the uphols-
tery of the headrestraint and the seat. Pay
particularattention whileresetting the NECK-
PROheadrestraints.
X
Tilt the top of the NECK-PROheadrestraint
cushionforwardsinthe direction of
arrow :.
X
Push the NECK-PROheadrestraint cushion
downasfar as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X
Firmly push the NECK-PROheadrestraint
cushionbackinthe direction of arrow =
untilthe cushionengages.
X
Repeatthis procedure for the second NECK-
PROheadrestraint.
i
Resetting the NECK-PROheadrestraints
requires alot of strength. If youhavediffi-
culty resetting the NECK-PROhead
restraints, have this work carriedout at a
qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection system)
PRE-SAFE
®
informs youofcertain critical driv-
ing situations and takespre-emptive measures
to protect the vehicleoccupants.
PRE-SAFE
®
can take the following measures
independentlyofeachother:
R
pre-tensioning the driver'sand front-
passenger seatbelt.
R
closing the sidewindows.
R
vehicles with amemory function: setting a
more favorableseatposition for the front-
passenger seat.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is adan-
ger that the seats and/or objects could be
damaged when PRE-SAFE
®
is activated.
Should an accident not occur, the preventative
measures takenare reversed. Certainsettings
mustbemadeyourself.
X
If the seatbeltpre-tensioning is not
reduced, move the seatbackrest back
slightly.
Seatbeltpre-tensioning is released.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately afteranaccident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
typeand severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are switched on
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicledoors are unlocked
R
the front sidewindowsare lowered
R
vehicles with amemory function: the electri-
cally adjustablesteering wheel is raised
when the driver'sdoorisopened
R
the engine is switched off and the fuelsup-
plyiscut off
R
vehicles with Mercedes me connect: auto-
maticemergency call
Childreninthe vehicle
Important safety notes
If achild younger than twelve years oldand
under 5ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always securethe child in achild restraint
systemsuitablefor Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint systemmustbeappropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child.
R
be sure to observe the instructions and
safety notesinthissectioninadditiontothe
child restraint systemmanufacturer's instal-
lationinstructions.
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS)"(Ypage 46)
Children in the vehicle
53
Safety
Z
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could, in particular:
R
Open doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users
R
Get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
R
Operate vehicleequipment and become
trapped, for example
In addition, children couldset the vehiclein
motion, for example, if they:
R
Release the parking brake.
R
Change the transmission position
R
Start the vehicle
There is arisk of accident and injury.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of chil-
dren.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularlychildren are subjec-
ted to prolonged exposure to extreme heat
or cold, there is arisk of injury,possibly
even fatal.Never leave children unattended
in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularlyonthe metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is arisk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you,alwaysensure that the child restraint
system is not exposedtodirect sunlight.
Protect it with ablanket, for example. If the
child restraint system has been exposedto
direct sunlight, let it cool downbefore secur-
ing the child in it. Never leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicleoccupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly.Particular attention must be paid
to children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(Y page40) and the notes on correct use of
seat belts (Y page41).
Abooster seat may be necessary to achieve
properseat beltpositioning for children over
40 lbs (18 kg) until they reach aheight where
athree-point seat beltcan be properly fas-
tened without abooster seat.
Special seatbelt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat beltisreleased while driving, the
child restraint system willnolonger be
securedproperly.The special seat belt
retractor is disabledand the inertia real
drawsinaportion of the seat belt. The seat
beltcannot be immediatelyrefastened.
There is an increased risk of injury,possibly
even fatal.
Stop the vehicleimmediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reacti-
vate the special seat beltretractor and
secure the child restraint system properly.
The seat beltonthe front-passenger's side is
equipped with aspecial seat beltretractor.
When activated, the special seat beltretractor
ensuresthat the seat beltcannot slacken once
the child seat is secured.
Installing achild restraint system:
X
Make sure you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions.
X
Pullthe seat beltsmoothly out of the belt
loop.
X
Engage seat belttongue in beltbuckle.
Activating the special seat beltretractor:
X
Pullthe seat beltout fullyand let the inertia
reel retract it again.
Whilethe seat beltisretracting, you should
hear aratcheting sound.The special seat
beltretractor is enabled.
X
Push the child restraint system downsothat
the seat beltistight and does not loosen.
54
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Removingthe child restraintsystem and deac-
tivating thespecial seat belt retractor:
X
Makesureyou observethe child restraint
system manufacturer'sinstallation instruc-
tions.
X
Press therelease buttonofthe seat belt
buckle,hold thebelt tongue and guide it
backtowards thebelt loop.
The special seat belt retractorisdeactiva-
ted.
Child restraintsystem
The use of seat beltsand child restraintsys-
tems is requiredbylaw in:
R
all 50 states
R
theU.S.territories
R
theDistrict of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
correctchild restraintsystem from any author-
ized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
G
WARNING
If thechild restraintsystem is installed
incorrectlyonasuitable seat,itcannotpro-
tect as intended. The child cannotthenbe
restrained in theevent of an accident, heavy
braking or suddenchanges of direction.
There is an increased riskofinjury, possibly
evenfatal.
Makesurethatyou observethe child
restraintsystem manufacturer'sinstallation
instructionsand thenotes on use. Please
ensure, that thebase of thechild restraint
system is always resting completely on the
seat cushion.Never placeobjects,e.g.cush-
ions, under or behind thechild restraintsys-
tem. Only use child restraintsystems with
theoriginal cover designed for them. Only
replace damaged coverswithgenuine cov-
ers.
G
WARNING
If thechild restraintsystem is installed
incorrectlyorisnot secured,itcan come
looseinthe event of an accident, heavy
braking or asuddenchangeindirection.The
child restraintsystem could be thrown
about,striking vehicleoccupants. There is
an increased riskofinjury, possiblyeven
fatal.
Always installchild restraintsystems prop-
erly, eveniftheyare notbeingused. Make
surethatyou observethe child restraintsys-
temmanufacturer'sinstallation instructions.
Further information on stowingobjects,lug-
gage and loads securelycan be foundunder
“Stowingoptions/stowage compartments”
(Y page 226).
G
WARNING
Child restraintsystems or their securingsys-
tems whichhavebeen damaged or subjec-
tedtoaload in an accidentcan no longer
protect as intended. The child cannotthen
be restrained in theevent of an accident,
heavybraking or suddenchanges of direc-
tion.There is an increased riskofinjury,
possiblyevenfatal.
Replacechild restraintsystems whichhave
been damaged or subjectedtoaload in an
accidentassoonaspossible. Havethe
securingsystems on thechild restraintsys-
temchecked at aqualified specialist work-
shop, before you installachild restraintsys-
temagain.
The securingsystem of child restraintsystems
is theseat belt system.
i
If you installachild restraintsystem on
thefront passenger seat,besuretoobserve
theinstructionsand safetynotes on the
"Occupant Classification System(OCS)"
(Y page 46). There you will also findinfor-
mation on disablingthe frontpassenger
frontair bag.
All child restraintsystems mustmeetthe fol-
lowingstandards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor VehicleSafetyStandards
213and 225
R
Canadian Motor VehicleSafetyStandards
213and 210.2
Confirmation that thechild restraintsystem
correspondstothe standards can be foundon
an instruction label on thechild restraintsys-
Children in thevehicle
55
Safety
Z
tem. Thisconfirmationcan also be found in
the installationinstructions thatare included
with the child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinte-
riorand on the child restraint system.
Childrestraintsystem on the front-
passengerseat
General notes
If youinstallachild restraint systemonthe
front-passengerseat, always observe the
instructions and safety notesonthe "Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS)"(Ypage 46).
Youcan thusavoid the risks thatcould arise
as aresultof:
R
an incorrectly categorized personinthe
front-passengerseat
R
deactivating the front passengerfront air
bagunintentionally
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g.too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facingchild restraintsystem
If circumstances require youtosecureachild
in arearward-facing child restraint systemon
the front-passengerseat, always make sure
thatthe front passengerfront airbag is deacti-
vated.Onlyifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is litcontinuously (Y page 39),
is the front passengerfront airbag deactiva-
ted.
Alwaysobserve the child restraint system
manufacturer's installationand operating
instructions.
Forward-facingchild restraintsystem
If yousecureachild in aforward-facing child
restraint systemonthe front-passengerseat,
always movethe front-passengerseatasfar
back as possible. The entire base of the child
restraint systemmustalwaysrestonthe seat
cushion of the front-passengerseat. The back-
restofthe child restraint systemmustlie as
flataspossibleagainst the backrest of the
front-passengerseat. The child restraint sys-
tem must not touch the rooforbesubjected
to aloadbythe head restraint. Adjust the
angle of the seat backrest and the head
restraint positionaccordingly.Alwaysmake
sure thatthe shoulderbeltstrapiscorrectly
routed fromthe front-passengerseatbelt
guidetothe shoulderbeltguide on the child
restraint system. Theshoulderbeltstrapmust
be routed forward and down fromthe front-
passengerseatbeltguide.
Alwaysobserve the child restraint system
manufacturer's installationand operating
instructions.
Pets in the vehicle
G
WARNING
If youleave animals unsupervised or unse-
cured in the vehicle, theymay press buttons
or switches,for instance.
In thisway,animals may:
R
activate vehicleequipment and become
trapped,for example
R
switch systems on or off and thereby
endanger otherroadusers
Furthermore, unsecured animals maybe
flung around insidethe vehicleinthe event
of an accident or abrupt steering or braking
maneuver,and therebyinjure vehicleoccu-
pants. There is ariskofaccident and injury.
Never leaveanimals unattended in the vehi-
cle.
Alwayssecureanimals properly when driv-
ing,for instance with asuitablepet carrier.
Driving safety systems
Overviewofdrivingsafety systems
In thissection, youwillfindinformation about
the following drivingsafety systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(Y page 57)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 57)
R
ActiveBrake Assist (Y page 58)
R
Adaptive brake lights (Y page 60)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(Y page 60)
56
Driving safetysystems
Safety
R
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(Y page 63)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 64)
Important safety notes
If youfailtoadapt your drivingstyle or if you
areinattentive, the drivingsafety systemscan
neitherreduce the riskofanaccident nor
override the laws of physics.Driving safety
systemsare merelyaidsdesignedtoassist
driving.
Youare responsiblefor maintaining the dis-
tance to the vehicleinfront, for vehiclespeed,
for braking in good time,and for staying in
lane. Alwaysadapt your drivingstyle to suit
the prevailing roadand weather conditions and
maintain asafedistance fromthe vehiclein
front. Drivecarefully.
The drivingsafety systemsdescribedonly
work as effectivelyaspossiblewhenthere is
adequate contact between the tiresand the
roadsurface. Payparticular attentiontothe
informationregarding tires, recommended
minimumtire treaddepthsetc. in the "Wheels
and tires" section(Ypage 268).
In wintry drivingconditions, always usewinter
tires(M+Stires) and if necessary,snow
chains.Onlyinthisway will the drivingsafety
systemsdescribedinthissectionworkas
effectivelyaspossible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulatesbrake pressure in such away
thatthe wheels do not lock when youbrake.
Thisallowsyou to continue steeringthe vehi-
cle when braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes outwhenthe engine is running.
ABS works fromaspeed of about5mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-
tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even
when youonlybrake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(Ypage 57).
G
WARNING
If ABS is malfunctioning,the wheels could
lock when braking.The steerability and
braking characteristics wouldbeseverely
affected. There is an increased dangerof
skidding and accidents.
Driveoncarefully. HaveABS checked imme-
diately at aqualified specialistworkshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning,othersystems,
including drivingsafety systems, will also
become inoperative.Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 211)and
displaymessageswhich maybeshown in the
instrument cluster (Y page 184).
Brakes
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedalvigorously untilthe braking sit-
uationisover.
X
To make afullbrakeapplication: depress
the brake pedalwithfullforce.
If ABS intervenes when braking,you will feela
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedalcan be an indication
of hazardous roadconditions, and functions as
areminder to take extra carewhile driving.
BAS (BrakeAssistSystem)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If youdepress the brake pedalquickly, BAS
automaticallyboosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(Ypage 57).
Driving safetysystems
57
Safety
Z
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking dis-
tance in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is arisk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedalwith full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedalfirmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes willfunction as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Active Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page57).
Active Brake Assist consists of adistance
warning function with an autonomous braking
function and Adaptive Brake Assist.
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize
the risk of acollision with the vehicleinfront
or reduce the effects of such acollision.
If Active Brake Assist detects that there is a
risk of collision, you willbewarned visually
and acoustically.Ifyou do not react to the vis-
ualcollision warning or the warning tone,
autonomous braking can be initiated in critical
situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a
critical situation, Adaptive Brake Assist of the
Active Brake Assist system supports you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is snow or heavy rain
R
there is interference by other radarsources
R
there are strong radarreflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
anarrow vehicleistraveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
avehicleistraveling in front on adifferent
line
R
you are driving anew vehicleorservicing on
the Active Brake Assist system has just
been carriedout
Observe the important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes" section (Y page117).
Following damage to the front end of the vehi-
cle, have the configuration and operation of
the radarsensor checked at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop. This alsoappliestocollisions
at slow speeds where there is no visible dam-
age to the front of the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is automatically active
after switching on the ignition.
You can activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist using the on-board computer
(Y page176).When deactivated, the distance
warning function and the autonomous braking
function are alsodeactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the assistance graphic dis-
play.
Distance warningfunction
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of afront-end collision with a
vehicleaheadorreduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is arisk of acollision, you
willbewarnedvisuallyand acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (Y page57).
G
WARNING
The distance warning function does not
react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
58
Driving safety systems
Safety
The distance warning function may not give
warnings in all critical situations. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
Always adapt your speed to suit the prevail-
ing road and traffic conditions.
G
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot
alwaysclearly identify objectsand complex
traffic situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give awarning
There is arisk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and do not rely solely on the dis-
tancewarning function.
Function
Starting at aspeed of approximately 4mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front.
An intermittent warning tonewill then sound,
and the · distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display awarn-
ing.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obsta-
cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
Up to aspeed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles, such as
stopped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance
warning signal in acritical situation, Active
Brake Assist can assist with the autonomous
braking function.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously.
Vehicles without Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function
is available in the following speed ranges:
R
4-65mph (7 -105 km/h) for moving
objects
R
4-31mph (7 -50km/h)for stationary
objects
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the autonomous braking function
is available in the following speedranges:
R
4-124 mph (7 -200 km/h)for moving
objects
R
4-31mph (7 -50km/h)for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system,particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may alsocausethe autonomous braking func-
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously(Ypage53).
Adaptive Brake Assist
General information
i
Observethe "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page57).
With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
tance warning signalcan detect obstacles that
are in the path of yourvehiclefor an extended
period of time.
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects arisk of colli-
sion with the vehicleinfront, it calculatesthe
braking force necessary to avoidacollision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully,Adaptive
Brake Assist willautomatically increasethe
braking force to alevelsuitablefor the traffic
conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
tance in hazardoussituations at speeds above
Driving safety systems
59
Safety
Z
4mph (7 km/h).Itusesradarsensor technol-
ogy to assess the traffic situation.
Up to aspeedofapproximately 155 mph
(250 km/h),Adaptive Brake Assist is capable
of reacting to moving objects that have
alreadybeendetected as such at least once
over the period of observation.
Up to aspeedofapproximately 44 mph
(70 km/h),Adaptive Brake Assist reacts to
stationary obstacles.
If Adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger
protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE
®
)are activa-
ted simultaneously(Ypage53).
X
Keep the brake pedal depresseduntil the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakeswillwork normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal
R
there is no longerany dangerofacollision
R
no obstacle is detected in front of yourvehi-
cle
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases,Adaptive Brake Assist can:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is arisk of an accident.
Always pay carefulattention to the traffic
situation and be readytobrake.Terminate
the interventioninanon-critical driving sit-
uation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
whencornering
As aresult, the Adaptive Brake Assist may
not intervene in allcriticalconditions. There
is arisk of an accident.
Always pay carefulattention to the traffic
situation and be readytobrake.
Always adapt yourspeedtosuitthe prevail-
ing road and traffic conditions.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause Adaptive Brake Assist to inter-
vene.
If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to
amalfunction in the radarsensor system, the
brake system remains available with fullbrake
boosting effect and BAS.
Adaptive brake lights
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page57).
If you brake sharply from aspeedofmore than
50 km/h or if braking is assisted by BAS or
Brake Assist with Cross-TrafficAssist, the
brake lamps flash rapidly.Inthis way, traffic
traveling behind you is warned in an even
more noticeable manner.
If you brake sharply from aspeedofmore than
70 km/h to astandstill, the hazard warning
lamps are activated automatically.Ifthe
brakesare appliedagain, the brake lamps light
up continuously.The hazard warning lamps
switch off automatically if you travel faster
than 10 km/h. You can also switch off the
hazard warning lamps using the hazard warn-
ing button (Y page99).
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page57).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction,
i.e. power transmission between the tires and
the road surface.
If ESP
®
detects that the vehicle is deviating
from the direction desired by the driver, one or
more wheels are brakedtostabilize the vehi-
cle. The engine outputisalsomodified to keep
60
Driving safety systems
Safety
the vehicleonthe desired course withinphysi-
cal limits. ESP
®
assists the driver when pulling
away on wetorslipperyroads.ESP
®
can also
stabilize the vehicleduringbraking.
ETS (ElectronicTractionSystem)
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(Ypage 57).
ETS tractioncontrolispartofESP
®
.
ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they
spin. Thisenables youtopullawayand accel-
erate on slippery surfaces,for exampleifthe
roadsurface is slippery on one side.Inaddi-
tion, moredrive torque is transferredtothe
wheelorwheelswithtraction.
ETS remains active when youdeactivate ESP
®
.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning it will not provide
any vehiclestabilization. There is an
increasedriskofskidding or of an accident.
Exercisecautionwhencontinuing to drive.
HaveESP
®
checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
When towing the vehiclewiththe rearaxle
raised,observe the notesonESP
®
(Y page 265).
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously,thenESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp and the å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp arelit continuously,
ESP
®
is not availabledue to amalfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(Y page 212)and displaymessageswhich
maybeshown in the instrument cluster
(Y page 184).
i
Onlyuse wheels with the recommended
tire sizes.OnlythenwillESP
®
functionprop-
erly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp goes out
beforebeginning the journey,ESP
®
is auto-
maticallyactive.
If ESP
®
intervenes,the ÷ ESP
®
warning
lamp flashesinthe instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Onlydepress the accelerator pedalasfar as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing
roadand weather conditions.
ECOstart/stopfunction
The ECO start/stopfunctionswitches the
engine off automaticallywhenthe vehicle
stopsmoving.The enginestarts automatically
when the driver wants to pull away again.
ESP
®
remains in its previously selected status,
e.g.ifESP
®
wasdeactivated beforethe engine
wasautomaticallyswitched off.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
(except
Mercedes-AMG SLC43)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(Ypage 57).
Youcan select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated
R
ESP
®
is deactivated
G
WARNING
If youdeactivate ESP
®
,ESP
®
no longersta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk
of skidding and an accident.
Onlydeactivate ESP
®
in the situations
describedinthe following.
It maybebesttodeactivate ESP
®
in the fol-
lowing situations:
R
when using snowchains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Driving safetysystems
61
Safety
Z
Spinning the wheelsresults in acutting action
which provides bettergrip.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soonasthe situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehiclestarts to skid or awheel starts
to spin.
!
Avoidspinning the driven wheelsfor an
extended periodwithESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damagethe drivetrain.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
X
To deactivate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up.
X
To activate: press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goesout.
Characteristics whenESP
®
is deactiva-
ted
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
starttospin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions,ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If youdeactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improvesdriving stability
R
engine torqueisnolonger limitedand the
drive wheelsare able to spin
R
traction control is stillactivated
R
Active Brake Assist is no longer available;
nor is it activatedifyou brake firmly with
assistance from ESP
®
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available,nor is it
activatedifyou brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes
R
ESP
®
stillprovides support when youbrake
firmly
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
(except
Mercedes-AMG SLC43)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes"sec-
tion (Y page 57).
You can select between the following statesof
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated
R
SPORThandling modeisactivated
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
WhenSPORThandling modeisactivated,
there is agreaterriskofskidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORThandling modeinthe
situations described in the following.
G
WARNING
If youdeactivate ESP
®
,ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations
described in the following.
In the following situations, it may be betterto
activate SPORThandling modeordeactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deepsnow
R
on sand or gravel
R
on speciallydesignatedroads when the
vehicle's ownoversteering and understeer-
ing characteristics are desired
Spinning the wheelsresults in acutting action
which provides bettergrip.
Driving in SPORThandling modeorwithout
ESP
®
requires an extremelyqualified and
experienced driver.
62
Drivingsafety systems
Safety
i
Activate ESP
®
as soonasthe situations
describedabove no longerapply.ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle
if the vehiclestarts to skidorawheel starts
to spin.
!
Avoidspinning the driven wheels for an
extendedperiodwithESP
®
deactivated.You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
X
To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
The M SPORThandling modewarning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The
SPORT Handling Mode
SPORT Handling Mode message appearsin
the multifunctiondisplay.
X
To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
brieflypress button :.
The M SPORThandling modewarning
lamp in the instrument cluster goesout.
X
To deactivate ESP
®
: press button : until
the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
in the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFF
OFF message appearsinthe multi-
functiondisplay.
X
To activate ESP
®
: brieflypress button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goesout.The ÷ ESP
®
ONON message appearsinthe multifunction
display.
CharacteristicsofactivatedSPORT han-
dling mode
If SPORThandling modeisactivated and one
or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.
ESP
®
onlystabilizes the vehicletoalimited
degree.
WhenSPORThandling modeisactivated:
R
ESP
®
onlyimprovesdriving stability to a
limiteddegree
R
tractioncontrolisstill activated
R
engine torque is no longerlimitedand the
drive wheels areabletospin
R
ESP
®
still provides support when youbrake
firmly
CharacteristicswhenESP
®
is deactiva-
ted
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If youdeactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longerimprovesdriving stability
R
engine torque is no longerlimitedand the
drive wheels areabletospin
R
tractioncontrolisstill activated
R
Active Brake Assist is no longeravailable;
nor is it activated if youbrake firmly with
assistance from ESP
®
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longeravailable, nor is it
activated if youbrake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes
R
ESP
®
still provides support when youbrake
firmly
EBD (electronicbrake force distribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rearwheelstoimprove driving stability
whilebraking.
Important safety notes
i
Observethe "Important safety notes"sec-
tionfor driving safety systems(Ypage 57).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning,the rearwheelscan
lock, e.g.under full braking.Thisincreases
the riskofskidding and an accident.
Youshouldtherefore adaptyourdriving
style to the different handling characteris-
Driving safety systems
63
Safety
Z
tics.Havethe brake systemchecked at a
qualified specialistworkshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (Y page 211)aswellasdisplay
messages(Ypage 186).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(Ypage 57).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhancesbraking safety and
offers increasedbraking comfort. In addition
to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also
hasthe HOLD function(Ypage 152) and hill
start assist (Y page 120).
Protectionagainst theft
Immobilizer
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove
the SmartKeyfromthe ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
The immobilizerprevents your vehiclefrom
being started withoutthe correct SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with avalid
SmartKeythatisleftinsidethe vehicle.
i
The immobilizerisalwaysdeactivated
when youstart the engine.
In the event thatthe engine cannot be star-
ted (yet the vehicle'sbattery is charged),
the systemisnot operational.Contact an
authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (inCanada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X
To arm: lock the vehiclewiththe SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO.
Indicatorlamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed afterapproximately15seconds.
X
To switchoff: unlock the vehiclewiththe
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Avisualand audiblealarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and youopen:
R
adoor
R
the vehiclewiththe mechanical key
R
the trunk lid
R
the hood
R
the glove compartment
R
the stowagespace under the armrest
X
To stopthe alarm with the SmartKey:
press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
To stopthe alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outsidedoorhandle. The Smart-
Key must be outsidethe vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board.The SmartKey must be insidethe
vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not stopped, evenifyou close the
open door thattriggered it, for example.
If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds,the Mercedes me connect
emergency callsystem automaticallysends
amessage to the Customer Center.
64
Protectionagainsttheft
Safety
This is done either by text message or data
connection.The emergencycall system
sends the message or data provided that:
R
you have subscribed to Mercedes me
connect
R
the Mercedes me connect service has
been activated properly
R
the necessary mobile phone network is
available
Protection against theft
65
Safety
Z
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also appliesfor the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objectstothe
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This
could cause the engine to be switched off.
There is arisk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objectsto
the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings
before insertingthe SmartKey into the igni-
tion lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strongmag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the
vicinity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. amobile phone
or another SmartKey
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. ametal case
This can affect the functionality of the
SmartKey.
SmartKey functions
:
& Locks the vehicle
;
F Unlocksthe trunk lid
=
% Unlocksthe vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % but-
ton.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
anti-theft protection is reactivated
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
R
the doors
R
the trunk lid
R
the stowage compartmentinthe center con-
sole
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking
and three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (Y page 179).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also
comes on if it is activated in the on-board
computer (Y page 178).
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEY-
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 120).
66
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Locking/unlockingcentrally
You can start,lockorunlock thevehicle using
KEYLESS-GO.Todothis, you onlyneedcarry
theSmartKey with you. You can combine the
functionsofKEYLESS-GO with those of acon-
ventional SmartKey. Unlockthe vehicle by
usingKEYLESS-GO,for instance, and lockit
usingthe & button on theSmartKey.
The driver'sdoor and thedoor at whichthe
handle is used, must bothbeclosed. The
SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.When
lockingorunlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the
distancebetween thekey and thecorrespond-
ing door handle must not be greater than 3ft
(1 m).
Acheck whichperiodicallyestablishesaradio
connectionbetween thevehicle and the
SmartKey determineswhether avalid Smart-
Key is in thevehicle.This occurs, for example:
R
when starting theengine
R
while driving
R
when theexternal door handles are touched
X
To unlock thevehicle: touch theinner sur-
faceofthe door handle.
X
To lock thevehicle: touch sensor sur-
face : or ;.
Makesure that you do not touch theinner
surface of thedoor handle.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessedsensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further informationonthe convenience
closingfeature (Y page 77).
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use aSmartKey for an
extended periodoftime, you can deactivate
theKEYLESS-GO function of thekey. The
SmartKey will then use verylittle power,
therebyconservingbattery power.For thepur-
poses of activation/deactivation,the vehicle
must not be nearby.
X
To deactivate: pressthe & button on
theSmartKey twiceinrapid succession.
The battery check lamp (Y page 69)ofthe
SmartKey flashes twicebriefly and lightsup
once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X
To activate: pressany button on theSmart-
Key.
or
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignitionlock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associatedfea-
tures are available again.
Changing thesettings of thelocking
system
You can change thesettings of thelocking
system. This meansonlythe driver'sdoor,the
lockable stowage compartments in thevehicle
interiorand thefuel filler flap are unlocked
when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if
you frequently travel alone.
X
To change thesetting: pressand hold
down the % and & buttons simultane-
ously for about six secondsuntil thebattery
indicator lamp (Y page 69)flashes twice.
If thesettingofthe lockingsystem is changed
within thesignal range of thevehicle,pressing
the & or % button:
R
locksor
R
unlocksthe vehicle
The SmartKey now functionsasfollows:
X
To unlock: pressthe % button once.
X
To unlock centrally: pressthe % button
twice.
X
To lock centrally: pressthe & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock thedriver's door: touch the
inner surface of thedoor handle on thedriv-
er'sdoor.
X
To unlock centrally: touch theinner sur-
faceofthe driver or front-passenger door
handle.
X
To lock centrally: touch theouter sensor
surface on one of thedoor handles.
SmartKey
67
Opening and closing
Z
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
holddownthe % and & buttons
simultaneouslyfor approximatelysix sec-
ondsuntilthe battery check lamp
(Y page 69)flashestwice.
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehiclecan no longer be locked or
unlockedwiththe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO,use the mechanical key.
If youuse the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
anti-theftalarm system will be triggered.
Switch off the alarm (Y page 64).
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further informationabout:
R
unlocking the driver's door (Y page 73)
R
unlocking the trunk (Y page 74)
R
locking the vehicle(Ypage 73)
Insertingthe mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completelyinto the
SmartKey untilitengages and release
catch : is back in its basicposition.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteriescontain toxicand corrosive sub-
stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can
resultinsevere health problems.There is a
riskoffatalinjury.
Keepbatteries outofthe reach of children.
If abattery is swallowed, seekmedical
attentionimmediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteriescontain pollutants.
It is illegaltodispose of
them with the household
rubbish. Theymustbecol-
lected separatelyand dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tally responsiblerecycling
system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to aqualified spe-
cialist workshop or to acol-
lectionpoint for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material,which mayrequire specialhandling
and regard for the environment. National
guidelinesmustbeobserved during disposal.
In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou have
the batteries replaced at aqualified specialist
workshop.
68
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Checking thebattery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properlyifbattery
check lamp : lightsupbriefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does notlight up briefly.
X
Change thebattery (Y page 69).
If theSmartKey battery is checked within the
signal reception range of thevehicle,pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocksthe vehicle
i
You can get abattery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacingthe battery
You require aCR20253Vcellbattery.
X
Takethe mechanical keyout of theSmart-
Key (Y page 68).
X
Press mechanical key ; intothe SmartKey
opening in thedirection of thearrow until
battery compartmentcover : opens. Do
nothold battery compartmentcover :
closed while doingso.
X
Remove battery compartmentcover :.
X
Repeatedly tap theSmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insertthe newbattery withthe positiveter-
minal facing upwards. Use alint-free cloth
to do so.
X
Makesure that thesurface of thebattery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insertthe fronttabsofbattery compartment
cover : intothe housing and then pressto
close it.
X
Insertmechanical key ; intothe SmartKey
(Y page 68).
X
Checkthe function of all SmartKey buttons
on thevehicle.
SmartKey
69
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 69).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock
or unlock the vehicle
using KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
X
Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 66).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 69).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote
control function:
X
Unlock (Y page 73) or lock (Y page 73) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
70
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
(Y page 260).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 261).
or
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 69).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost aSmart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The side windows can-
not be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 69).
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Doors
71
Opening and closing
Z
Never leave children or animalsunattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the Digital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
!
The side windowswillnot open/close if
the battery is dischargedorifthe side win-
dows have iced up. It willthen not be possi-
ble to close the door. Do not attempt to
force the door closed. You could otherwise
damage the door or the side window.
You can open adoor from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside,opening adoor from the inside
willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch
off the alarm (Y page 64).
X
Pull door handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
up. The door is unlocked and can be
opened.
When adoor is opened, the side window on
that side opens slightly.When the door is
closed, the side window closes again.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle
from the inside. For example,you can unlock
the front-passenger door from the inside or
lock the vehicle before you pullaway.
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
The central locking button does not lock or
unlock the fuel fillerflap or the stowage com-
partment in the center console.
You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from
the inside if the vehicle has been locked with
the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
You can open adoor from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If alocked door is opened from the inside, the
previousunlock status of the vehicle willbe
taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the locking
button for the central locking, or
R
if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle willbefullyunlocked if it had pre-
viouslybeen fullyunlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
72
Doors
Opening and closing
Automaticlocking feature
X
To deactivate: press and hold button : for
about fiveseconds until atonesounds.
X
To activate: press and hold button ; for
about fiveseconds until atonesounds.
If you press oneofthe two buttons and do not
hear atone, therelevantsetting has already
been selected.
The vehicleislockedautomatically when the
ignition is switched on and thewheels are
turning.
You could thereforelockyourself out if:
R
thevehicleisbeingpushed.
R
thevehicleisbeingtowed.
R
thevehicleisonaroller dynamometer.
You can also switch theautomatic locking
function on and off usingthe on-board com-
puter (Y page 179).
Unlocking/lockingthe driver's door
using themechanicalkey
i
If you want to centrally lockthe vehicle
usingthe mechanical key, beginbypressing
thelocking buttonfor theinterior locking
mechanism while thedriver's door is open.
Thenlockthe driver's door usingthe
mechanical key.
X
To unlock: turnthe mechanical keycoun-
ter-clockwise as far as it will go to position
1.
X
To lock: turnthe mechanical keyclockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
If you use themechanical keytounlockand
open thedriver's door,the anti-theftalarm
system will be triggered.Switchoff thealarm
(Y page 64).
Trunk
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects,luggageorloads are notsecured
or notsecured sufficiently, they could slip,
tipoverorbeflungaround and thereby hit
vehicleoccupants. There is ariskofinjury,
particularly in theevent of sudden braking
or asudden changeindirection.
Always store objects so that they cannotbe
flungaround.Secureobjects,luggageor
loads against slippingortippingbefore the
journey.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore,makesurethatthere is
sufficientclearance abovethe trunk lid.
!
Only close thetrunk once theroofislow-
eredcompletely. Otherwise,you could dam-
age theroof.
If you close thetrunk lid before theroofis
lowered completely, theloading aid switch
lights up and awarning tone sounds.
Trunk
73
Opening and closing
Z
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(Y page 305).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk.You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
The trunk lid can be:
R
opened/closed from outside
R
opened automatically from outside
R
locked separately
R
opened with the emergencyrelease button
R
unlocked with the mechanical key
You should preferably place luggage or loads
in the trunk.
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
X
Pull handle :.
X
Lift the trunk lid.
Closing
X
Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
X
Lock the vehicle if necessary with the &
button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-
GO.
It does not lock if aSmartKey with KEYLESS-
GO is detected in the trunk.
Locking the trunk separately
You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains
locked and cannot be opened.
X
Close the trunk lid.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 68).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise from
position 1 to position 2.
X
Remove the mechanical key.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key.
Unlocking the trunk (mechanical
key)
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 64).
74
Trunk
Opening and closing
X
Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-
Key (Y page 68).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key from position 1
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-
tion 2.Simultaneously pull the trunk lid
handle.
The trunk is unlocked.
X
Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-
Key.
Emergency release for the trunk
You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside
with the emergencyrelease button.
X
Press emergencyrelease button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
the trunk lid emergencyrelease when the vehi-
cle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergencyrelease does not
unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-
ted or discharged.
Trunk lid emergencyrelease light:
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side
window and the door frame as the side win-
dow moves. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side
window during the opening procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or pull the switch to close the side
window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is arisk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or
press the switch to open the side window
again.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they
are left unsupervised. There is arisk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The front side windows are equipped with an
automatic reversing feature. If asolid object
blocks or restricts the upward movementof
Side windows
75
Opening and closing
Z
one of the front side windows during the clos-
ing process, the side window opens again
automatically. During the manual closing proc-
ess, the side window only opens again auto-
matically after the corresponding switch is
released. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you
of the responsibility of paying attention when
closing aside window.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
while adjusting
R
when closing the side window again man-
ually immediately after automatic revers-
ing
This means that the reversing feature can-
not prevent someone being trapped in these
situations. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the
switch to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows in the front
The switches for the front side windows are
located on the driver's door. There is also a
switch for the front-passenger side window on
the front-passenger door.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Left
;
Right
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull the corresponding
switch and hold it.
X
To close fully: pull the switch beyond the
pressure point and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press
or pull the corresponding switch again.
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine. This function is
available for up to five minutes or until the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened.
Opening and closingall side win-
dows
Using the switch on the center con-
sole
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
in the closing area could become trapped.
There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
somebody becomes trapped, release the
switch or press the switch down to open the
side window again.
76
Side windows
Opening and closing
You can use the switchonthe center console
to close all side windows simultaneously.
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
The switchfor all side windows is under the
cover.
X
To open all side windows: press button :
to the point of resistance.
X
To open all side windows fully: press
switch : beyond the point of resistance.
X
To close all side windows: pull switch :.
All side windows begin the closingproce-
dure simultaneously. The rear side windows
close afterthe frontside windows.
If, afteropeningthe windows, you close one
side window using the switchinthe door con-
trol panel:
R
the frontside window closesfirstand
R
thenthe corresponding rear side window
closes.
Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO
G
WARNING
When using the convenienceclosingfeature,
partsofthe body could be trapped in the
closingarea when aside window is being
closed. There is arisk of injury.
Observe the complete closingprocedure
when the convenienceclosingfeature is
operating. Make sure that no body partsare
in close proximityduring the closingproce-
dure.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
X
Release the recessed sensor surfaceonthe
door handle.
X
Immediately pull and hold the door handle
and keep the door handle pulled.
The side windows open.
With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-
dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key
must be outsidethe vehicle. All the doors
must be closed.
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i
Make sure you only touchrecessed sensor
surface :.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door
handle.
Resetting theside windows
If aside window can no longerbeclosedfully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all the doors.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
X
Pull the corresponding switchonthe door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed(Ypage 76).
X
Hold the switchfor an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side win-
dow is completely closed(Ypage 76).
X
Hold the switchfor an additional second.
If the respectiveside window remains
closedafterthe button is released, thenit
Side windows
77
Opening and closing
Z
has been set correctly. If this is not the
case, repeat the steps above.
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If you close aside window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window closes
with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body
could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process,
release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Aside window cannot
be closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
Aside window cannot
be closed and you can-
not see the cause.
If aside window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If aside window is obstructed again during closing and reopens
again slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding
switch again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing func-
tion.
The side windows can-
not be opened or closed
using the convenience
opening/closing fea-
ture.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 69) and replace it if neces-
sary (Y page 69).
Roof
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not fully open/close the soft top,
the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a
short time. This causes the soft top to lower
unexpectedly and may cause you or others
to be trapped. There is arisk of injury.
Always open or close the soft top com-
pletely.
G
WARNING
Closing the roof manually is acomplicated
and technically demanding procedure, which
requires alot of strength. You or others can
become trapped. There is arisk of injury.
78
Roof
Opening and closing
Only have the soft top closed manuallyata
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavy
objects there. You will otherwise damage
the roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.
!
Do not forget that the weather can change
abruptly.Make certain that the roof is
closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehi-
cle electronics can be damaged if water
enters the vehicle interior.
!
When opening and closing the roof, make
sure that:
R
there is sufficient clearance, as the roof
swings upwards.
R
there is sufficient clearance behind the
vehicle, as the trunk lid swings backwards
beyond the bumper.
R
the trunk is only loadedtobelow the
trunk partition.
R
the trunk partition is not pushed up by the
load.
R
the trunk partition is closed.
R
the trunk lid is closed.
R
the outside temperature is above 5‡
(Ò15 †).
You could otherwise damage the roof, trunk
and other parts of the vehicle.
The vehicle dimensions for opening/closing
the roof can be found in the "Vehicle data"
section (Y page 305).
Make sure that the roof and rear window are
clean and dry before opening the roof. Other-
wise, water or dirt could enter the vehicle inte-
rior or trunk.
Opening and closing using the roof
switch
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roof, body
parts could be trapped by, for example, the
roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows.
There is arisk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make
sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of
moving components. If someone becomes
trapped, release the button.
For safety reasons, you can only open or close
the roof when the vehicle is stationary.
!
Operating the roof while pulling away:
R
Observe the following traffic carefully.
R
Do not drive faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
R
Avoid abrupt braking and swerving
maneuvers.
Do not operate the roof when cornering,
driving on uneven surfaces or during strong
winds. The vehicle may otherwise be dam-
aged.
i
If the traffic conditions mean that you have
to drive off while opening/closing the roof,
the procedure which was started while sta-
tionary can be continued at speeds of up to
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
Opening and closing
X
Vehicles without semi-automatic trunk
partition: close the trunk partition
(Y page 80).
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 73).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Open the cover in the lower center console.
Roof switch : is located under the cover.
X
To open:pull roof switch : until the entire
roof is stowed awayinthe trunk.
The Vario-Roof in OperationVario-Roof in Operation message
appears in the multifunction display. Once
the opening procedure is complete, the
message disappears and atone sounds.
All of the side windows open.
Roof
79
Opening and closing
Z
If you operate the roof switch and the
Trunk Partition OpenTrunk Partition Open message appears
in the multifunction display, the trunk parti-
tion is not closed correctly.
X
Closethe trunk partition.
X
To close: press and hold soft-top switch :
until the soft top is fullyclosed.
The Vario-Roof in OperationVario-Roof in Operation message
appears in the multifunction display. Once
the opening procedure is complete, the
messagedisappears and atone sounds.
All of the side windowsopen.
X
To close all side windows, pullthe switch
under the cover of the center console
(Y page 76).
Opening/closing using the SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When opening or closing the roof, body
parts could be trapped by, for example,the
roof mechanism, trunk lid or side windows.
There is arisk of injury.
When raising or lowering the roof, make
sure that no body parts are in the vicinity of
moving components. If someone becomes
trapped,release the button.
Openingand closing
This function is only available on vehicleswith
KEYLESS-GO or with roof comfort operation.
X
Closethe trunk lid (Y page 73).
X
Vehicles with comfort operation: point
the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey
must be within 6ft(2m)ofthe vehicle.
X
To open: press and hold the % button on
the SmartKey until the roof is fullyopened.
The roof and the rear side windowsopen.
The front side windowsclose.
X
To interrupt the opening procedure:
release the % button.
X
To open the front side windows: press the
% button on the SmartKey again.
X
To close: press and hold the & button
on the SmartKey until the roof is fully
closed.
The roof and the side windowsclose.
X
To interrupt the closing procedure:
release the & button.
Locking the roof again
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not fullyopen/close the soft top,
the soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a
short time. This causesthe soft top to lower
unexpectedly and may cause you or others
to be trapped.There is arisk of injury.
Alwaysopen or close the soft top com-
pletely.
The roof is not locked if:
R
the K symboland the Vario-Roof inVario-Roof in
OperationOperation messageappear in the multi-
function display
R
the K symboland the Open/CloseOpen/Close
Vario-Roof CompletelyVario-Roof Completely messageappear
in the multifunction display and you hear a
warning tone
R
you hear awarning tone for up to ten sec-
onds when pulling awayorwhiledriving
Locking
You can lock the roof again if it is not locked
fully.
X
Pullover and stop the vehicle safelyassoon
as possible, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Press the roof switch (Y page 79).
Trunk partition
General notes
!
To avoid damaging the roof or luggage
when folding back the roof, you should:
80
Roof
Opening and closing
R
only load the trunk to below the trunk par-
tition
R
not place any objectsonorinfront of the
trunk partition
R
not place any objectsonthe cover behind
the roll bars
R
not allow the cargo to push the trunk par-
tition upwards
The trunk partition can be used to cover lug-
gage and loads in the trunk.
Opening and closing
X
To open: grip the handle of trunk parti-
tion :.
X
Press the release button in the handle of
trunk partition :.
Trunk partition : is unlocked.
X
Pull trunk partition : up out of the eyelets
on the edge of the trunk.
X
Push trunk partition : forwards against the
direction of the arrow by handle.
X
To close: pull back trunk partition : by the
handle in the direction of the arrow and
engage into the eyelets on the edge of the
trunk on both sides.
Wind screen
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use the wind screen in darkness or in
other conditions offering poor visibility, your
view to the rear is further impaired. There is
arisk of an accident.
Only use the wind screen when visibility con-
ditions are good.
G
WARNING
If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it
could detach itself during ajourney and
endanger other road users. There is arisk of
an accident and injury.
Install the wind screen as described.
!
Install or remove the wind screen only
when the roof is open. You could otherwise
damage the wind screen or the vehicle inte-
rior.
The wind screen offers protection from the
wind when driving with the roof down.
The wind screen can be installed or removed
from the driver's side or passenger side.
For operations involving the wind screen,itis
preferable to be positioned on the side of the
vehicle facing away from the traffic,after stop-
ping the vehicle in accordancewith the traffic
conditions.
Installing and removing the wind
screen
Preparing for installation
:
Wind screen
;
Unlocked latch
=
Locked latch
X
The following conditions must be fulfilled for
installation:
Roof
81
Opening and closing
Z
R
unlocking buttons R and L pointinthe
direction of travel.
R
latch ; facing you is unlocked.
R
latch = facing away from you is locked.
X
To unlock thelatch: press unlocking but-
ton R or L on thelockedlatch.
X
To lock thelatch: push theunlocked latch
upward by handuntil it engages.
Installing
X
Takethe wind screenout of thetrunk.
X
Prepare for installing (Y page 81).
X
Holdwind screen : at an angle and slide it
withlockedlatch = in thedirection of
arrow ? intothe bracketofthe opposite
roll bar.
X
Press wind screen : down in thedirection
of arrow A until it engages.
Makesure that studs B and latch ; fit
intothe respectivebrackets.
X
Checkwhether wind screen : is fully inser-
tedintoall four brackets and is sitting
securely.
X
If this is notthe case, remove wind
screen : again and repeat thesteps above.
Removing
X
Press unlocking button L :.Atthe same
time, pull wind screen ; up and tiltit.
X
Pull wind screen ; out of thebracketof
theoppositeroll bar in thedirection of the
arrow.
X
Secure wind screen ; to thetrunk floorby
therubberstrips (Y page 228).
AIRGUIDE
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of thevehicle if you
foldAIRGUIDEin/out while thevehicle is in
motion.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Only fold AIRGUIDEin/out while thevehicle
is stationary.
!
AIRGUIDEcan only be positionedcorrectly
by folding it in or out.AIRGUIDEcannotbe
dismantled. Do nottry to remove AIRGUIDE
from its anchorage. Otherwise, you could
damageAIRGUIDEorthe vehicle.
AIRGUIDEcan be folded out or back in from
thedriver'sside or passenger side.
When operatingAIRGUIDE, preferably stand on
theside of thevehicle away from thetraffic,
after you have stoppedthe vehicle in accord-
ancewithroad and traffic conditions.
82
Roof
Opening and closing
Operating AIRGUIDE
X
To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc : in the
direction of the arrow towards the middle of
the vehicle to the stop.
X
Repeat with disc ;.
X
To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs : and ;
back behind the roll bar to the stop.
Discs : and ; can also be used independ-
ently of each other,e.g. when you are driving
without apassenger.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL
General notes
MAGIC SKY CONTROL is apanorama roof, the
transparencyofwhich can be changed by
applying electrical voltage.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched
between darkened and transparent states.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkensautomatically
after ashort period when you turn the Smart-
Key to position u in the ignition lock or
remove the SmartKey.
Risk of electric shock
G
DANGER
MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high
voltage. If the trim behind the overhead con-
trol panel is damaged or removed, electrical
componentswill be exposed. If you touch
these components, you could get an electric
shock.There is arisk of fatal injury.
R
Never remove the trim behind the over-
head control panel.
R
If the trim is damaged, never touch the
electrical componentsbehind it.
R
Always have work on the MAGIC SKY
CONTROL carried out at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The electrical componentsofMAGIC SKY
CONTROL are protected by apaneling behind
the overhead control panel.
The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is
marked with ayellow warning sticker that
warns you of high voltage. The electric cables
of the high-voltage section are color orange.
Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock.
MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the sta-
tus it was set to before the enginewas
switched off.
X
To change the degree of transparency:
press button :.
At temperatures below freezing, the change is
slower and uneven.The entire process may
take some time.
Roof
83
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the roof
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The roof will not open or
close.
The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged.
X
Close the trunk partition (Y page 80).
The trunk lid is open.
X
Close the trunk lid (Y page 74).
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Leave the engine running.
The roof has been opened and closed several times in arow. The
roof drive has switched off automatically.
You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten
minutes.
X
Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.
X
Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
The automatic roof system is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
84
Roof
Opening and closing
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You couldlose control of your vehicle if you
do thefollowingwhile driving:
R
adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten theseat belt
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting theengine.
X
Observethe safety guidelinesonseat
adjustment(Ypage 85).
X
Makesure that seat = is adjusted properly.
Manual seat adjustment. (Y page 87)
Electrical seat adjustment. (Y page 87)
When adjusting theseat,makesure that:
R
you are as far away from thedriver'sair bag
as possible
R
you are sittinginanormalupright position
R
you can fasten theseat belt properly
R
you have moved thebackresttoanalmost
vertical position
R
you have set theseat cushion angle so that
your thighs are gently supported
R
you can depress thepedals properly
X
Checkwhether thehead restraint is adjus-
tedproperly.
When doingso, makesure that you have
adjusted thehead restraint so that theback
of your head is supported at eye levelbythe
centerofthe head restraint.
X
Observethe safety notesonsteering col-
umn adjustment(Ypage 89).
X
Makesure that steering wheel : is adjus-
tedproperly.
Adjustingthe steering wheel man-
ually(Y page 90)
Adjustingthe steering wheel electrically
(Y page 90)
When adjusting thesteering wheel column,
makesure that:
R
you can hold thesteering wheel withyour
armsslightly bent
R
you can moveyour legs freely
R
you can see all thedisplays in theinstru-
mentclusterclearly
X
Observethe safety guidelinesfor seat belts
(Y page 40).
X
Checkwhether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly(Ypage 42).
The seat belt should:
R
fit snugly across your body
R
be routed across themiddle of your shoul-
der
R
be routed in your pelvic area across thehip
joints
X
Before starting off,adjust therear-view mir-
ror and theexterior mirrors(Ypage 92)in
suchaway that you have agood view of
road and traffic conditions.
X
Vehicles with amemory function: save
theseat,steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings (Y page 95).
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children couldbecome trapped if they
adjust theseats, particularly when unatten-
ded. Thereisariskofinjury.
When leaving thevehicle,always takethe
SmartKey withyou and lockthe vehicle.This
also applies for theDigital Vehicle Key if the
Seats
85
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
Z
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.Never leave children
unsupervised in thevehicle.
The seatscan still be adjusted when there is
no SmartKey in theignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust aseat,you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g.on
theseat guide rail. Thereisariskofinjury.
When adjusting aseat,makesure that no
onehas any body partsinthe sweep of the
seat.
G
WARNING
If thedriver'sseat is notengaged,itcould
moveforwards as far as thenextcatch dur-
ing movement suchasbraking or abrupt
changes of direction.Asaresult, you would
be pushedagainst your seat belt by the
unsecured driver'sseat.
This could causeyou to lose control of the
vehicle.The seat belt cannotprotect as
intended and could result in additional
injury.
Thereisariskofanaccidentand injury.
Before every journey, makesure that the
driver'sseat is fully engaged.
Observethe safety noteson"Air bags"
(Y page 43)and "Children in thevehicle"
(Y page 53).
G
WARNING
If thedriver'sseat is notengaged,itcould
moveunexpectedly while thevehicle is in
motion.This could causeyou to lose control
of thevehicle.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Always makesure that thedriver'sseat is
engaged before starting thevehicle.
G
WARNING
If you adjust theseat height carelessly, you
or other vehicle occupants could be trapped
and thereby injured. Children in particular
could accidentallypress theelectrical seat
adjustmentbuttons and become trapped.
Thereisariskofinjury.
While moving theseats, makesure that your
hands or other body partsdonot get under
theleverassembly of theseat adjustment
system.
G
WARNING
If thehead restraintsare notinstalled or not
adjusted correctly, they cannotprovide pro-
tection as intended. Thereisanincreased
riskofinjury in thehead and neck area, e.g.
in theevent of an accidentorwhen braking.
Always drivewiththe head restraintsinstal-
led. Before driving off,makesure for every
vehicle occupantthatthe centerofthe head
restraint supportsthe back of thehead at
about eye level.
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do thefollowingwhile driving:
R
adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten theseat belt
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Adjustthe driver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting theengine.
!
To preventdamagetothe seatsand the
seat heating,observethe followingnotes:
R
Do notspill liquids onto theseats. Drythe
seatsassoon as possible if liquid does
get spilledonthe seats.
R
If theseat coversare damp or wet,donot
switch on theseat heating.Also, do not
use theseat heating to dry theseats.
R
Clean theseat coversasrecommended;
see the"Interior care" section.
R
Do nottransportheavyloads on the
seats. Do notplacepointedobjectson
theseat cushionssuchasknives,nailsor
tools. Wherepossible, use theseatsonly
for carryingpassengers.
R
When operatingthe seat heating,donot
cover theseatswithinsulating materials,
86
Seats
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
e.g. blankets, coats, bags, protective cov-
ers, child seats or booster seats.
R
When the seat heating is switched on, the
seat surface can be damaged as aresult
of objects being placed on the seats, for
example, seat cushions,child seats and
protective coversnot approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when
movingthe seats back. There is arisk that
the seats and/or the objects could be dam-
aged.
i
The head restraints are equipped with the
NECK-PRO system (Y page 52). For this rea-
son, it is not possible to remove the head
restraints from the seats.
For more information,contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
Adjusting the seats manually
X
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift lever :
and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
X
Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
X
To adjust the backrest angle: relieve the
pressure on the backrest.
X
Pull handle ; and move backrest to the
desired angle.
X
Release handle ; again.
The backrest must audibly engage.
X
To adjust the seat height: pull handle =
upwards or push it down repeatedly until
the seat has reached the desired height.
Adjusting the seats electrically
:
Backrest angle
;
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
=
Seat cushion angle
?
Seat height
i
You can storethe seat settings using the
memory function (Y page 95).
Adjusting the head restraints
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steeringwheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steeringwheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
X
To raise/lower: push the head restraint
upwards or pull it down into the desired
position.
Seats
87
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Adjusting the4-waylumbar support
:
Raises thebackrest contour
;
Softensthe backrest contour
=
Lowers thebackrest contour
?
Hardensthe backrest contour
You can adjust thecontourofthe seat backr-
estsindividually to provideoptimum support
for your back.
Switchingthe seatheating on/off
Switchingon/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on theseat heating
can causethe seat cushion and backrest
pads to become veryhot.The healthofper-
sonswithlimitedtemperature sensitivityor
alimitedabilitytoreacttohigh tempera-
tures may be affectedortheymay evensuf-
fer burn-like injuries. There is ariskofinjury.
Therefore,donot switch theseat heating on
repeatedly.
!
When theseat heating is switched on,the
seat surfacecan be damaged as aresult of
objects beingplaced on theseats, for exam-
ple, seat cushions, child seatsand protec-
tive coversnot approvedbyMercedes-Benz.
Ensurethatthere are no objects on theseat
surfacewhen theseat heating is switched
on.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lampsinthe button
indicatethe heating level you haveselected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutesafter it is set to level 1.
X
Makesurethatthe SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in theignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until thedesired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all theindicator lampsgoout.
88
Seats
Seats,steering wheel and mirrors
Problems with the seat heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prema-
turely or cannot be
switched on. The vehi-
cle's electrical system
voltage is too low
because too many elec-
trical consumers are
switched on.
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch on the seat heating
again.
AIRSCARF
Setting head level heating (AIRSCARF)
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the ventsinthe head
restraints. This could result in burns in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a
risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
The AIRSCARF function warms the head and
neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.
The warm air flows out of the holes in the head
restraints.
The three red indicator lamps in the button
indicate the heating level you have selected.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
To switch on: press button :.
Three red indicator lamps in the button light
up. The blower starts up after apreheating
phase of seven seconds.
X
Press button : repeatedly until the desired
heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
The blower continues running for seven
seconds to cool down the heating elements.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF
may switch off.
Problems with AIRSCARF
AIRSCARF has switched off prematurely or will
not switch on. The vehicle's electrical system
voltage is too low because too many electrical
consumers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do
not need, such as the rear window defroster
or interior lighting.
X
Switch on AIRSCARF again.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Steering wheel
89
Seats, steering wheeland mirrors
Z
Adjust the driver's seat, headrestraint,
steering wheeland mirror and fasten your
seatbeltbefore starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Childrencould injure themselves if they
adjustthe steering wheel. There is ariskof
injury.
Never leavechildren unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Whenleaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. This
also appliesfor the DigitalVehicleKey if the
"Digital VehicleKey"functionisactivated via
Mercedes me connect.
The electrically adjustable steering wheelcan
still be adjusted when thereisnoSmartKeyin
the ignition lock.
Adjustingthe steering wheelman-
ually
G
WARNING
If the steering wheelisunlockedwhile the
vehicleisinmotion, it could change position
unexpectedly.Thiscould cause youtolose
controlofthe vehicle. There is ariskofan
accident.
Before starting off, make sure the steering
wheelislocked.Never unlock the steering
wheelwhile the vehicleisinmotion.
:
Releaselever
;
Adjusts the steering wheelheight
=
Adjusts the steering wheelposition(fore-
and-aftadjustment)
X
Push release lever : down completelyin
the direction of the arrow.
The steering columnisunlocked.
X
Adjust the steering wheeltothe desired
position.
X
Push release lever : up completely.
The steering columnislocked.
X
Check if the steering columnislocked.
Whendoing so, try to push the steering
wheelupordownortry to move it in the
fore-and-aftdirection.
Adjustingthe steering wheelelectri-
cally
:
Adjusts the steering wheelheight
;
Adjusts the steering wheelposition(fore-
and-aftadjustment)
i Further relatedsubjects:
R
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 91)
R
Storing settings (Y page 95)
90
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel andmirrors
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you driveoff while theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments,you could
lose control of thevehicle.Thereisarisk of
an accident.
Always wait until theadjustmentprocessis
completebefore driving off.
G
WARNING
When theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
thesteering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants–particularly children–could
become trapped. Thereisarisk of injury.
While theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments,makesure that no onehas
any body partsinthe sweep of thesteering
wheel.
If somebody becomestrapped:
R
pressone of thememory function posi-
tionbuttons,or
R
movethe switch for steering wheel
adjustmentinthe oppositedirection to
that in whichthe steering wheel is mov-
ing.
The adjustmentprocessisstopped.
G
WARNING
When theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
thesteering wheel and thedriver'sseat,you
and other vehicle occupants–particularly
children–couldbecome trapped. Thereisa
risk of injury.
While theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments,makesure that no onehas
any body partsinthe sweep of theseat and
thesteering wheel.
If somebody becomestrapped:
R
pressone of thememory function posi-
tionbuttons,or
R
pressone of thememory function mem-
ory buttons,or
R
movethe switch for steering wheel
adjustmentinthe oppositedirection to
that in whichthe steering wheel is moving
The adjustmentprocessisstopped.
G
WARNING
If you use openingsinthe bodyworkor
detachable partsassteps, you could:
R
slip and/or fall
R
damagethe vehicle and causeyourself to
fall.
Thereisarisk of injury.
Always use secure climbingaids, e.g.asuit-
able ladder.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting
in and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activateand deactivate theEASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in theon-board computer
(Y page 179).
Position of thesteering wheel when
theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings up when you:
R
remove theSmartKey from theignition lock
R
open thedriver'sdoor with KEYLESS-GO in
position 1
R
open thedriver'sdoor and theSmartKey is
in position u or 1
i
The steering wheel moves upwards only if
it has notalreadyreached theupper steer-
ing limiter.
Position of thesteering wheel for driv-
ing
The steering wheel is moved to thelast selec-
tedposition when:
R
thedriver'sdoor is closed
R
you insert theSmartKey intothe ignition
lock
Steeringwheel
91
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
Z
or
R
you press the Start/Stop button once on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
When you close the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched on, the steering wheel is also
automatically moved to the previously set
position.
The last position of the steering column is
stored when you switch off the ignition or
when you store the setting with the memory
function (Y page 95).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXITfeature is
triggered in an accident,the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-
tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This
makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue
the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXITfeature is only
operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 179).
Mirrors
Inside rearview mirror
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever :
forwards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you
do the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror and fasten your
seat belt before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objectsare actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tancefrom road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is arisk of an
accident.
For this reason, alwaysmake sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Press button : for the left exterior mirror
or button ; for the right exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
92
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
exterior mirror using button = as long as
the indicator lamp is lit.
X
Press button = up, down, to the right or to
the left.
The exterior mirror must be set to aposition
that provides you with agood overview of
traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrorsprovide alarger
field of vision.
The exterior mirrorsare automatically heated
after starting the vehicle if the rear window
defroster is switched on and the outside tem-
perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10
minutes.
i
You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switchingonthe rear window
defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrorsinorout
electrically
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Briefly press button :.
Bothexterior mirrorsfold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrorsare
alwaysfolded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
Folding the exterior mirrorsinorout
automatically
If the "Fold in mirrorswhen locking" function is
activated in the on-board computer
(Y page 180):
R
the exterior mirrorsfold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the out-
side.
R
the exterior mirrorsfold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
i
The exterior mirrorsdonot fold out if they
have been folded in manually.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position,proceed as follows:
X
Vehicles without electrically folding
exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
into the correct position manually.
X
Vehicles with electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding
button until you hear the mirror click into
place (Y page 93).
The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrorsasusual
(Y page 92).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an
automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The elec-
trolyteisharmful and causes irritation. It
must not come into contact with your skin,
eyes, respiratoryorgans or clothing or be
swallowed. There is arisk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electro-
lyte, observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-
ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do
not induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
Mirrors
93
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
R
the ignition is switched on and
R
incident light from headlampsstrikes the
sensor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-
ing is switched on.
Parking positionfor the exteriormir-
ror on the front-passengerside
Setting and storing the parking posi-
tion
Usingthe memory button
You can store the parking positionofthe front-
passenger-side exterior mirror using memory
button M ?.The reverse gear must not be
engaged during the process.
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press button ; for the exterior mirror on
the front-passenger side.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X
Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror
to apositionthat allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking positionisstored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving posi-
tion.
Usingreverse gear
You can adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side to apositionthat allows you to
see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
engage the reverse gear. This setting can be
stored using memory button M ?.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use button = to
adjust the exterior mirror. The rear wheel
and the curb shouldbevisible in the exterior
mirror.
X
Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on button = within three seconds.
The parking positionisstored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
the steps.
94
Mirrors
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
Callingupastored parking position
setting
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock.
X
Select theexterior mirror on thefront-
passenger side usingbutton ;.
X
Engage reversegear.
The exterior mirror on thefront-passenger
side moves to thestoredparking position.
The exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceedaspeedof9mph
(15 km/h)
R
if you pressbutton : for theexterior mirror
on thedriver'sside
Memory function
Storing settings
G
WARNING
If you use thememory function on thedriv-
er'sside while driving,you couldlose con-
trol of thevehicle as aresult of theadjust-
ments beingmade.Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Only use thememory function on thedriv-
er'sside when thevehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When thememory function adjuststhe seat,
you and other vehicle occupants –particu-
larly children–couldbecome trapped. There
is ariskofinjury.
While thememory function is making adjust-
ments,makesure that no onehas any body
partsinthe sweep of theseat.
If someonebecomestrapped, pressamem-
ory positionswitch or seat adjustment
switch immediately.
G
WARNING
Children couldbecome trapped if they acti-
vatethe memory function,particularly when
unattended. Thereisariskofinjury.
Never leave childrenunsupervised in the
vehicle.
When leaving thevehicle,always takethe
SmartKey withyou and lockthe vehicle.This
also applies for theDigital Vehicle Key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
The memory function can be activated at any
time, e.g.evenwhen theSmartKey is notin
theignition lock.
Withthe memory function,you can store up to
three different settings, e.g.for three different
people.
The followingsettings are storedasasingle
memory preset:
R
Positionofthe seat,backrestand head
restraint
R
Driver's side: steering wheel position
R
Driver's side: positionofthe exterior mirrors
on thedriver'sand front-passenger sides
Memory function
95
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
Z
X
Adjust the seatelectrically (Y page 87).
X
On the driver's side,adjustthe steering
wheel(Ypage 90)and the exteriormirrors
(Y page 92).
X
Press memory button M and one of the stor-
agepositionbuttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree
seconds.
The settings arestored in the selectedpre-
set position. Atone sounds when the set-
tingshavebeencompleted.
Calling up astored setting
X
Press and holdthe relevant storageposition
button 1, 2 or 3 untilthe seat, steering
wheeland exteriormirrors areinthe stored
position.
i
The setting procedureisinterruptedas
soonasyou release the storageposition
button.
96
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel andmirrors
Exteriorlighting
General notes
For reasonsofsafety, Mercedes-Benzrecom-
mends that you drivewith thelightsswitched
on even duringthe daytime. In somecoun-
tries, operationofthe headlamps varies due to
legal requirementsand self-imposedobliga-
tions.
Settingthe exteriorlighting
Settingoptions
Exterior lighting can be set using:
R
thelight switch
R
thecombinationswitch (Y page 99)
R
theon-board computer(Ypage 177)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-handstanding lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps,licenseplateand
instrumentclusterlighting
4d
Automatic headlampmode, control-
ledbythe light sensor
5 L
Low-beam/high-beamheadlamps
B R
Rear fog lamp
If youhearawarning tone when youleave the
vehicle, the lights maystill be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
The exteriorlighting (exceptthe parking/
standing lamps)switches off automaticallyif
you:
R
remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door whilethe SmartKeyis
in position u in the ignition lock
Automaticheadlamp mode
G
WARNING
Whenthe light switch is set to Ã,the
low-beamheadlamps maynot be switched
on automaticallyifthereisfog,snow or
othercauses of poor visibility duetothe
weather conditions such as spray.There is a
riskofanaccident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlampfeature is onlyanaid.
The driver is responsiblefor the vehicle's light-
ing at alltimes.
à is the preferred light switch position:
R
The light setting is automaticallyselected
according to the brightness of the ambient
light (exception: poor visibility dueto
weather conditions such as fog,snow or
spray).
R
With the SmartKeyinposition 1 in the igni-
tionlock: the parking lamps areswitched on
or off automaticallydepending on the bright-
ness of the ambient light.
R
With the engine running:ifyou have activa-
ted the daytime running lamps functionvia
the on-board computer, the daytime running
lamps or the parking lamps and the low-
beam headlamps areswitched on or off
automaticallydepending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
X
To switchonautomatic headlamp mode:
turn the light switch to Ã.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibil-
ity of your vehicleduring the day. The daytime
running lamps functionisrequired by lawin
Canada. It cannottherefore be deactivated.
Whenthe engine is running and the vehicleis
stationary: if youshift the automatic transmis-
sion from adriving positiontoposition j the
daytime running lamps or low-beamhead-
lamps go outafter3minutes.
Exterior lighting
97
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn
the light switch to the T position, the day-
time running lamps and parking lamps switch
on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L,the manual settings take prec-
edence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibil-
ity of your vehicle during the day. To do this,
the daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(Y page 177).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L,the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã,the
low-beam headlamps may not be switched
on automatically if there is fog, snow or
other causes of poor visibility due to the
weather conditions such as spray. There is a
risk of an accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it
is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched
on and the light switch is set to the L posi-
tion. This is aparticularly useful function in the
event of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of
thick fog. Please take noteofthe country-spe-
cific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps.
X
To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X
To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
!
If the batterycharge is very low, the park-
ing lamps or standinglamps are automati-
cally switched off to enable the next engine
start.Always park your vehicle safely and in
awell lit area, in accordance with the rele-
vant legal stipulations. Avoid using the T
parking lamps over aperiod of several
hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand
X or left-hand W standinglamps.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standinglamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-
ted.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in
position u in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side
of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of
the vehicle).
98
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
Combination switch
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To indicatebriefly: pressthe combination
switch briefly to thepressure pointinthe
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The correspondingturnsignal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: pressthe combinationswitch
beyondthe pressure pointinthe direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X
To switch on thehigh-beamheadlamps:
turnthe light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press thecombinationswitch beyondthe
pressure pointinthe direction of arrow :.
In the à position, thehigh-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark
and theengineisrunning.
The blue K indicator lamp in theinstru-
mentclusterlightsupwhen thehigh-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switch off thehigh-beamheadlamps:
movethe combinationswitch back to its
normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in theinstru-
mentclustergoes out.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch on thehazardwarning lamps:
pressbutton :.
All turnsignals flash. If you nowswitch on a
turnsignal usingthe combinationswitch,
only theturnsignal lamp on thecorrespond-
ing side of thevehicle will flash.
X
To switch off thehazardwarning lamps:
pressbutton :.
The hazard warning lamps automatically
switch on if:
R
an air bag is deployed or
R
thevehicle deceleratesrapidly from aspeed
of above45mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if thevehicle reaches aspeedofabove
6mph (10 km/h) again after afull brakeappli-
cation.
i
The hazard warning lamps still operate if
theignition is switched off.
Cornering lightfunction
The corneringlight function improvesthe illu-
minationofthe road overawide angle in the
direction you are turning, enablingbettervisi-
bilityintight bends, for example.The corner-
ing light function can only be activated when
thelow-beam headlamps are switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on theturnsignal or
turnthe steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
thesteering wheel
Exterior lighting
99
Lightsand windshield wipers
Z
The cornering lamp may remain lit for ashort
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
The cornering light function is activated on
both sides before entering atraffic circle
through an evaluation of the current GPS posi-
tion of the vehicle. It remains active until after
the vehicle has left the traffic circle. In this
way, pedestrians crossingthe road, for exam-
ple, are illuminated by your vehicle in good
time.
Active light function
The active light function is asystem that
moves the headlamps accordingtothe steer-
ing movements of the front wheels. In this
way, relevant areas remain illuminated while
driving. This allows you to recognize pedes-
trians, cyclists and animals sooner.
Active: when the lights are switched on.
Vehicles with Lane Keeping Assist:the active
light function evaluates the course of the lane
in which you are driving and pre-emptively
controls the active light function.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from
the opposite direction or traveling in front of
your vehicle, and consequently switches the
headlamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
detectsany other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control
panel.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog-
nize road users:
R
who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
R
who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R
whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by abarrier
On very rare occasions,Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognize other road users
that have lights, or may recognize them too
late. In this, or in similar situations, the auto-
matic high-beam headlamps will not be
deactivated or will be activated regardless.
There is arisk of an accident.
Always carefully observe the traffic condi-
tions and switch off the high-beam head-
lamps in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's
lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and
traffic conditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
restricted if there is:
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
R
dirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the
vehicle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other
road users have been detected:
100
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road
users have been detected or the roads are
adequately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster goes out. The _
indicator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X
To switch off: move the combination
switch back to its normal position or move
the light switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display goes out.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Overhead control panel
:
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
;
| Switches the automatic interior light-
ing control on/off
=
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
?
c Switches the interior lighting on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time,
unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient light-
ing are set via the multimedia system
(Y page 178).
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To switch on: set the switch to the center
position.
When the automatic interior lighting control
is switched on, the switch is flush with the
overhead control panel.
X
To switch off: set the switch to the |
position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on
if you:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open adoor
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior lighting is switched on for aset
time when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 178).
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Bulbs, lamps and connectorscan get very
hot when operating. If you change abulb,
you could burn yourself on these compo-
nents. There is arisk of injury.
Allow these components to cool down
before changing abulb.
Vehicles with halogen lamps
Do not use alamp that has been dropped or if
its glass tube has been scratched.
The lamp may explode if:
R
you touch it
R
it is hot
R
you drop it
R
you scratchit
Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps
designed for that purpose. Only install spare
Replacing bulbs
101
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
bulbs of the same type and the specified volt-
age.
Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife
of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with
your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it
off with alint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do not allow bulbs to come intocontact with
liquids.
Only replace the lamps listed (Y page 102).
Have the bulbs that you cannot replace your-
self replaced at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
If you require assistance replacing lamps, con-
sult aqualified specialist workshop.
If the new lamp still does not light up, consult
aqualified specialist workshop.
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times. Have
the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Vehicles with LED headlamps
The frontand rear light clustersofyour vehicle
are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
replace the bulbs yourself. Contact aqualified
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the
work required.
Overview: replacing bulbs/bulb
types
Halogen headlamps
:
Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
;
High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
Replacing the front bulbs
Removing/mounting the cover in the
front wheel housing
X
To remove: switch off the lights.
X
Turn the frontwheels inwards.
X
Slide cover : up and removeit.
X
To install: reinsertcover : and slide it
down until it engages.
Low-beam headlamps(halogen head-
lamps)
X
Remove the cover in the frontwheel hous-
ing (Y page 102).
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X
Push bar ; upwards.
X
Remove connector = with the bulb.
X
Pull the bulb out of connector =.
X
Insertthe new bulb intoconnector = and
place in the bracket of bar ;.
Make sure that the bulb is positioned cor-
rectly.
X
Push bar ; downwards.
102
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Attach housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise untilitengages.
X
Replace the coverinthe front wheelhousing
(Y page 102).
High-beam headlamps (halogenhead-
lamps)/corneringlamps (Bi-Xenon
headlamps)
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Openthe hood.
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X
At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,
disconnect it and pull it outofbulb
holder ;.
X
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ; at
the top, push it down and secureitinplace.
X
Attach housing cover : and turn it clock-
wise untilitengages.
Side markerlamps (halogenhead-
lamps)
Due to theirlocation, have the bulbsinthe
side marker lamp changedataqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Windshieldwipers
Switchingthe windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers
when the windshield is dry,asthiscould
damage the wiperblades. Moreover,dust
thathas collected on the windshield can
scratch the glassifwipingtakesplace when
the windshield is dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washerfluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leavesmearson
the windshield afterthe vehiclehas been
washedinanautomatic car wash, waxor
otherresiduesmay be the reason for this.
Cleanthe windshield using washerfluid
afterwashing the vehicleinanautomatic
car wash.
!
Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to opticalinfluences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers maybeactivated
inadvertently. Thiscould then damage the
windshield wiperbladesorscratch the wind-
shield.
For thisreason, youshouldalwaysswitch
off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Combination switch
1
$ Windshield wiperoff
2
Ä Intermittent wipe,low (rain sensor
set to lowsensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe,high(rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuouswipe, slow
5
¯ Continuouswipe, fast
B
í Single wipe/î Wipesthe wind-
shieldusing washerfluid
If the wiperbladesare worn, the windshield
will no longerbewiped properly.Thiscould
prevent youfrom observing the traffic condi-
tions.
Windshieldwipers
103
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipersbegin to move while
youare changing the wiper blades, you
could be trapped by the wiper arm.There is
ariskofinjury.
Alwaysswitch off the windshield wipersand
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that youtouch only the wiper arm of
the wiper.
!
Neveropenthe hoodifawindshield wiper
arm hasbeenfolded away from the wind-
shield.
Neverfoldawindshield wiper arm withouta
wiper bladebackonto the windshield.
Holdthe windshield wiper arm firmly when
youchange the wiper blade. If yourelease
the windshield wiper arm withoutawiper
bladeand it falls onto the windshield,the
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat youhave
the wiper blades changed at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
!
Alwaysposition the windshield wiper arms
vertically before folding them away from the
windshield.Bydoing so, youwillavoid dam-
agetothe hood.
Replacing the wiper blades
Removingthe wiper blades
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (Y page 118).
X
Set the windshield wiper to position °.
X
Whenthe wiper armsare vertical to the
hood: turn the SmartKey to position u in
the ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
(Y page 118).
X
Foldthe windshield wiper armsawayfrom
the windshield.
X
Press both release clips ;.
X
Foldwiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X
Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Installing the wiper blades
X
Position new wiper blade : with recess B
on lug A.
X
Foldwiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm,untilretaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X
Make sure that wiper blade : is seated
correctly.
X
Foldthe wiper arm back onto the wind-
shield.
104
Windshieldwipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield
wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the
ignition lock.
or
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
The windshield washer
fluid from the spray noz-
zles no longer hits the
center of the wind-
shield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X
Have the spray nozzles adjusted at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Windshield wipers
105
Lights and windshieldwipers
Z
Overview of climatecontrol systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise
fog up.
To preventthe windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when the
engineisrunning. Optimum operation is only
achieved with the side windows and roof
closed.
i
When the weather is warm, ventilate the
vehicle for abrief period. This will speed up
the cooling process and the desired vehicle
interior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i
The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollu-
tantsand odors. Aclogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle inte-
rior. For this reason, you should always
observe the interval for replacing the filter,
which is specified in the Maintenance Book-
let. As it depends on environmental condi-
tions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval
may be shorter than stated in the Mainte-
nanceBooklet.
Air-conditioning system control panel
Canada only
:
Setsthe temperature (Y page 111)
;
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 114)
=
Setsthe air distribution (Y page 112)
?
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 112)
A
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 110)
B
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 114)
C
Setsthe airflow (Y page 112)
D
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 113)
106
Overview of climatecontrol systems
Climatecontrol
USA only
:
Sets the temperature (Y page 111)
;
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 113)
=
Sets the air distribution (Y page 112)
?
Defrosts the windshield(Ypage 112)
A
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 110)
B
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 114)
C
Sets the airflow (Y page 112)
D
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 113)
Notes on using the air-conditioning
system
Air-conditioning system
Below, you can find anumber of notes and
recommendations to help you use the air-con-
ditioning system optimally.
R
Switch on cooling with air dehumidification
using the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in
the ¿ button lights up.
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡(22 †).
R
Recommendation for air distribution in
winter: set the O and ¯ settings.
Recommendation for air distribution in
summer: set the P setting.
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshieldisclear
again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly,e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in atunnel. The windows could other-
wise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-
mate control system only operates at a
reduced capacity. If you require full climate
control capacity, the ECO start/stop function
can be deactivated by pressing the ECO but-
ton (Y page 122).
Overview of climatecontrol systems
107
Climatecontrol
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climatecontrol
Canadaonly
:
Setsthe temperature, left (Y page 111)
;
Defroststhe windshield (Y page 112)
=
Switches theZONE function on/off(Ypage 112)
?
Switches coolingwithair dehumidification on/off(Ypage 110)
Switches theresidual heat on or off (Y page 114)
A
Switches therear window defrosteron/off(Ypage 113)
B
Setsthe temperature, right(Ypage 111)
C
Switches air-recirculation modeon/off(Ypage 114)
D
Setsthe air distribution (Y page 112)
E
Increases theairflow (Y page 112)
F
Reduces theairflow (Y page 112)
G
Activates/deactivatesclimate control (Y page 110)
H
Setsclimate control to automatic (Y page 111)
108
Overview of climatecontrol systems
Climate control
USA only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 111)
;
Defrosts the windshield(Ypage 112)
=
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 113)
?
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 110)
A
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 113)
B
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 111)
C
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 114)
D
Sets the air distribution (Y page 112)
E
Increases the airflow (Y page 112)
F
Reduces the airflow (Y page 112)
G
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 110)
H
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 111)
Optimumuse of dual-zone automatic
climate control
Climate control system
The following contains instructionsand recom-
mendations to enable you to get the most out
of your 3-zoneautomatic climate control.
R
Activate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons or the Á button on the
control panel of the climate control. The
indicator lamps in the à and ¿ but-
tons or the Á button light up.
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡(22 †).
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" func-
tion briefly until the windshieldisclear
again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly,e.g.
if there are unpleasant outside odors or
when in atunnel. The windows could other-
wise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into
the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.
R
Use the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side as well.The indicator
lamp in the á button goes out.
R
Use the residualheat function if you want to
heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual
heat function can only be activated or deac-
tivated with the ignition switched off.
R
Vehicles with COMAND: if you change the
settings of the climate control system, the
climate status displayappears for three sec-
onds at the bottom of the screen in the
COMAND display. You will see the current
settings of the various climate control func-
tions.
Overview of climatecontrol systems
109
Climatecontrol
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off,the cli-
matecontrol system only operatesata
reduced capacity. If you require full climate
control capacity, theECO start/stopfunction
can be deactivatedbypressingthe ECO but-
ton(Ypage 122).
Operating theclimatecontrol sys-
tems
Activating/deactivatingclimatecon-
trol
General notes
When theclimate control is switched off,the
air supply and air circulation are also switched
off.The windows couldfog up. Therefore,
switch off climate control only briefly
i
Activate climate control primarily usingthe
à button(Ypage 111).
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock(Ypage 118).
X
To switch on: turnairflow control C clock-
wise to thedesired position (exceptposition
0)(Ypage 106).
X
To switch off: turnairflow control C coun-
ter-clockwise to position 0 (Y page 106).
3-zone automatic climatecontrol
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tionlock(Ypage 118).
X
To switch on: pressthe à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X
Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out.The previously selectedsettings are
restored.
X
To switch off: pressthe ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Switching cooling with air dehumidi-
fication on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the"Coolingwith air-dehu-
midification"function,the air inside thevehicle
will notbecooled. The air inside thevehicle
will also notbedehumidified. The windows can
fog up morequickly. Therefore, deactivate the
cooling with air-dehumidification function only
briefly.
The "Coolingwith air dehumidification"func-
tionisonlyavailablewhen theengine is run-
ning. The air inside thevehicle is cooled and
dehumidified according to thetemperature
selected.
Condensation may drip from theundersideof
thevehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
normal and notasign that there is amalfunc-
tion.
Activating/deactivating
X
To activate: pressthe ¿ or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á but-
tonlightsup.
X
To deactivate: pressthe ¿ or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á but-
tongoes out.The "Coolingwith air dehumid-
ification" function has adelayed switch-off
feature.
110
Operating theclimate control systems
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The indicator lamp in
the ¿ or Á but-
ton flashes three times
or remains off. The
"Cooling with air dehu-
midification" function
cannot be switched on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a
malfunction.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
Automatic mode is only available with 3-zone
automatic climate control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is
maintained automatically at aconstant level.
The system automatically regulates the tem-
perature of the dispensed air, the airflow and
the air distribution.
The automatic mode functions optimally when
the "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is activated. If necessary, cooling with air
dehumidification can be deactivated.
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-
midification" function, the air inside the vehicle
will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle
will also not be dehumidified.The windows can
fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the
cooling with air-dehumidification function only
briefly.
Automatic control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Set the desired temperature.
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
X
To switch to manualmode: press the
_ button.
or
X
Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
Setting the temperature
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control :
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 106).
Only change the temperature settingin
small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).
i
If you turn control : counter-clockwise to
the lowest temperature setting, air-recircu-
lation mode may activate automatically,
depending on the outside temperature.
3-zone automatic climate control
Differenttemperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To increase or decrease: turn control :
or B clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 108).
Only change the temperature settingin
small increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).
i
If you turn controls : and B counter-
clockwise to the lowest temperature setting,
air-recirculation mode may activate auto-
matically, depending on the outside temper-
ature.
Operating the climate control systems
111
Climatecontrol
Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons.
The correspondingindicator lamp lights up
briefly.
The following air distribution settings can be
selected:
¯
Directsair through the defroster vents
O
Directsair through the footwell air
vents
P
Directsair through the center and side
air vents
i
You can also activate several air distribu-
tion settings simultaneously. To do this,
press multiple air distribution buttons. The
air is then directed through various vents.
3-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
The following air distribution settings can be
selected:
P
Directsair through the center and side
air vents
O
Directsair through the footwell air
vents
S
Directsair through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯
Directsair through the defroster vents
b
Directsthe airflow through the
defroster, center and side air vents
(Canada only)
a
Directsair through the defroster and
footwell vents
_
Directsthe airflow through the
defroster vents, the center and side air
ventsaswell as the footwell air vents
(Canada only)
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
air vents. You can only close the side air
vents, by fully closing the adjuster on the
side air vents(Ypage 115).
Setting the airflow
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control C
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 106).
3-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To increase or reduce: press the K or
I button.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
This function is only available with 3-zone
automatic climate control on vehicles for Can-
ada.
X
To switch on: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up. The temperature settingfor the driver's
side is not adopted for the front-passenger
side.
X
To switch off: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out. The temperature settingfor the driver's
side is adopted for the front-passenger side.
Defrosting the windshield
General notes
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-
shield and the side windows.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
112
Operating the climate control systems
Climatecontrol
Switching the "windshield defrosting"
function on or off
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To switch on: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
X
To switch off: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X
Dual-zone automatic climate control: press
the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in
vehicles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
engine is running.
X
To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X
To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The previously selected settings are
restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
R
maximum cooling
R
maximum airflow
R
air-recirculation mode on
Removing condensation from the
windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the ¿ or Á cooling with air
dehumidification function.
X
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: acti-
vate the à mode button.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate
the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this settinguntil the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Air-conditioning system: press the P or
O button.
X
Dual-zone automatic air conditioning: press
the _ button until the P or O
symbol appears in the display.
i
You should only select this settinguntil the
windshield is clear again.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has ahigh current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as
soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,
the rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-
dow defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Operating the climate control systems
113
Climatecontrol
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The indicator lamp on
the ¤ button
flashes. The rear win-
dow defroster has deac-
tivated prematurely or
cannot be activated.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-
sumers are switched on.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading
lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window
defroster can be activated again.
The roof is open.
X
Close the roof.
When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be activa-
ted again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the
windows can fog up more quickly, in particular
at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
i
Air-recirculation mode is automatically
activated at high levels of pollution (dual-
zone automatic climate control only) or at
high outside temperatures. When air-recir-
culation mode is activated automatically,
the indicator lamp in the g button is not
lit. Outside air is added after about
30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically:
R
after approximately five minutes at out-
side temperatures below approximately
41 ‡(5†)
R
after approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41
(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-
cation" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available on
vehicles for Canada.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
of the engine to continue heating the station-
ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the
engine has been switched off. The heating
time depends on the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u in the igni-
tion lock or remove it (Y page 118).
X
To activate: press the Ì or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á but-
ton lights up.
i
The blower will run at alow speed regard-
less of the airflow setting.
114
Operating the climate control systems
Climatecontrol
i
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will
be activated. The blower runs at medium
speed.
X
To deactivate: press the Ì or Á but-
ton.
The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á but-
ton goes out.
Residualheat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the
air vents. This could resultinburns or frost-
bite in the immediate vicinity of the air
vents. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain asufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary,redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the vents in the head
restraints. This could resultinburns in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a
risk of injury.
Reduce the heater outputbefore it becomes
too hot.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet grilleonthe hood and in
the engine compartment on the front-
passenger side free of blockages, such as
ice, snow or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles
in the vehicle interior.
i
You can move the adjusters for the air
vents verticallyorhorizontally to set the
direction of the airflow.
i
For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Setting the center air vents
X
To open the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : coun-
ter-clockwise.
X
To close the center air vents: turn the
adjuster in one of center air vents : clock-
wise until it engages.
Setting the side air vents
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent
X
To open aside air vent: turn the adjuster
in the side air vent ; to the left.
X
To close aside air vent: turn the adjuster
in the side air vent ; to the right until it
engages.
Setting the air vents
115
Climate control
Z
Setting the blower outputofthe AIR-
SCARF vents
G
WARNING
When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air
can flow from the ventsinthe head
restraints. This could result in burns in the
immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a
risk of injury.
Reduce the heater output before it becomes
too hot.
You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARF
vents : using the AIRSCARF button
(Y page 89).
116
Setting the air vents
Climatecontrol
Notesonbreaking-in anew vehicle
Important safety notes
Thesensorsystemofsomedriving and driving
safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a
certaindistance is being driven after the vehi-
cle hasbeendeliveredorafter repairs. Full
systemeffectiveness is not reacheduntilthe
end of thisteach-inprocedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eralhundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for thisbyapplyinggreaterforce to the
brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
Themoreyou look after the engine when it is
new,the moresatisfied youwillbewithits
performance in the future.
R
Youshouldtherefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles
(1,500 km).
R
Avoidheavy loads, e.g.driving at full throt-
tle,duringthisperiod.
R
Changegearingoodtime, beforethe tach-
ometer needleisÔof the waytothe red
area of the tachometer.
R
Do not manuallyshift to alower gear to
brake the vehicle.
R
Try to avoiddepressing the accelerator
pedalbeyond the point of resistance(kick-
down).
After 1000 miles(1500 km),you can increase
the engine speedgradually and accelerate the
vehicletofullspeed.
Youshouldalsoobserve these notesonbreak-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train
on your vehiclehavebeenreplaced.
Alwaysobserve the maximum permissible
speed.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell mayrestrict
the clearancearound the pedals or block a
depressedpedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and roadsafety of the vehicle. There is
ariskofanaccident.
Stow allobjects securelyinthe vehicleso
thattheydonot getinto the driver's foot-
well.Whenusing floormats or carpets, make
sure thattheyare properlysecured so that
theydonot slip or obstruct the pedals.Do
not place several floormats or carpets on
top of one another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitablefootwear can hindercorrect
usageofthe pedals,e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is ariskofanaccident.
Wear suitablefootwear to ensurecorrect
usageofthe pedals.
G
WARNING
If youswitch off the ignition whiledriving,
safety-relevant functions areonlyavailable
with limitations,ornot at all. This could
affect, for example, the powersteering and
the brake boosting effect. Youwillrequire
considerablymoreeffort to steer and brake.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Do not switch off the ignition whiledriving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake hasnot been fully
releasedwhendriving, the parking brake
can:
R
overheat and cause afire
R
lose its hold function.
There is ariskoffireand an accident.
Releasethe parking brake fullybeforedriv-
ing off.
!
Do not warm up the engine whilestation-
ary. Pull away immediately. Avoidhigh
engine speeds and full throttle untilthe
engine hasreachedits operating tempera-
ture.
Driving
117
Driving andparking
Z
In vehicleswith automatic transmission,
engage positions Pand Ronly when the
vehicle is stationary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheelswhen pulling awayonslippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
Key positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey
for the vehicle.The ignition is not switched
on. The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
aSmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO start function and adetachable Start/Stop
button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into
the ignition lock, the system needs approx-
imatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can
then use the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times
in successioncorresponds to the different key
positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depressthe brake pedaland press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
Acheck which periodicallyestablishes aradio
connection betweenthe vehicle and the
SmartKey determines whether avalidSmart-
Key is in the vehicle.This occurs, for example,
when starting the engine.
To start the vehicle withoutactively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in
the ignition lock.
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 66).
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. amobilephone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal
foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. ametal case.
This can impair the functionality of the KEY-
LESS-GO key.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
R
you willnot be abletoswitch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you willnot be abletostart the engine with
the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
The engine can be switched off whilethe vehi-
cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for three seconds. This
function operates independently of the ECO
start/stop automatic engine switch-off func-
tion.
118
Driving
Driving and parking
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
:
Start/Stopbutton
;
Ignition lock
As soonasthe ignition is switched on,all the
indicator lamps in theinstrumentclusterlight
up. Further information on situationswherean
indicator lamp either fails to go out after start-
ing theengineorlights up while driving
(Y page 211).
If Start/Stopbutton : has notyet been
pressed, this correspondstothe keybeing
removedfromthe ignition.
X
To switch on thepower supply: press
Start/Stopbutton : once.
The power supplyisswitched on.You can
nowactivatethe windshield wipers, for
example.
The power supplyisswitched off again if:
R
thedriver'sdoor is opened and
R
you press Start/Stopbutton : twice
when in this position
X
To switch on theignition: press Start/
Stop button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stopbutton : once
when in this position,the ignition is
switched off again.
Removing theStart/Stop button
You can remove theStart/Stopbuttonfrom
theignition lockand start thevehicleasnor-
mal usingthe SmartKey.
X
Remove Start/Stopbutton : from ignition
lock ;.
You do nothave to remove theStart/Stopbut-
tonfromthe ignition lockwhen you leavethe
vehicle. You should, however,always takethe
SmartKey withyou when leaving thevehicle.
As longasthe SmartKey is in thevehicle:
R
thevehiclecan be started usingthe Start/
Stop button
R
theelectrically powered equipmentcan be
operated
Startingthe engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are leftunsupervised in thevehi-
cle,theycould:
R
operate thevehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set thevehiclein
motion if, for example,they:
R
release theparking brake
R
shiftthe automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start theengine
Thereisariskofanaccidentand injury.
Never leavechildren or animals unattended
in thevehicle.
When leaving thevehicle, always takethe
SmartKey withyou and lockthe vehicle. This
also appliesfor theDigitalVehicleKey if the
"Digital VehicleKey" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gasessuchascarbon monoxide.
Inhalingthese exhaust gasesishazardous to
healthand can result in poisoning.Thereisa
riskoffatal injury. Therefore, never leavethe
enginerunninganenclosed spacewithout
adequateventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introducedthrough
environmental influence or by animals can
Driving
119
Driving and parking
Z
igniteifincontactwith the exhaustsystem
or partsofthe enginethat heat up. There is
arisk of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the enginecompartmentorinthe exhaust
system.
Duringacold start, the engineruns at higher
speeds to enable the catalytic converter to
reach its operating temperature. The sound of
the enginemay change duringthis time.
Automatic transmission
X
Depress the brakepedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shiftthe transmission to position j.
Transmission position display j is shown
in the multifunction display.
i
You can startthe engineintransmission
position j and i.
Starting procedurewith theSmartKey
To startthe engineusing the SmartKey instead
of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out
of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3
(Y page 118) in the ignition lock and release
it as soon as the engineisrunning.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start theengine
The Start/Stop button can be used to startthe
vehicle manually without inserting the Smart-
Key intothe ignition lock.The Start/Stop but-
ton must be inserted in the ignition lock and
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This
mode for startingthe engineoperates inde-
pendently of the ECO start/stopautomatic
enginestartfunction.
X
Depress the brakepedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(Y page 118).
The enginestarts.
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the enginespeed is above the idling speed
and you engagetransmission position 7
or C,the vehicle could pull away sud-
denly. There is arisk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position 7
or C,always firmly depressthe brake
pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.
!
Change gear in good timeand avoid spin-
ningthe wheels. You could otherwise dam-
age the vehicle.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle lockscentrally onceyou have
pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors fromthe insideatany
time.
You can also deactivatethe automatic locking
feature (Y page 179).
It is only possible to shift the transmission
fromposition j to the desired position if you
depressthe brakepedal. Only thenisthe shift
lock released.
i
Upshifts takeplace at higher engine
speeds after acold start. This helps the cat-
alytic converter to reach its operating tem-
perature more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake(Ypage 136).
Hill start assist
Hill startassist helps you when pulling away
forward or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It
holds the vehicle for ashorttimeafter you
have removed your foot fromthe brakepedal.
This gives you enoughtimetomove your foot
fromthe brakepedal to the accelerator pedal
and to depressitbeforethe vehicle beginsto
roll.
120
Driving
Driving and parking
G
WARNING
After ashort time, hillstart assist willnolon-
ger brake yourvehicleand it couldroll away.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move yourfoot from the
brake pedaltothe accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehiclewhen it is held by hillstart
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling awayonalevelroad or on a
downhill gradient
R
the transmission is in position i
R
the electric parking brake is applied
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
ECOstart/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicleisstop-
ped under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the
driverwants to pullawayagain. The ECO
start/stop function thereby helpsyou to
reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of
yourvehicle.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically
and you exit the vehicle, the engine is
restarted automatically.The vehiclemay
beginmoving. There is arisk of accident and
injury.
If you wishtoexit the vehicle, alwaysturn
off the ignitionand secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
General notes
:
ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated
whenever you switch on the engine using the
SmartKey or the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automati-
callybythe ECO start/stop function, the è
ECO symbol is showninthe multifunction dis-
play.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicleisbraked to astandstillwith the
transmission in h or i,the ECO start/stop
function switches off the engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
R
the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green
R
the outside temperature is withinthe range
that is suitable for the system
R
the engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture
R
the set temperature for the vehicleinterior
has been reached
R
the battery is sufficiently charged
R
the system detects that the windshieldis
not fogged up when the air-conditioning sys-
tem is switched on
R
the hood is closed
R
the driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat beltisfastened
All of the vehicle's systems remainactive
when the engine is stoppedautomatically.
Automatic engine switch-off can take place a
maximumoffour times in arow (initial stop,
then three subsequent stops).
The HOLD function can be activated if the
engine has been switched off automatically.It
is then not necessary to continue applying the
brakes during the automatic stop phase. When
you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine
Driving
121
Driving and parking
Z
starts automatically and the braking effect of
the HOLD function is deactivated.
Automatic enginestart
The engine starts automatically if:
R
you switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button
R
you release the brake pedal in transmission
position h or i and the HOLD function is
not active
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you engage reverse gear k
R
you move the transmission out of position
j
R
you switch to drive program S+
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
R
the vehicle starts to roll
R
the brake system requires this
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
R
the system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the battery's condition of charge is too low
Shifting the transmission to position j does
not start the engine.
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manuallyoras
the result of amalfunction. The engine will
then not be switched off automaticallywhen
the vehicle stops.
122
Driving
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The engine does not
start.
The HOLD function or Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
X
Deactivatethe HOLD function (Y page 152) or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 150).
X
Try to start the engine again.
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is amalfunction in the engine electronics.
R
There is amalfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X
Turn the SmartKey back to position u in the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrumentcluster go out.
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 119). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attemptstostart the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 261).
If the engine does not start despite attemptstojump-start it:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to athermal load that was too high.
X
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X
Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not run-
ning smoothly and is
misfiring.
There is amalfunction in the engine electronics or in amechanical
componentofthe engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-
verter and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at aqualified specialist
workshop.
Driving
123
Driving and parking
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The coolant tempera-
ture display shows a
value above 248
(120 †). The coolant
warning lamp may also
be on and awarning
tone may sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is
no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 243). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct,the engine radiator fan may be faulty.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suf-
ficiently.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the near-
est qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Notes on towing vehicles
The vehicle is not suitable for attaching tow
bar systems, such as those used for flat tow-
ing or dinghy towing.
Attaching or using tow bar systems may result
in damage to the vehicle.
When towing avehicle with tow bar systems,
safe driving characteristics cannot be guaran-
teed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehi-
cle.
The vehicle/vehicle combination may swerve.
Observe the permissible towing methods
(Y page 265) and the notes on towing with
both axles on the ground (Y page 265).
DYNAMIC SELECTbutton
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character-
istics will change:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension or the adaptive adjustable
damping only on vehicles with AMG RIDE
CONTROL sports suspension
R
the sound of the exhaust system (vehicles
with sports exhaust system)
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop func-
tion
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C
is activated. For further information about
startingthe engine, see (Y page 119).
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display.After ashort period of
time, the display goes out and the symbol
for the selected drive program appears.
In addition, the current drive program set-
tings are displayed briefly in the multimedia
system display.
i
In afew countries, the ECO start/stop
function is deactivated at the factory due to
the available fuel grade. In this case, the
ECO start/stop function is not available in
any drive program, regardless of the display
in the multimedia system display.
In city traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
124
DYNAMIC SELECT button
Driving and parking
Availabledrive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
S Sport Sportydriving characteris-
tics
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving
characteristics
I Individual Individual settings
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional informationfor driveprograms
(Y page 128).
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If theenginespeedisabovethe idlingspeed
and you engage transmission position 7
or C,the vehicle could pull away sud-
denly. Thereisariskofanaccident.
When engagingtransmission position 7
or C,always firmly depress thebrake
pedal and do notsimultaneouslyaccelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away. Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Afterswitching off theengine, always switch
to parking position P.Preventthe parked
vehicle from rolling away by applyingthe
parking brake.
Selector lever
Overview of transmission positions
!
If theenginespeedistoo high or thevehi-
cle is in motion,donot shiftthe automatic
transmission directly from h to k,from
k to h or directly to j.
Do notopen thedriver'sdoor while thevehi-
cle is in motion.Atlow speeds in transmis-
sion position h or k,otherwise park posi-
tion j is engaged automatically.
The transmission could be damaged.
j
Park position
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The selector leveralways returnstoits original
position. The currenttransmission position j,
k, i or h is shown in thetransmission
positiondisplay in themultifunction display.
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
All vehicles (exceptfor Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43)
:
Transmissionposition
;
Gear
=
Drive program
The currenttransmission positionand drive
program appear in themultifunction display.
Automatic transmission
125
Driving and parking
Z
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43
:
Transmission position
;
Drive program
The current transmission position and drive
programappear in the multifunction display.
Engaging park position P
X
When the vehicleisstationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Press button :.
Engaging park position Pautomati-
cally
Park position j is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the Smart-
Key or using the Start/Stop button and
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door
R
you open the driver's door when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving at avery low
speedand the transmission is in position h
or k
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position j if the HOLD function or Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Observe
the information on the HOLD function
(Y page152) and on Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page148).
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only move the automatic transmission to
k when the vehicleisstationary.
X
Depress the brake and keep it pressed.
X
Push the selector lever forwards past the
first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gearisengaged. Further infor-
mation on the ECO start/stop function
(Y page121).
Shiftingtoneutral N
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children couldset the vehiclein
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Never leave children or animals unattended
in the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
alsoappliesfor the DigitalVehicleKey if the
"Digital VehicleKey" function is activated via
Mercedesmeconnect.
X
When the vehicleisstationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Push the selector lever forwards or back to
the first point of resistance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position k or h,the automatic trans-
mission shifts to i automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passengerdoor or
remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the
automatic transmission shifts to j automati-
cally.
126
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driv-
er's or front-passengerdoor, the automatic
transmission shifts to j automatically.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remaininneutral i,e.g. when having the
vehiclecleaned in an automatic car washwith
atowing system:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignitionlock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignitionon.
X
Depress the brake pedaland keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignitionand leave the Smart-
Key in the ignitionlock.
Engagingdrive position D
X
When the vehicleisstationary, depress the
brake pedal.
X
Push the selector leverback past the first
point of resistance.
Transmissionpositions
B
Park position
This prevents the vehiclefrom roll-
ing awaywhen stopped.
Only shift the transmission into
position B (Y page125) when
the vehicleisstationary. The park-
ing lock should not be used as a
brake when parking. Always apply
the electronic parking brake in addi-
tion to the parking lock in order to
secure the vehicle.
If the SmartKey is removed from the
ignitionlock, the transmission is
locked.
The automatic transmission shifts
to B automatically:
R
when the SmartKey is removed
from the ignitionlock
R
when the engine is switched off
with the transmission in position
C or 7 and one of the
doors is opened
In the event of amalfunction of the
vehicle's electronics, the transmis-
sion may lock in position B.
Have the vehicleelectronics
checked immediatelyataqualified
specialist workshop.
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into
position C when the vehicleis
stationary.
Automatic transmission
127
Driving and parking
Z
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to
A whiledriving.The automatic
transmission could otherwisebe
damaged.
No poweristransmitted fromthe
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brake pedalwillallow
youtomovethe vehiclefreely, e.g.
to push it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position A if
the vehicleisindangerofskidding,
e.g.onicy roads.
!
Coasting in neutral i may
cause damage to the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission
changesgearautomatically. All
forward gearsare available.
Driving tips
Changinggear
The automatic transmission shifts throughthe
individual gearsautomaticallywhenitisin
transmission position h.Thisautomatic gear
shifting behaviorisdeterminedby:
R
the selecteddrive program
R
the positionofthe accelerator pedal
R
the roadspeed
Accelerator pedalposition
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle:early upshifts
R
morethrottle:lateupshifts
Kickdown
Use kickdownfor maximum acceleration.
X
Depressthe accelerator pedalbeyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to alower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Easeoff the accelerator pedalonce the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Drive programs
Drive program C(Comfort)
In city trafficand stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
Driveprogram C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicledelivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away moregently in
forward and reversegears,unless the accel-
erator pedalisdepressedfully.
R
the vehiclehas improved driving stability,
for exampleonslipperyroadsurfaces.
R
optimalfuelconsumption resulting fromthe
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicleisdriven in the lowengine speed
range and the wheels arelesslikelytospin.
R
thesuspension exhibits comfortabledamp-
ing settings (adaptive damping system only
in vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL sports
suspension).
R
the steering exhibits comfortablesteering
characteristics.
Drive program S(Sport)
Driveprogram S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicleexhibits sporty driving character-
istics.
R
the vehiclepulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possiblybeing higher
as aresultofthe later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
128
Automatictransmission
Driving andparking
R
the suspensionexhibits firmdamping set-
tings(vehicleswithadaptive damping sys-
tem or AMG sports suspension).
R
the steering exhibits sporty steering charac-
teristics.
Drive program S+ (Sport Plus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by the fol-
lowing:
R
the vehicleexhibits particularly sporty driv-
ing characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away in first gear.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possiblybeing higher
as aresultofthe later automatic transmis-
sion shift points.
R
the suspensionexhibits particularly firm
damping settings(vehicleswithadaptive
damping systemorAMG sports suspen-
sion).
R
the steering exhibits sporty steering charac-
teristics.
R
the ECO start/stopfunctionisnot available.
Drive program I(Individual)
In drive program I the following propertiesof
the drive programcan be selected:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the suspension(vehicleswithadaptive
damping systemorAMG sports suspension)
R
the steering
R
the availability of the ECO start/stopfunc-
tion
Informationabout configuringdrive program I
with the multimedia systemcan be found in
the DigitalOperator'sManual.
Drive program E(Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicleexhibits particularly economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away moregently in
forward and reversegears,unlessthe accel-
erator pedalisdepressedfully.
R
the vehiclehas improved drivingstability,
for exampleonslipperyroadsurfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe
automatic transmission shiftingupsooner.
Thevehicleisdriven in the lowengine speed
range and the wheels arelesslikelytospin.
R
the suspensionexhibits comfortabledamp-
ing settings(vehicleswithadaptive damping
systemorAMG sports suspension).
R
duringdeceleration, the engine is discon-
nectedfromthe drive train. Thevehicleuses
kinetic energy and consumes less fuel
(coasting mode).
R
the steering exhibits comfortablesteering
characteristics.
Manual gearshifting
General notes
Youcan change gear yourself using the steer-
ing wheelpaddleshifters. Thetransmission
must be in position h to do this.
Depending on which steering wheelpaddle
shifter is pulled,the automatic transmission
immediatelyshifts into the next gear down or
up,ifpermitted.
To usemanualshifting, youhavetwo options:
R
temporary setting
R
permanent setting
If youactivate manualgearshifting, the multi-
functiondisplay will showthe current gear
insteadoftransmission position h.
If manualgearshiftingisdeactivated,the gears
will be selected automatically.
Temporary setting
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Pull steering wheelpaddleshifter : or ;.
Automatictransmission
129
Driving andparking
Z
The temporary setting is active for acertain
amount of time. Under certain conditions, the
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in
the case of lateral acceleration,during overrun
mode or when driving on steep terrain.
X
To deactivate: pull steeringwheel paddle
shifter ; and hold it in place.
or
X
Use the lever to switch the transmission
position.
or
X
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
the drive program.
Permanent setting
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to h.
X
Press button :.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
Shifting gears
All vehicles (except for Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43)
X
To shift up: pull steeringwheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
If the maximum engine speed in the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you con-
tinue to accelerate, the automatic transmis-
sion automatically shifts up in order to pre-
vent engine damage.
X
To shift down: pull steeringwheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shiftingoccurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
engine speed when shiftingdown, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shiftingdown.
Mercedes-AMG SLC 43
!
If manual gearshifting is permanently acti-
vated, the automatic transmission does not
shift up automatically even when the engine
limiting speed for the current gear is
reached. When the engine limiting speed is
reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent
the engine from overrevving. Always make
sure that the engine speed does not reach
the red area of the tachometer. There is oth-
erwise arisk of engine damage.
X
To shift up: pull steeringwheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
X
To shift down: pull steeringwheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
130
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine were to exceed the maximum
engine speed when shifting down, the auto-
matic transmission protects against engine
damage by not shifting down.
Shift recommendation
Allvehicles(except for Mercedes-AMG
SLC43)
The gearshift recommendations assist youin
adopting an economical driving style.The rec-
ommendedgearisshown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommendedgear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunctiondisplay of the instru-
ment cluster.
Mercedes-AMG SLC43
The gearshift recommendations assist youin
adopting an economical driving style.The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommendedgear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown
in the multifunctiondisplay of the instru-
ment cluster.
Kickdown
X
For maximumacceleration, depress the
accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure
point.
The automatic transmission shifts to alower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
During kickdown, youcannotshift gears using
the steering wheelpaddleshifters.
If youapply full throttle,the automatic trans-
mission shifts up to the next gearwhenthe
maximumengine speed is reached. Thispre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Automatictransmission
131
Driving andparking
Z
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at aqualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no
longer changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is only partly possible to engage the gears, or the transmission is
in position i.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position h or k.
X
Have the transmission checked at aqualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and
explosion by improper handling of fuel.
You must avoid fire, open flames, smoking
and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition
before refueling and, if present, switch off
the auxiliary heating.
G
WARNING
Fuels are toxic and harmful to health. There
is arisk of injury.
You must avoid fuels coming into contact
with skin, eyes and clothes or being swal-
lowed.
Do not inhale the fuel vapors. Keep children
away from fuels.
Keep doors and windows closed during the
refueling process.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following points:
R
Immediately rinse the fuel off your skin
with soap and water.
R
If you get fuel into your eyes, immediately
rinse your eyes throughly with clean
water. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
R
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic charging can lead to the crea-
tion of sparks and ignite fuel vapor. There is
arisk of fire and explosion.
Touch the metallic body of the vehicle
before you open the fuel filler cap or handle
the pump nozzle. Any possible electrostatic
charge present will in this way be depleted.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could build up again.
132
Refueling
Driving and parking
Do not getinto the vehicleagain duringthe
refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic
charge could buildupagain.
!
Do not usedieseltorefuelvehicles with a
gasoline engine.Donot switch on the igni-
tionifyou accidentallyrefuelwiththe wrong
fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel
system.Even small amounts of the wrong
fuel could resultindamagetothe fuel sys-
tem and the engine.Notify aqualified spe-
cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drainedcompletely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take carenot to spillany fuel on painted
surfaces.You could otherwisedamagethe
paintwork.
!
Use afilter when adding fuel fromafuel
can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection
system could otherwisebeblockedbyparti-
clesfromthe fuel can.
If youoverfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
outwhenthe fuel pump nozzleisremoved.
For furtherinformationonfueland fuel quality
(Y page 300).
Refueling
General information
The fuel fillerflapisunlockedorlocked auto-
maticallywhenyou unlock or lock the vehicle
with the SmartKeyorusing KEYLESS-GO.
The positionofthe fuel fillercap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster.The arrow next
to the filling pump indicates the side of the
vehicle.
On the insideofthe fuel fillercap,you will find
informationonthe recommendedfuel.
Opening the fuelfillerflap
:
To open the fuel fillerflap
;
To insert the fuel fillercap
=
Tire pressure table
?
Instruction labelfor fuel typetoberefu-
eled
X
Switch the engine off.
X
Removethe SmartKeyfromthe ignition
lock.
X
Press the fuel fillerflapinthe direction of
arrow :.
The fuel fillerflapswingsup.
X
Turn the fuel fillercap counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Insert the fuel fillercap into the holder
bracket on the insideoffuelfillerflap ;.
X
Completely insert the fillerneck of the fuel
pump nozzleinto the tank, hookinplace
and refuel.
X
Onlyfillthe tank untilthe pump nozzle
switches off.
i
Do not addany morefuelafter the pump
stopsfilling for the first time.Otherwise, fuel
mayleakout.
Closingthe fuelfillerflap
X
Replace the cap on the fillerneck and turn
clockwise untilitengages audibly.
X
Close the fuel fillerflap.
i
Close the fuel fillerflapbeforelocking the
vehicle.
i
If youare drivingwiththe fuel fillercap
open, the 8 reservefuelwarning lamp
flashes. The ; Check Engine warning
Refueling
133
Driving andparking
Z
lamp may also light up. Amessage appears
in the multifunction display (Y page 198).
For further information on warningand indi-
cator lamps in the instrumentcluster, see
(Y page 214).
Problemswith fuel and thefuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Fuel is leakingfromthe
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tankisfaulty.
G
WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Turn the SmartKey immediately to position u in the ignition lock
(Y page 118) and remove it.
X
Do not restart the engineunder any circumstances.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap can-
not be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 66).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 68).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanismisjam-
med.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may igniteiftheycomeintocontact
with hot partsofthe exhaustsystem or
exhaustgas flow. There is arisk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials comeintocontactwith partsofthe
vehicle which are hot.Take particular care
not to park on dry grasslandorharvested
grain fields.
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle, theycould set it in motion by, for
example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
the parking position P.
R
startthe engine.
In addition,theymay operatevehicle equip-
mentand becometrapped. There is arisk of
an accident and injury.
When leavingthe vehicle, always takethe
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
!
Always securethe vehicle correctly against
rollingaway. Otherwise, the vehicle or its
drivetrain could be damaged.
134
Parking
Driving and parking
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position j.
R
the SmartKey must be removed from the
ignition lock.
R
the front wheels must be turned towards the
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the
engine. The vehicle may roll away.There is a
risk of an accident.
After switching off the engine, alwaysswitch
to parking position P.Prevent the parked
vehicle from rolling away by applying the
parking brake.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j
(Y page 126).
X
With the SmartKey : turn the SmartKey to
position u in the ignition lock and remove
it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO
Start/Stop button (Y page 118).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps
in the instrument cluster go out.
If the driver's door is closed, this is the
same as SmartKey position 1.Ifthe driv-
er's door is open, this is the same as Smart-
Key position u (Y page 118).
The engine can be switched off while the vehi-
cle is in motion by pressing and holding the
Start/Stop button for about three seconds.
This function operates independently of the
ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off
function.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could:
R
open doors, thereby endangeringother
persons or road users
R
get out and be struck by oncoming traffic
R
operate the vehicle's equipment
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake
R
shift the automatic transmission out of
park position j or shift the manual
transmission to neutral
R
start the engine
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. This
also applies for the digital vehicle key if the
"Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via
Mercedes me connect.
Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of
children. This also applies for the Digital
Vehicle Key if the "Digital Vehicle Key" func-
tion is activated via Mercedes me connect.
The function of the electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
board voltage is low or there is amalfunction
in the system, it may not be possible to apply
the released parking brake.
X
If this is the case, only park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it to prevent it roll-
ing away.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
j.
It may not be possible to release an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or
there is amalfunction in the system. Contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
The electric parking brake performs afunction
test at regular intervals while the engine is
switched off. The sounds that can be heard
while this is occurringare normal.
Parking
135
Driving and parking
Z
Applyingorreleasing manually
X
To apply: push handle :.
When theelectric parking brakeisapplied,
thered F (USAonly) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in theinstru-
mentcluster.
The electric parking brakecan also be
appliedwhen theSmartKey is removed.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in theinstrumentclus-
tergoesout.
The electric parking brakecan only be
released:
R
when theSmartKey is in position 1 in the
ignition lock(Ypage 118) or
R
if theignition was switched on usingthe
Start/Stopbutton
Applyingautomatically
The electric parking brakeisautomatically
appliedwhen thetransmission is in position
j and:
R
theengineisswitched off or
R
thedriver is notwearing aseat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To preventthe electric parking brakefrom
beingautomatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brakeisalso appliedauto-
matically if:
R
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONICbrings
thevehicletoastandstill or
R
theHOLDfunction is keepingthe vehicle
stationary
In addition,atleast oneofthe followingcondi-
tionsmustbefulfilled:
R
theengineisswitched off
R
thedriver is notwearing aseat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R
there is asystem malfunction
R
thepowersupply is insufficient
R
thevehicleisstationary for alengthy period
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in theinstrumentcluster
lights up.
The electric parking brakeisnot automatically
appliedifthe engineisswitched off by the
ECO start/stopfunction.
Releasing automatically
The electric parking brakeisreleasedauto-
matically when all of thefollowingconditions
are fulfilled:
R
theengineisrunning
R
The seat belt tongue is engagedinthe belt
buckle
R
thetransmission is in position h or k and
you depress theacceleratorpedal or shift
from position j to h or k
R
if thetransmission is in position k,the
trunk lid mustbeclosed
If theseat belt tongue is notengagedinthe
seat belt buckle, thefollowingconditionsmust
be fulfilled:
R
thedriver's door is closed
R
you movethe transmission out of position
j or you havepreviously driven at aspeed
above2mph (3 km/h)
R
if thetransmission is in position k,the
trunk lid mustbeclosed
When theelectric parking brakeisreleased,
the ! indicator lamp goes out in theinstru-
mentcluster.
Emergency braking
The vehiclecan also be braked during an
emergencybyusingthe electric parking brake.
X
Whiledriving, push handle : of theelectric
parking brake.
The vehicleisbraked for as longasthe han-
dle of theelectric parking brakeispressed.
The longer theelectric parking brakehandle
is depressed, thegreaterthe braking force.
136
Parking
Driving and parking
During braking:
R
awarning tone sounds
R
the ReleaseParkingBrakeReleaseParkingBrake message
appears
R
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-
ter flashes
When the vehiclehas been braked to astand-
still,the electricparkingbrake is applied.
Parking the vehicle foralongperiod
If youleave the vehicleparked for longerthan
fourweeks,the battery maybedamaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If youleave the vehicleparked for longerthan
sixweeks,the vehiclemay sufferdamageasa
resultoflackofuse.
X
Visitaqualified specialistworkshop and
seekadvice.
i
Youcan obtaininformationabout trickle
chargers fromaqualified specialistwork-
shop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If youswitch off the ignition whiledriving,
safety-relevant functions areonlyavailable
with limitations, or not at all. Thiscould
affect, for example, the powersteeringand
the brake boosting effect. Youwillrequire
considerablymoreeffort to steerand brake.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Do not switch off the ignition whiledriving.
G
WARNING
Mobilecommunications equipment distracts
the driver fromtrafficconditions. In addi-
tion, the driver could lose controlofthe
vehicle. There is ariskofanaccident.
As adriver,use mobilecommunications
equipment onlywhenthe vehicleisata
standstill.
As avehicleoccupant, usemobilecommuni-
cations equipment onlyinthe designated
area,e.g.the rearpassengercompartment.
Observe the legalrequirements for the country
in which youare driving. Some jurisdictions
prohibitthe driver fromusing amobilephone
whiledrivingavehicle.
If youmakeacallwhile driving, always use
hands-freemode. Onlyoperate the telephone
when the trafficsituationpermits. If youare
unsure, pull overtoasafelocation and stop
beforeoperating the telephone.
Bearinmindthatataspeedofonly30mph
(approximately50km/h), the vehiclecovers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately14m)per
second.
Drive sensibly –savefuel
Observe the following tipstosavefuel:
R
The tiresshouldalwaysbeinflatedtothe
recommendedtire pressure.
R
Removeunnecessary loads.
R
Warm up the engine at lowengine speeds.
R
Avoidfrequent accelerationorbraking.
R
Observe the serviceintervals in the Mainte-
nance Bookletorinthe serviceintervaldis-
play.Haveall the maintenance work carried
in accordance with DaimlerAGregulations.
Fuelconsumption also increases when driving
in coldweather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly
terrain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinking and drivingand/or taking drugs
and drivingare verydangerouscombina-
tions. Even asmall amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes,perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of aserious or evenfatal
accident is greatlyincreased when youdrink
or take drugs and drive.
Driving tips
137
Driving andparking
Z
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive whohas been drinking or
taking drugs.
Emissioncontrol
G
DANGER
Combustion enginesemitpoisonous
exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide.
Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to
health and can resultinpoisoning. There is a
riskoffatal injury.Therefore,neverleave the
engine running an enclosedspace without
adequate ventilation.
Certain engine systemsare designedtokeep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes withinlegal limits.
These systemsonlyworkatpeakefficiency if
theyare serviced exactly in accordance with
the manufacturer's specifications. Alwayshave
work on the engine carriedout at aqualified
specialistworkshop.Mercedes-Benz recom-
mendsthatyou useanauthorizedMercedes-
Benz Center for thispurpose. In particular,
work relevant to safety or on safety-related
systemsmustbecarriedout at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed
under any circumstances.Furthermore, all
specific serviceworkmustbecarriedout at
regular intervals and in accordance with the
Mercedes-Benz servicerequirements.Details
can be found in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECOdisplay
The ECO displayshows youhow economical
your drivingstyle is.The ECO displayassists
youinachievingthe mosteconomical driving
style for the selectedsettings and prevailing
conditions. Your drivingstyle can significantly
influence the vehicle's consumption.
:
Acceleration
;
Coasting
=
Constant
?
Additionalrange achieved
Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. StartBonus fr. Start
and represents the additional range achieved
since the beginning of the journey as aresult
of an adapted drivingstyle.
If the fuel level hasdropped into the reserve
range,the FuelLowFuelLow message is shown in the
multifunctiondisplay insteadofrange ?.The
8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster
also lights up (Y page 214).
138
Driving tips
Driving andparking
The ECO display consistsofthree sections,
with an inner and outer area. The sectionscor-
respond to the following three categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluation of all
acceleration processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: moder-
ate acceleration,especially at
higher speeds
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
;
Coasting (evaluation of all deceler-
ation processes):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: antici-
patory driving, keeping your dis-
tanceand early release of the
accelerator. The vehicle can
coast without use of the brakes.
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequent heavy
braking
=
Constant (continuous evaluation
over the entirejourney):
R
the outer area fills up and the
inner area lights up green: con-
stant speed and avoidance of
unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration
R
the outer area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuations in
speed
The three inner areas display the current driv-
ing style and light up green as aresult of apar-
ticularly economical driving style. Depending
on the driving situation, up to two areas may
light up simultaneously.
At the beginning of the journey, the three
outer areas are empty and fill up as aresult of
economical driving. Ahigher level indicates a
more economical driving style. If the three
outer areas are completely filled at the same
time, the driver has adopted the most eco-
nomical driving style for the selected settings
and prevailing conditions. The ECO display
border lights up.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual
fuel consumption. The additionally achieved
range displayed under Bonus fr. start
Bonus fr. start does
not indicate afixed consumption reduction.
In addition to driving style, the actual con-
sumption is affected by other factors, such as:
R
load
R
tire pressure
R
cold start
R
choice of route
R
active electrical consumers
These factorsare not included in the ECO dis-
play.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achievingahigher value in the categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive the vehicle in drive program C or E.
In urban traffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
On long journeys at aconstant speed, e.g. on
the highway, only the outer area for "constant"
will change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areas at the start of ajourney. On
longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For
more marked changes, perform amanual rest
(Y page 172).
Further information on the ECO display
(Y page 171).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on aslippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's brak-
ing effect,the drive wheels could lose their
grip. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on aslippery road surface.
Driving tips
139
Driving and parking
Z
Downhill gradients
!
On long, steep gradients, you mustreduce
theload on thebrakes. To use enginebrak-
ing, shift to alowergear in goodtime. This
helps you to avoid overheatingthe brakes
and wearingthemout excessively.
Whenmakinguse of theenginebraking
effect,itispossible that adrive wheelmay
notturnfor sometime, e.g. in thecaseof
suddenly changingorslipperyroadsurface
conditions. Thiscould cause damage to the
drive train.Thistypeofdamage is notcov-
eredbythe Mercedes-Benzwarranty.
Change into alowergear in goodtimeonlong
and steep downhill gradients. Thisisespecially
important if thevehicle is laden.
Thisalso applies if you haveactivated cruise
controlorActiveDistance AssistDISTRONIC.
Heavy andlightloads
G
WARNING
If you restyour foot on thebrake pedal
whiledriving, thebraking systemcan over-
heat.Thisincreasesthe stoppingdistance
and can evencause thebraking systemto
fail.There is ariskofanaccident.
Never use thebrake pedalasafootrest.
Never depress thebrake pedaland the
accelerator pedalatthe sametime.
!
Depressing thebrake pedalconstantly
resultsinexcessive and premature wear to
thebrake pads.
If thebrakeshavebeensubjectedtoaheavy
load,donot stop thevehicle immediately, but
drive on forashort while. Thisallowsthe air-
flowtocoolthe brakesmorequickly.
Wet roads
If you havedriven foralongtimeinheavyrain
without braking,there may be adelayed reac-
tion from thebrakeswhen braking forthe first
time. Thismay also occur after thevehicle has
beenwashed or driven through deepwater.
You then havetodepress thebrake pedal
more firmly. Maintain agreater distancefrom
thevehicle in front.
Afterdrivingonawet road or havingthe vehi-
clewashed, brake firmly whilepayingattention
to thetraffic conditions. Thiswill warm up the
brake discs,thereby drying them more quickly
and protectingthemagainst corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, alayer of salt resi-
due may form on thebrake discs and brake
pads.Thiscan result in asignificantly longer
braking distance.
R
In order to preventany salt build-up,apply
thebrakesoccasionally whilepayingatten-
tion to thetraffic conditions.
R
Carefullydepress thebrake pedaland the
beginning and endofajourney.
R
Maintain agreater distancetothe vehicle
ahead.
Servicing thebrakes
!
The brake fluidlevel may be toolow, if:
R
if thered brake warninglamp lights up in
theinstrument cluster and
R
you hear awarningtonewhilethe engine
is running
Observeadditional warningmessages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluidlevel may be toolow due to
brake pad wear or leakingbrake lines.
Havethe brake systemchecked immedi-
ately. Consult aqualified specialistwork-
shoptoarrangethis.
!
As theESP
®
systemoperates automati-
cally, theengineand theignition mustbe
switched off(theSmartKey mustbeinposi-
tion u or 1 in theignition lock),ifthe
electric parking brake is tested on abraking
dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).
Brakingtriggeredautomatically by ESP
®
may cause severe damage to thebrake sys-
tem.
Allchecksand maintenance workonthe brake
systemmustbecarriedout at aqualified spe-
cialistworkshop.
Havebrake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at aqualified specialistworkshop.
If thebrake systemhas only beensubjectto
moderateloads, you should test thefunction-
alityofyour brakesatregular intervals.
Information on BAS(BrakeAssist) (Y page 57).
140
Driving tips
Driving andparking
Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only
have brake pads/linings installed on your vehi-
cle which have been approved for Mercedes-
Benz vehicles or which correspond to an
equivalent quality standard. Brake pads/
linings which have not been approved for
Mercedes-Benzvehicles or which are not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use
brake fluid that has been specially approved
for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which
corresponds to an equivalent quality standard.
Brake fluid which has not been approved for
Mercedes-Benzvehicles or which is not of an
equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's
operating safety.
High-performance brake system
(except Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
AMG brake systems are designed for heavy
loads and have components with correspond-
ing properties. This may lead to noise when
braking. This will depend on:
R
Speed
R
Braking force
R
Ambient conditions, e.g. temperature and
humidity
The wear of individual components of the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings
or brake discs, depends on the individual driv-
ing style and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state amile-
age that will be valid under all circumstances.
An aggressive driving style will lead to high
wear. You can obtain more information on this
from aqualified specialist workshop.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after sev-
eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-
sate for this by applying greater force to the
brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your
driving and braking accordingly during this
break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake sys-
tem warning lamp in the instrumentcluster
and note any brake status messages in the
multifunction display.Especially for high per-
formance driving, it is important to maintain
and have the brake system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to acertain depth on
the road surface, there is adanger of hydro-
planing occurring.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditionsinwhich hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
R
lower your speed
R
avoid ruts
R
avoid sudden steering movements
R
brake carefully
Driving on flooded roads
!
Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
the depth of any water before driving
through it. Drive slowly through standing
water. Otherwise, water could enter the
vehicle interior or engine compartment. It
can then damage the engine's or automatic
transmission'selectronic components. It
can also be sucked in by the engine's air
intake connection and cause engine dam-
age.
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on aslippery road surface
in an attempt to increase the engine's brak-
ing effect,the drive wheels could lose their
grip. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on aslippery road surface.
G
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter
the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehi-
cle becomes trapped in snow. There is arisk
of fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heat-
ing running, make sure the exhaust pipe and
area around the vehicle are clear of snow.
Driving tips
141
Driving and parking
Z
To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air,
open awindow on the side of the vehicle
that is not facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at aqualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration,steering
and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise
control.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warningdevice
and is thereforeunsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after ashort delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially
in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle
could skid if you fail to adapt your driving
style. Always adapt your driving style and drive
at aspeed to suit the prevailing weather condi-
tions.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (Y page 271).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (Y page 270).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"
section (Y page 270).
Driving systems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains aconstant road
speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
steep downhill gradients, especially if the vehi-
cle is laden, you must select alower gear in
good time. By doing so, you will make use of
the braking effect of the engine. This relieves
the load on the brake system and preventsthe
brakes from overheating and wearing too
quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for aprolonged period. You can
store any road speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise
control can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise
control cannot take into account the road,
traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control
is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-
tancetothe vehicle in front,for vehicle speed,
for braking in good time and for staying in
lane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain aconstant speed e.g.
in heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Brakingoraccel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is achange of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To store the current speed or ahigher
speed
;
To store the current speed or calls up the
last stored speed
=
To store the current speed or alower
speed
?
To deactivate cruise control
142
Driving systems
Driving and parking
When you activatecruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds. The speed is then permanently
displayed in the status indicator together with
the ¯ symbol.
In vehicles with asegment circle in the speed-
ometer,the segmentsbetween the currently
stored speed and the end of the segment cir-
cle light up.
Storing, maintaining and calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining aspeed
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up :
or down ?.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintainsthe stored speed.
You can store the currentspeed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients.The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintainsthe
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
Storing or calling up aspeed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the currentspeed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate
or brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an
accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If
you do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you =.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the currentspeed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Setting aspeed
G
WARNING
Keep in mind that it may take abrief
momentuntil the vehicle has made the nec-
essary adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed
to avalue that the prevailing road conditions
and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise,
sudden and unexpected acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle could cause an
accident and/or serious injury to you and
others.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pres-
sure point for ahigher speed, or down ?
for alower speed.
Everytime the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressure point for ahigher speed, or
down ? for alower speed.
Everytime the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i
The speed indicated in the speedometer
may differ slightly from the speed stored.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For example,
if you acceleratebriefly to overtake, cruise
control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
Driving systems
143
Driving and parking
Z
Deactivating cruisecontrol
There are severalways to deactivatecruise
control:
X
Briefly press thecruise controllever for-
wards : .
or
X
Brake.
Cruise controlisautomatically deactivated if:
R
you engage theelectric parking brake
R
you are drivingatlessthan20mph
(30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivateESP
®
R
on vehicles withmanual transmission, you
shift to agear that is toohigh, and as a
result theenginespeed is toolow
R
BrakeAssistintervenes
R
you move out of transmissionposition h
If cruise controlisdeactivated, you will hear a
warningtone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐
trolOfftrolOff messageinthe multifunction dis-
play forapproximately fiveseconds.
i
Whenyou switch offthe engine, thelast
speed stored is cleared.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
General notes
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC regulates
thespeed and automatically helps you main-
tain thedistancefromthe vehicle detectedin
front. Vehicles are detectedwiththe aid of the
radar sensor system. Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC brakesautomatically to avoid
exceedingthe set speed or to maintain the
designated distancefromthe vehicle in front.
Change into alowergear in goodtimeonlong
and steep downhill gradients. Thisisespecially
important if thevehicle is laden. By doingso,
you will makeuse of thebraking effect of the
engine. Thisrelieves theload on thebrake sys-
temand prevents thebrakesfromoverheating
and wearingtoo quickly.
If Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC detects
that there is ariskofacollision withthe vehi-
cleinfront,you will be warned visually and
audibly. Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC
cannotpreventacollision without your inter-
vention.Anintermittent warningtonewill then
soundand thedistancewarninglamp will light
up in theinstrument cluster. Brakeimmedi-
ately in order to increase thedistancefrom
thevehicle in front, or take evasiveaction,pro-
vided it is safetodoso.
ForActiveDistance AssistDISTRONIC to
assist you when driving, theradar sensor sys-
temmustbeoperational.
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC operates in
thespeed range between 0mph (0 km/h) and
120mph (200km/h).
Do not useActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC
on roads with steepgradients.
As ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICtrans-
mits radarwaves,itcan resemble the radar
detectors of the responsibleauthorities. You
can refer to the relevant chapterinthe Opera-
tor'sManualifquestions areasked aboutthis.
i
USA only: Thisdevicehas been approved
by the FCC as a"VehicularRadar System".
The radarsensor is intendedfor useinan
automotive radarsystem only. Removal,
tampering, or altering of the devicewillvoid
any warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC.Donot tamperwith, alter, or useinany
non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice
could voidthe user'sauthority to operate
the equipment.
i
Canadaonly: Thisdevicecomplies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operationis
subject to the following two conditions:
1. Thisdevicemay not cause interference,
and
2. Thisdevicemustacceptany interference
received, including interferencethatmay
cause undesired operationofthe device.
Removal,tampering, or altering of the
devicewillvoidany warranties, and is not
144
Driving systems
Driving andparking
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Anyunauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authoritytooperate
the equipment.
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles
R
oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As aresult, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warningsnor
interveneinsuch situations. There is arisk
of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles (vehicles without
the Driving Assistance package)
R
stationary objects in the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles, if sufficientdetec-
tion is not possible (vehicles with the Driv-
ing Assistance package)
R
oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic
As aresult, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC may neither give warningsnor
interveneinsuch situations. There is arisk
of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Distance keepingassistantcannot always
clearly identify other road users and com-
plex traffic situations.
In such cases, distancekeepingassistant
can:
R
accelerateorbrake the vehicle unexpect-
edly
R
interveneunexpectedly
There is arisk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, especially if distancekeepingassis-
tant warns you.
G
WARNING
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes
your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum
possible deceleration. If this deceleration is
not sufficient, Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC alerts you with avisual and
acoustic warning.There is arisk of an acci-
dent.
Adjust your speed in these cases and main-
tain sufficientdistance.
Apply the brakes yourself and/or take eva-
sive action.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can neither
reduce the risk of an accidentifyou fail to
adapt your driving style, nor override the laws
of physics. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
cannot take intoaccountroad, weather or traf-
fic conditions. Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distancetothe vehicle in front, for
vehicle speed, for brakingingood time and for
staying in your lane.
Driving systems
145
Driving and parking
Z
Do not useActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC:
R
In roadand trafficconditions which do not
allowyou to maintain aconstant speed, e.g.
in heavytrafficoronwinding roads
R
on slippery roadsurfaces.Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
tractionand the vehiclecould thenskid
R
In poor visibility,e.g.due to fog,heavy rain
or snow
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICmay not
detect narrow vehicles drivinginfront, e.g.
motorcycles, or vehicles drivinginastaggered
formation.
In particular,the detection of obstaclescan be
impaired if:
R
There is dirt on the sensorsoranything else
coveringthe sensors
R
There is snow or heavyrain
R
There is interferencebyotherradar sources
R
There arestrong radarreflections, for exam-
pleinparkinggarages
If ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICnolonger
detects avehicleinfront, Distance Pilot
DISTRONICmay unexpectedly accelerate to
the speedstored.
Thisspeed may:
R
Be too high if youare drivinginaturning
lane or an exitlane
R
Be so high when drivinginthe right-hand
lane thatyou overtake vehicles in the left-
hand lane
R
Be so high in the left lane thatyou pass
vehicles drivingonthe right
If there is achange of drivers, advisethe new
driver of the speedstored.
Cruisecontrollever
Cruise control lever
:
To storethe current speedorahigher
speed
;
To set aspecifiedminimumdistance
=
To storethe current speedorcallupthe
last stored speed
?
To storethe current speedoralower
speed
A
To deactivate ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC
ActivatingActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC and storing, maintaining
and callingupaspeed
Important safety notes
!
When ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD functionisactivated,the vehi-
cle brakes automaticallyincertain situa-
tions.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICand the
HOLD functioninthe following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
To activate ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONIC,
the following conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started.Itmay take up
to two minutesofdrivingbeforeActiveDis-
tance Assist DISTRONICisready for use.
R
the electricparkingbrake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, butnot intervening.
R
ActiveParkingAssist must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position h.
146
Driving systems
Driving andparking
R
the driver's door must be closedwhenyou
shift from j to h or your seat belt must
be fastened.
R
the front-passengerdoormustbeclosed.
R
the vehiclemustnot skid.
Activating
X
Brieflypullthe cruisecontrollever towards
you ?,up:or down ; .
ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICisactiva-
ted.
X
To adjustthe setspeed in 1mph incre-
ments (1 km/hincrements): brieflypress
the cruisecontrollever up : to the pres-
sure point for ahigherspeed, or down ; to
the pressure point for alower speed.
Everytimethe cruisecontrollever is
pressedupordown, the last speedstored is
increasedorreduced.
or
X
To adjustthe setspeed in 5mph incre-
ments (10km/hincrements): briefly
press the cruisecontrollever up : past the
pressure point for ahigherspeed, or
down ; past the pressure point for alower
speed.
Everytimethe cruisecontrollever is
pressedupordown, the last speedstored is
increasedorreduced.
X
Removeyourfootfromthe accelerator
pedal.
Your vehicleadaptsits speedtothatofthe
vehicleinfront, butonlyuptothe desired
stored speed.
i
If youdonot fullyrelease the accelerator
pedal, the Active Distance Assist pas‐
Active Distance Assist pas‐
sivesive message appearsinthe multifunction
display. The setdistance to aslower-moving
vehicleinfront will thennot be maintained.
Youwillbedrivingatthe speedyou deter-
mine by the positionofthe accelerator
pedal.
Youcan also activate ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONICwhenstationary. The lowest speed
thatcan be setis20mph (30 km/h).
Activatingatthe currentspeed/last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If youcallupthe stored speedand it differs
fromthe current speed, the vehicleacceler-
atesordecelerates.Ifyou do not know the
stored speed, the vehiclecould accelerate
or brake unexpectedly.Thereisariskofan
accident.
Payattentiontothe roadand trafficcondi-
tions beforecalling up the stored speed. If
youdonot know the stored speed, storethe
desired speedagain.
X
Brieflypullthe cruisecontrol lever towards
you ?.
X
Removeyourfootfromthe accelerator
pedal.
Thefirst timeActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONICisactivated,itstores the current
speedorregulatesthe speedofthe vehicle
to the previously stored speed.
Pulling away and driving
X
If youwanttopullawaywithActiveDis-
tanceAssistDISTRONIC: remove your foot
fromthe brake pedal.
X
Brieflypullthe cruisecontrol lever towards
you ?.
or
X
If ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICisacti-
vated:accelerate briefly.
Your vehiclepulls away and adapts its speed
to thatofthe vehicleinfront. If no vehicleis
detectedinfront, your vehicleaccelerates
to the setspeed.
The vehiclecan also pull away when it is facing
an unidentifiedobstacle or is drivingonadif-
ferent line fromanothervehicle. The vehicle
thenbrakes automatically. Be ready to brake
at alltimes.
If there is no vehicleinfront, ActiveDistance
Assist DISTRONICoperates in the same way
as cruisecontrol.
If ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICdetects a
slower-moving vehicleinfront, it brakes your
vehicle. In thisway,the distance youhave
selected is maintained.
If ActiveDistance Assist DISTRONICdetects a
faster-movingvehicleinfront, it increasesthe
drivingspeed. However, the vehicleisonly
accelerated up to the speedyou have stored.
Driving systems
147
Driving andparking
Z
Selecting the drive program
Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC supports a
sporty driving style when you have selected
the S or S+ drive program (Y page 124).
Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to
the set speed is then noticeably more
dynamic. If you have selected the C or E driv-
ing program, the vehicle accelerates more
gently. In city traffic and stop-start traffic,
drive program C is recommended.
Changing lanes
If you want to change to the overtakinglane
on multi-lane roads, Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC supports you if:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h)
R
Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC is main-
taining the distance to avehicle in front
R
you switch on the appropriate turn signal
R
Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC does not
currently detect adanger of collision
If these conditionsare fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front becomes too small.
i
When you change lanes, Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC monitorsthe left lane on
left-hand-drive vehicles or the right lane on
right-hand-drive vehicles.
Stopping
G
WARNING
If you leave the driver's seat when the vehi-
cle is only being braked by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC, it could roll away:
R
if there is amalfunction in the system or
in the voltage supply
R
if Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC is
deactivated using the cruise control lever,
for example by avehicle occupant or from
outside the vehicle
R
if the electrical system in the engine com-
partment,the battery or the fuses are
tampered with
R
if the battery is disconnected
R
if the vehicle is accelerated, e.g. by avehi-
cle occupant
There is arisk of an accident.
Always deactivate Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle against
rolling away before you leave it.
Further information on deactivating Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 150).
If Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC detects
that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes
your vehicle until it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
i
After atime, the electric parking brake
secures the vehicle and relieves the service
brake.
i
Depending on the specified minimum dis-
tance, your vehicle will come to astandstill
at asufficient distance behind the vehicle in
front.The specified minimum distance is set
using the control on the cruise control lever.
When Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC is
activated, the transmission is shifted automati-
cally to position j if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The electric parking brake is appliedautomati-
cally if Active DistanceAssist DISTRONIC is
active when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
asystem malfunction occurs
R
the power supply is not sufficient
If amalfunction occurs, the transmission may
also shift to position j automatically.
Setting aspeed
Keep in mind that it may take abrief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : to the pres-
148
Driving systems
Driving and parking
sure point for ahigher speed, or down ;
for alower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly
press the cruise control lever up : past the
pressure point for ahigher speed, or
down ; for alower speed.
Every time the cruise control lever is
pressed up or down, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
Setting aspecifiedminimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance
for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC by vary-
ing the time span between one and two sec-
onds. This determines the distance that Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC is to maintain from
the vehicle in front,depending on the road
speed. You can see this distance in the multi-
function display(Ypage 149).
The specified minimum distance can be
changed while Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is switched on or off.
Make sure that you maintain asufficiently safe
distance from the vehicle in front.Adjust the
distance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
Cruise control lever
X
To increase: turn control = toward ;.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then
maintains agreater distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control = toward :.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC then
maintains ashorter distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front.
Active Distance AssistDISTRONIC dis-
plays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
activated, one or more segments ; in the set
speed range light up.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC detects a
vehicle in front,segments ; from speed of
the vehicle in front = to stored speed : light
up.
i
For design reasons, the speed displayed
on the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
Display when Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is deactivated
:
Vehicle in front,ifdetected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front;adjustable
?
Your vehicle
X
Select the Assistance Graphic
Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (Y page 176).
Driving systems
149
Driving and parking
Z
Display when Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC is activated
:
Vehicleinfront,ifdetected
;
Specified minimum distancetothe vehicle
in front; adjustable
=
Your vehicle
?
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC
X
Selectthe AssistanceGraphicAssistanceGraphic function
usingthe on-boardcomputer (Y page 176).
You will initially see thestoredspeed for
approximately fiveseconds when you activate
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC.
Deactivating Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC
Cruisecontrollever
There are severalways to deactivateActive
DistanceAssistDISTRONIC:
X
Briefly press thecruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake,unless thevehicleisstationary.
Whenyou deactivateActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONIC, the Active Distance Assist
Active Distance Assist
Off
Off message appears on themultifunction dis-
play forapproximately fiveseconds.
i
The last speed storedremainsstoreduntil
you switch offthe engine.
i
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC is not
deactivated if you depress theaccelerator
pedal. If you accelerate to overtake,Active
DistanceAssistDISTRONIC adjuststhe vehi-
cle's speed to thelast speed storedafter
you havefinished overtaking.
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC is automati-
cally deactivated if:
R
you engage theelectric parkingbrakeorif
thevehicleisautomatically secured withthe
electric parkingbrake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivateESP
®
R
thetransmissionisinposition j, k or i
R
you pull thecruise control lever towardsyou
in order to pull away and thefront-
passenger doorisopen
R
you activateActiveParking Assist
R
thevehicleisskidding
If Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC is deacti-
vated automatically, you will hear awarning
tone.The Active Distance Assist OffActive Distance Assist Off
message will appear on themultifunction dis-
play forapproximately fiveseconds.
Tips for drivingwithActive Distance
AssistDISTRONIC
General notes
The following containsdescriptionsofcertain
roadand traffic conditionsinwhichyou must
be particularlyattentive. In suchsituations,
brakeifnecessary. Active DistanceAssist
DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
Cornering, going intoand coming out of
abend
150
Driving systems
Driving andparking
The ability of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC to detect vehicles when cornering
is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpect-
edly or late.
Vehicles traveling on adifferent line
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may not
detect vehicles that are not driving in the mid-
dle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in
front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not
detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The dis-
tancetothis vehicle will be too short.
Narrow vehicles
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not yet
detected the vehicle in front on the edge of
the road because of its narrow width. The dis-
tancetothe vehicle in front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If,
for example, the detected vehicle turns acor-
ner and an obstacle or stationary vehicle is
revealed, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
will not brake for them.
Crossing vehicles
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may mis-
takenly detect vehicles that are crossingyour
lane.
If you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC under the following conditions, the
vehicle could pull away unintentionally:
R
at traffic lights with crossingtraffic, for
example
R
if there is avehicle in front,after acrossing,
with the HOLD function activated
Driving systems
151
Driving and parking
Z
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driverinthe
following situations:
R
When pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
R
When maneuvering on steep slopes
R
When waiting in traffic
The vehicleiskept stationary without the
driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceledand the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedaltopullaway.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the vehicleisonly braked using the HOLD
function, the vehiclemay roll awayinthe fol-
lowing situations when you leave the vehi-
cle:
R
if there is amalfunction in the system or
in the voltagesupply
R
if the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedalorbrake
pedal, e.g. by avehicleoccupant
There is arisk of an accident.
Always deactivate the HOLD function and
secure the vehicleagainst rolling away
before you leave it.
!
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the HOLD function is activated, the vehi-
cle brakes automatically in certain situa-
tions.
To avoiddamage to the vehicle, deactivate
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the
HOLD function in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page152).
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if all of the
following conditions are fulfilled:
R
the vehicleisstationary.
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
R
the driver's door is closed or yourseat belt
is fastened.
R
the electric parking brake is released.
R
the transmission is in position h, k or i.
R
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti-
vated
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedalfurther
until : appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i
If depressing the brake pedalthe first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.
Deactivatingthe HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automati-
callyif:
R
you accelerate and the transmission is in
position h or k.
R
you shift the transmission to position j.
R
you apply the brakes again with acertain
amount of pressure until HOLDHOLD disappears
from the multifunction display.
R
you secure the vehicleusing the electric
parking brake.
R
you activate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC.
152
Driving systems
Driving and parking
i
After atime,the electricparking brake
secures the vehicleand relieves the service
brake.
Whenthe HOLD functionisactivated,the
transmission is automaticallyshifted to posi-
tion j if:
R
the driver's seatbeltisnot fastenedand the
driver's door is open
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
maticallyswitched off by the ECO start/
stop function.
The electricparking brake secures the vehicle
automaticallyifthe HOLD functionisactivated
when the vehicleisstationaryand:
R
asystem malfunctionoccurs
R
the powersupplyisnot sufficient
If amalfunctioninthe electricparking brake
occurs, the transmission mayalsobeshifted
into position j automatically.
Adaptivedampingsystem
General notes
i
Mercedes-AMG SLC43: the adaptive
damping system is calledAMG RIDE CON-
TROL sports suspension.
Asuspension with the adaptive damping sys-
tem provides improveddriving comfort and
continuously controls the calibrationofthe
dampers. The damping characteristics adapt
to the current operating and driving situation.
The damping is tunedindividually to each
wheeland depends on:
R
your driving style,e.g.sporty
R
the roadsurface conditions
R
the selecteddrive program(Ypage 124).
Selecting the Comfort or Economy
driveprograms
In the Comfort and Economy drive programs,
the driving characteristics of your vehicleare
more comfortable. Select one of thesedrive
programs if youfavor amore comfortabledriv-
ing style.Alsoselect thesedrive programs
when driving fastonstraight roads, e.g.on
straight stretchesofhighway.
In urbantraffic and stop-start traffic, drive pro-
gram C is recommended.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECTbutton : repeat-
edly untilthe Comfort or Economy drive
programisselected.
Selecting Sport mode
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
the Sport drive programensures evenbetter
contact with the road. Select thisdrive pro-
gramwhenemploying asporty driving style,
e.g.onwinding country roads.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECTbutton : as many
timesasnecessary untilthe Sport drive
programisselected.
Selecting Sport Plus mode
The firmer suspension settings in the Sport
Plus drive programensure evenbetter contact
with the road. Select thismodewhenemploy-
ing asporty driving style,e.g.onwinding coun-
try roads or, ideally, when driving on closed
race circuits.
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECTbutton : repeat-
edly untilthe Sport Plus drive programis
selected.
Driving systems
153
Driving andparking
Z
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasound. It monitorsthe
area around your vehicle using six sensors in
the front bumper and four sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audibly indicates the distance between
your vehicle and an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not areplacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and
exiting aparking space. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objectsinthe
maneuvering area when you are maneuvering
or parking.
!
When parking, pay particular attention to
objectsabove or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars.
PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of
the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objectsthat absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck
or apneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated auto-
matically when you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmission to position h, k or
i
R
release the electric parking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds.
Range of the sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not take into
account obstacles located:
R
below the detection range, such as persons,
animals or objects
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tail sectionsorloading ramps of
trucks
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or
slush. They can otherwise not function cor-
rectly. Clean the sensors regularly,taking care
not to scratchordamage them (Y page 251).
Range
154
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8in(approx.
20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6in(approx.
15 cm)
If there is an obstaclewithin this range, the
relevant warning displays light up and awarn-
ing tone sounds. If the distance falls below the
minimum, the distance may no longer be
shown.
Warningdisplays
Warning displayfor the front area
:
Segments on the left-hand sideofthe vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand sideofthe
vehicle
=
Operational readiness segments
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning displayfor the front areaislocated on
the dashboard above the center airvents. The
warning displayfor the rearareaislocated
between the rollbars.
The warning displayfor each sideofthe vehi-
cle is dividedinto five yellow and two red seg-
ments. If yellow operational readiness seg-
ments = light up,Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
is operational.
The selected transmission positionand the
directioninwhich the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning displayisactive whenthe
engine is running.
Automatic transmission:
Transmission posi-
tion
Warningdisplay
h
Front areaactive
k, i or the vehi-
cle is rolling back-
wards
Rear and front areas
active
j
No areas active
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the
vehicle'sdistance from the obstacle. In addi-
tion, warning tones are issued.
Whenthe distance to the obstacleissufficient,
youwillhearanintermittent warning tone. The
Drivingsystems
155
Drivingand parking
Z
shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
shorter the frequency of the intermittent warn-
ing tones becomes. When the minimum dis-
tance is reached, you hear acontinuous warn-
ing tone.
Deactivating/activating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
:
Deactivates/activates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
;
Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp ; lights up, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Parking Guidance
is also deactivated.
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the SmartKey
to position 2 in the ignition lock.
156
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Only the red segments
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displaysare lit. You also
hear awarning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deacti-
vated after approx-
imately 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deac-
tivated.
X
If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at
aqualified specialist workshop.
Only the red segments
in the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displaysare lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately five sec-
onds.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
ference.
X
Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 251).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at adifferent
location.
Parking Guidance
Important safety notes
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas-
ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A
suitable parking space is indicated by the
parking symbol. You receive steering instruc-
tions when parking. You can also still use
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 154).
Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a
parking space. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objectsinthe maneuver-
ing area when you are maneuvering or parking.
G
WARNING
If objectsare located above the detection
range, Parking Guidance may provide steer-
ing instructions too soon. You may cause a
collision as aresult. There is arisk of an
accident.
If objectsare located above the detection
range, stop and switch off Parking Assist.
!
If they cannot be avoided, drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage
the wheels or tires.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched
off, Parking Guidance is also unavailable.
Parking Guidance may also display spaces not
suitable for parking, e.g.:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
Driving systems
157
Driving and parking
Z
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
R
parallel to the direction of travel
R
on straight roads, not bends
R
that are on the same level as the road, i.e.
not on the pavement, for example. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect flat
curbs
Parking tips:
R
on narrow roads, drive as closely as possible
past the parking space
R
parking spaces that are littered or over-
grown might be identified or measured
incorrectly
R
parking spaces that are partiallyoccupied
by trailer drawbars might not be identified
as such or be measured incorrectly
R
snowfall or heavy rain may lead to aparking
space being measured inaccurately
R
pay attention to the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning messages during the
parking procedure (Y page 155)
R
when transporting aload which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use Park-
ing Guidance
R
never use Parking Guidance with snow
chains or an emergency spare wheel moun-
ted
R
make sure that the tire pressures are always
correct.This has adirect effect on the steer-
ing characteristics.
R
the way your vehicle is positioned in the
parking space after parking is dependent on
various factors. These include the position
and shape of the vehicles parked in front
and behind it and the conditions of the loca-
tion. In some cases, Parking Guidance may
guide you too far or not far enough into a
parking space. In some cases, it may also
lead you across or onto the curb. If neces-
sary, cancel the parking procedure with
Parking Guidance.
Detecting parking spaces
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Parking Guidance is automaticallyactivated
when you drive forwards. The system is opera-
tional at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
system independently locates and measures
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as
astatus indicator in the instrument cluster.
When aparking space has been detected, an
arrow towards the right = or the left : also
appears. Parking Guidance only displays park-
ing spaces on the front-passenger side as
standard. Parking spaces on the driver's side
are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the
driver's side is activated. To park on the driv-
er's side, you must leave the driver's side turn
signal switched on until you have engaged
reverse gear.
Parking Guidance will only detect parking
spaces:
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel
R
that are at least 5ft(1.5 m) wide
R
that are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than
your vehicle
Aparking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are approximately
50 ft (15 m) awayfrom it.
Parking
Moving the vehicleinto the stop position
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space
symbol shows the desired parking space in
the instrument cluster.
X
Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to
reverse gear.
158
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift
the transmission to position k.
The multifunction display shows the BeBe
Aware of Obstacles Near the Vehi‐Aware of Obstacles Near the Vehi‐
cle Press 'OK' to Confirmcle Press 'OK' to Confirm message.
X
Press the a button on the multifunction
steering wheel to confirm.
The multifunction display switches to Park-
ing Guidance.
Depending on yourdistance from the park-
ing space, the Please Drive BackwardPlease Drive Backward
message will appearinthe multifunction dis-
play.
X
If necessary, reverse towards the parking
space. This is indicated by an arrow pointing
backwards.
Continue backing up until you hear atone.
Then stop; the stop position has been
reached. The arrow is white.
The Please Steer Wheel to the RightPlease Steer Wheel to the Right
or Please Steer Wheel to the LeftPlease Steer Wheel to the Left
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Backing up into the parking space
X
While the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel in the specified direction
until the arrow is white and awarning tone
sounds.
X
To back up into aparking space: maintain
the steering wheel angle and back up care-
fully.
X
Stop as soon as you hear awarning tone.
The vehicle has reached the position in
which you need to countersteer.
The Please Steer Wheel to the RightPlease Steer Wheel to the Right
or Please Steer Wheel to the LeftPlease Steer Wheel to the Left
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
X
To countersteer: whilethe vehicle is sta-
tionary, turn the steering wheel in the speci-
fied direction until the arrow is white and a
warning tone sounds.
X
To back up into aparking space: maintain
the steering wheel angle and back up care-
fully.
X
Stop as soon as you hear awarning tone. At
the latest, stop as soon as Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC sounds the continuous warn-
ing tone.
The Parking Guidance FinishedParking Guidance Finished mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display
and atone sounds. You may be asked to
steer in adifferent direction and then
change gear. In this case, further displays in
the multifunction display will direct you to
the final position.
X
Maneuver if necessary.
X
Observe the warning messages displayedby
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (Y page 155).
Canceling Parking Guidance
X
Press the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC but-
ton on the center console (Y page 156).
Parking Guidance is immediately canceled
and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched
off.
Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if
it is no longer possibletoguideyou into the
parking space, or if amalfunction occurs.
The parking space symbol goes out and a
warning tone sounds.
Drivingsystems
159
Drivingand parking
Z
Rear viewcamera
General notes
Rear viewcamera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the areabehind
your vehiclewithguide lines in the multimedia
system.
The areabehind the vehicleisdisplayed as a
mirror image, as in the rearviewmirror.
i
The text shown in the multimediasystem
display depends on the languagesetting.
The following are examples of rearview
camera displaysinthe multimediasystem.
Important safety notes
The rearviewcamera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. Youare always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking.Makesure
that there are no persons,animalsorobjects
in the maneuvering areawhenyou are maneu-
vering or parking.
Underthe following circumstances, the rear
viewcamera will not function, or will function
in alimitedmanner:
R
if the trunk lidisopen
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at nightorinvery dark places
R
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
R
if the areaislit by fluorescent bulbsorLED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is asuddenchange in temperature,
e.g. when driving into aheated garagein
winter
R
if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 251)
R
if the rearofyourvehicleisdamaged. In this
case, have the camera position and setting
checkedataqualified specialist workshop.
The field of visionand otherfunctions of the
rearviewcamera may be restricteddue to
additionalaccessoriesonthe rearofthe vehi-
cle (e.g. license plate holder,bicyclerack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
leaving the standard height can resultininac-
curaciesinthe guidelines, depending on tech-
nicalconditions.
i
The contrast of the display may be affec-
ted by the sudden presence of sunlight or
otherlight sources,e.g. when exiting a
garage. Payparticularattention in this situa-
tion.
i
If usability is severely restricted, e.g. due
to pixel errors, have the display repaired or
replaced.
i
The rearviewcamera is protected from
raindrops and dust by means of aflap. When
the rearviewcamera is activated, this flap
opens.
The flapcloses againwhen:
R
youhavefinishedthe maneuvering proc-
ess
R
youswitch off the engine
R
youopenthe trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning
(Y page 251).
For technical reasons,the flapmay remain
openbrieflyafterthe rearviewcamera has
beendeactivated.
Activating/deactivatingthe rear view
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey
is in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by RgearActivation by Rgear
function is selected in the multimediasys-
tem; see the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
Engagereverse gear.
The rearviewcamera flapopens. The multi-
media system shows the areabehind the
vehiclewithguide lines.
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
The image from the rear view camera is
availablethroughout the maneuvering proc-
ess.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to position
j,orafter driving forwards ashort distance.
The inner segmentsofthe warning indicator
are displayed in red if there is acomplete sys-
tem failure. The indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button lights up.
If the system fails at the rear of the vehicle:
R
the rear segmentsare shown in red when
backing up.
R
the rear segmentsare hidden when driving
forwards.
Displays in the multimedia system
The rear view camera may show adistorted
view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not at all. The rear view camera does not show
objectsinthe following positions:
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
!
Objectsnot at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of aparked vehicle
R
the drawbar of atrailer
R
the ball coupling of atrailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
aslanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objectsnofurther than the bot-
tom-most guideline.
:
Yellow guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear area
;
White guide line without steeringinput
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steeringwheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking the course the tires
will take at the current steeringwheel
angle (dynamic)
A
Yellow guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 3ft(1.0 m) from the rear area
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear area
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position k.
The distance specificationsonly apply to
objectsthat are at ground level.
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
:
Front warning display
;
Additionalmeasurement operational readi-
ness indicator for the Parking Package
with rearviewcamera
=
Rear warning display
Vehicles with the ParkingPackage with
rear viewcamera: whenthe Parking Package
with rearviewcamera is operational
(Y page 154), additional measurement opera-
tionalreadiness indicator ; appears in the
multimedia system. If the Parking Package
with rearwarning displays are active or light
up,warning displays : and = are also active
or light up correspondingly in the multimedia
system.
"Reverse parking"function
Backing up straight into aparking space
without steering input
:
White guide line withoutsteering input–
vehicle width including the exterior mirrors
(static)
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheel angle(dynamic)
=
Yellow guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 3ft(1.0 m) from the reararea
?
Redguide line at adistance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30m)fromthe reararea
X
Make sure thatthe rearviewcamera is acti-
vated (Y page 160).
The lane and the guidelines areshown.
X
With the help of white guideline :,check
whether the vehiclewillfit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guideline : as aguide,care-
fullybackupuntilyou reach the end posi-
tion.
Redguide line ? is thenatthe end of the
parking space.The vehicleisalmostparallel
in the parking space.
Reverseperpendicular parking with
steering input
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guidelinefor the vehiclewidth
including the exteriormirrors, at the cur-
rent steering wheelangle (dynamic)
X
Drivepastthe parking space and bring the
vehicletoastandstill.
X
Make sure thatthe rearviewcamera is acti-
vated (Y page 160).
The lane and the guidelines areshown.
X
Whilethe vehicleisatastandstill, turnthe
steering wheelinthe direction of the park-
ing space untilyellowguide line ; reaches
parking space marking :.
X
Maintain the steering input and reverse
carefully.
162
Driving systems
Driving andparking
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, at the cur-
rentsteeringwheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
frontofthe parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
:
Whiteguide line at the current steering
input
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steeringwheel to the center posi-
tion while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 12 in (0.30m)from the rear area
;
Whiteguide line without steeringinput
=
Endofparking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is thenatend of parking
space =.The vehicle is almost parallel in
the parking space.
180° view
:
Symbolfor the 180°view function
;
Your vehicle
=
Warning displays for the Parking Package
with rear view camera
You can also use the rear view camerato
selecta180°view.
When the Parking Package with rear view cam-
era is operational (Y page 154), asymbol for
your own vehicle appears in the multimedia
system. If the Parking Package with rear view
camerawarningdisplays are active, warning
displays = light up in the multimedia system
in yellow or red accordingly.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Important safetynotes
ATTENTIONASSISThelps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It
is active in the rangebetween50mph
(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).
If ATTENTIONASSISTdetects typical indica-
torsoffatigue or increasinglapses in concen-
tration on the part of the driver,itsuggests
you takeabreak.
Driving systems
163
Driving and parking
Z
ATTENTIONASSIST assesses your level of fati-
gueorlapsesinconcentration by taking the
following criteria into account:
R
your personal driving style,e.g.steering
characteristics
R
journey details,e.g.time of dayand length
of journey
The functionality of ATTENTIONASSIST is
restrictedand warningsmay be delayedornot
occuratall:
R
if the roadcondition is poor, e.g.ifthe sur-
faceisuneven or if thereare potholes
R
if thereisastrong side wind
R
if youhaveadopted asporty driving style
with high cornering speedsorhighrates of
acceleration
R
if youare predominantly driving slower than
50 mph (80 km/h)orfaster than112 mph
(180 km/h)
R
if youare currentlyusing COMAND or mak-
ing atelephone callwithit
R
if the time hasbeenset incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as when
youchange lanes or change your speed
ATTENTIONASSIST is onlyanaid to the driver.
It might not always recognize fatigueor
increasing inattentiveness in time or failto
recognize them at all. The system is not asub-
stitute for awell-rested and attentive driver.
Warning and display messages in the
multifunction display
X
Activate ATTENTIONASSIST using the on-
boardcomputer(Ypage 176).
If ATTENTIONASSIST is active, youwillbe
warned no sooner than20minutes after
your journey hasbegun. Youthen hearan
intermittent warning tone twice and the
ATTENTION ASSIST:TakeaBreak!ATTENTION ASSIST:TakeaBreak! mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
If necessary,take abreak.
X
Press the a or % button to confirm
the message.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allowyourselftorestproperly.Ifyou
do not take abreak and ATTENTIONASSIST
still detects increasing lapsesinconcentra-
tion, youwillbewarned againafter15minutes
at the earliest.
ATTENTIONASSIST is reset when youcontinue
your journey and starts assessing your tired-
ness againif:
R
youswitch off the engine
R
youtake off your seatbeltand open the
driver's door, e.g.for achange of driversor
to take abreak
WhenATTENTIONASSIST is deactivated,the
é symbolappears in the multifunctiondis-
play in the assistance graphics display.
Vehicles with COMAND: if awarning is out-
putinthe multifunctiondisplay,aservice sta-
tionsearch is performed in the multimedia
system.You can select aservice stationand
navigation to thisservice stationwillthen
begin. Thisfunctioncan be activated and
deactivated in the multimedia system.
LaneTrackingpackage
General notes
The Lane Tracking packageconsists of Blind
SpotAssist (Y page 164)and Lane Keeping
Assist (Y page 166).
Blind SpotAssist
General notes
Blind SpotAssist monitors the areasoneither
side of the vehiclethatare not visible to the
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radarsen-
sors. Awarning display in the exteriormirrors
draws your attentiontovehicles detectedin
the monitoredarea. If youthen switch on the
corresponding turn signaltochange lane, you
will also receive an opticaland audiblewarn-
ing.
Blind SpotAssist supports youfrom aspeed of
approximately20mph (30 km/h).
For Blind SpotAssist to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
164
Driving systems
Driving andparking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
BlindSpotAssist does notreactto:
R
vehiclesovertakentoo closely on theside,
placing them in theblindspot area
R
vehicleswhichapproachwithalarge
speeddifferential and overtake your vehi-
cle
As aresult, BlindSpotAssist may notgive
warningsinsuchsituations. Thereisarisk
of an accident.
Always observethe traffic conditionscare-
fully, and maintainasafe lateral distance.
BlindSpotAssist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect somevehiclesand is no substitute for
attentivedriving.Always ensure that there is
sufficient distancetothe side for other road
usersand obstacles.
i
USAonly:
This device has been approvedbythe FCC
as a"VehicularRadar System". The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removing, tampering
with, or alteringthe device will void any war-
ranties, and is notpermittedbythe FCC. Do
nottamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approvedway.
Anyunauthorizedmodification to this device
could void theuser’s authoritytooperate
theequipment.
Radarsensors
The radar sensorsfor BlindSpotAssist are
integratedintothe rear bumper. Makesure
that thebumpers are free from dirt,ice or
slush.The sensorsmust notbecovered, for
example by cycle racks or overhangingloads.
Followingasevere impactorinthe event of
damagetothe bumpers,have thefunction of
theradar sensorschecked at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop. BlindSpotAssist may no lon-
ger work properly.
Monitoring range of thesensors
In particular, thedetection of obstaclescan be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on thesensorsoranythingelse
covering thesensors
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy
rain,snoworspray
R
there are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles
or bicycles
R
theroad has verywide lanes
R
theroad has narrow lanes
R
you are notdriving in themiddle of thelane
R
there are barriers or other road boundaries
Vehiclesinthe monitoringrange are then not
indicated.
BlindSpotAssist monitors thearea up to 10 ft
(3.0m)behind your vehicle and directly next
to your vehicle,asshown in thediagram. For
this purpose, BlindSpotAssist uses radar sen-
sorsinthe rear bumper.
If thelanesare narrow, vehiclesdriving in the
lane beyondthe lane next to your vehicle may
be indicated, especially if thevehiclesare not
driving in themiddle of their lane.This may be
thecaseifthere are vehiclesdriving at the
inner edge of their lanes.
Due to thenature of thesystem:
R
warningsmay be issuedinerror when driv-
ing close to crash barriers or similar solid
lane borders.
R
warningsmay be interrupted when driving
alongsidelongvehicles, e.g. trucks, for a
prolonged time.
Driving systems
165
Driving and parking
Z
Indicator and warning display
:
Yellowindicator lamp/red warning lamp
BlindSpotAssist is notactive at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehiclesin
themonitoringrange are then notindicated.
When BlindSpotAssist is activated, indicator
lamp : in theexterior mirrorslightsupyellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator
lamp goesout and Blind Spot Assist is opera-
tional.
If avehicleisdetected within the blind spot
monitoring rangeatspeeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corre-
sponding sidelights up red.Thiswarning is
always emitted when avehicleentersthe blind
spotmonitoring rangefrom behind or from the
side. Whenyou overtake avehicle, the warning
only occurs if the difference in speed is less
than 7mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goesout if reverse
gearisengaged.Inthis event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamps
is adjustedautomaticallyaccording to the
ambient light.
Collisionwarning
If avehicleisdetected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and youswitch on the cor-
responding turn signal,adoublewarning tone
sounds. Redwarning lamp : flashes. If the
turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are
indicated by the flashing of red warning
lamp :.There are no further warning tones.
SwitchingonBlind SpotAssist
X
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
(Y page 176)isactivatedinthe on-board
computer.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
Warning lamps : in the exteriormirrors
light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds
and then turn yellow.
LaneKeeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areainfront
of your vehiclewithcamera :,which is
mounted at the top of the windshield.Lane
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
roadand warns youbefore youleave your lane
unintentionally.
If youselect kmkm on the on-board computerin
the DisplayUnitSpeed-/OdometerDisplayUnitSpeed-/Odometer func-
tion (Y page 177), Lane Keeping Assist is
active starting at aspeed of 60 km/h.Ifthe
milesmiles display unitisselected,the assistance
rangebegins at 40 mph.
Awarning may be given if afront wheel passes
overalanemarking. It will warn youbymeans
of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel
for up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist cannotalwaysclearly
detect lane markings.
In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give awarning
There is ariskofanaccident.
166
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Alwayspay particularattentiontothe traffic
situationand keepwithinthe lane, espe-
ciallyifLaneKeeping Assist alerts you.
G
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicletothe original lane. There
is ariskofanaccident.
Youshouldalwayssteer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particularifwarned by Lane
Keeping Assist.
If youfailtoadapt your driving style,Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the riskof
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Lane Keeping Assist cannottake into account
the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane
Keeping Assist is merelyanaid.You are
responsiblefor the distance to the vehiclein
front, for vehiclespeed,for braking in good
time and for staying in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keepthe
vehicleinthe lane.
The system maybeimpaired or maynot func-
tionif:
R
thereispoorvisibility,e.g.due to insuffi-
cient illuminationofthe road, or dueto
snow,rain, fog or spray
R
thereisglare,e.g.from oncoming traffic,
the sunorreflections (e.g. when the road
surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty,fogged up,damaged
or covered,for instance by asticker, in the
vicinity of the camera
R
thereare no, severalorunclearlanemark-
ingsfor alane, e.g.inareas with roadcon-
structionwork
R
the lane markingsare worn away,darkor
covered up,e.g.bydirtorsnow
R
the distance to the vehicleinfront is too
small and the lane markingsthuscannotbe
detected
R
the lane markingschange quickly, e.g.lanes
branch off, crossone another or merge
R
the roadisnarrow and winding
R
thereare strong shadows castonthe road
SwitchingonLaneKeeping Assist
X
Switch on Lane Keeping Assist using the on-
boardcomputer; to do so, select StandardStandard
or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 176).
If youdrive at speedsabove 40 mph
(60 km/h)and lane markingsare detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(Y page 176)are shown in green. Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
R
youswitch on the turn signals.Inthisevent,
the warningsare suppressed for acertain
periodoftime
R
adriving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
Adaptive
When Adaptive
Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tionoccurs if:
R
youswitch on the turn signals.Inthisevent,
the warningsare suppressed for acertain
periodoftime
R
adriving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
R
youaccelerate hard, e.g.kickdown
R
youbrake hard
R
yousteeractively, e.g.swervetoavoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly
R
youcut the corneronasharp bend
In order thatyou arewarned onlywhenneces-
sary and in goodtime if youcrossthe lane
marking,the system recognizes certain condi-
tions and warns youaccordingly.
The warning vibrationoccurs earlier if:
R
youapproach the outer lane marking on a
bend
R
the roadhas verywidelanes, e.g.afreeway
R
the system recognizes solid lane markings
The warning vibrationoccurs later if:
R
the roadhas narrow lanes
R
youcut the corneronabend
Driving systems
167
Driving andparking
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe
vehiclewhen driving,you may be distracted
from thetraffic situation.You could also
lose control of thevehicle. Thereisariskof
an accident.
Only operate this equipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsurethat
this is possible,park thevehiclepaying
attention to traffic conditionsand operate
theequipmentwhen thevehicleisstation-
ary.
You must observethe legal requirements for
thecountry in whichyou are currentlydriving
when operating theon-board computer.
G
WARNING
If theinstrumentclusterhas failedormal-
functioned, you may notrecognize function
restrictionsinsystems relevanttosafety.
The operating safetyofyour vehiclemay be
impaired.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Drive on carefully. Havethe vehiclechecked
at aqualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messages
or warningsfromcertainsystems in themulti-
function display. You should thereforemake
sureyour vehicleisoperating safely at all
times.
If theoperating safetyofyour vehicleis
impaired,pull overassoonasitissafetodo
so. Contactaqualified specialist workshop.
Foranoverview, see theinstrumentpanel
illustration (Y page 32).
Displaysand operation
Instrumentcluster lighting
The lighting in theinstrumentcluster, in the
displays and thecontrols in thevehicleinterior
can be adjusted usingthe brightness control
knob.
The brightness control knob is locatedonthe
bottomleftofthe instrumentcluster
(Y page 32).
X
Turn thebrightness control knob clockwise
or counter-clockwise.
If you turnthe lightswitch (Y page 97)to
the Ã, T or L position,the bright-
ness will depend upon thebrightness of the
ambientlight.
The lightsensor in theinstrumentcluster
automatically controlsthe brightness of the
multifunction display. In daylight, thedis-
plays in theinstrumentclusterare notillu-
minated.
Speedometer with segments
The segments in thespeedometer indicate
whichspeedrange is available.
R
Cruisecontrolactivated (Y page 142):
The segments lightupfromthe stored
speedtothe maximum speed.
R
Active DistanceAssist DISTRONICactivated
(Y page 144):
Oneortwo segments in theset speedrange
lightup.
R
Active DistanceAssist DISTRONICdetects a
vehicleinfront moving moreslowly than the
storedspeed:
The segments between thespeedofthe
vehicleinfront and thestoredspeedlight
up.
Tachometer
!
Do notdriveinthe overrevving range, as
this could damagethe engine.
The red bandinthe tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supplyisinterrupted to protect the
enginewhen thered bandisreached.
Outsidetemperaturedisplay
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditionswhen temperatures are aroundfreezing
point.
168
Displaysand operation
On-boardcomputer and displays
Bearinmind that the outsidetemperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
doesnot recordthe roadtemperature.
The outsidetemperature display is in the mul-
tifunction display (Y page 170).
Achangeinthe outsidetemperature is shown
in the multifunction display afteradelay.
Coolant temperature gage
G
WARNING
Opening the hoodwhenthe engine is over-
heated or whenthere is afire in the engine
compartment could expose youtohot gases
or other service products. There is arisk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool downbefore
opening the hood. If there is afire in the
engine compartment, keep the hoodclosed
and contact the fire department.
!
Adisplay messageisshownifthe coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248
(120 †), do not continuedriving. The
engine will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-
ment cluster on the right-hand side
(Y page 32).
The H marking in the coolant temperature
gaugecorresponds to acoolant temperature
of approximately 248 ‡(120 †).
Undernormaloperating conditions and at the
correct coolant level, the coolant temperature
gaugemay rise to the H marking.
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
:
Multifunctiondisplay
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKeytoposition 1 in the ignition
lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settingsinthe on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Left control panel
=
;
R
Callsupthe menu and menu bar
9
:
Pressbriefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects asubmenu or function
R
In the AudioAudio menu:selects the
previous or next station, when
the preset list or station list is
active, or an audiotrack or video
scene
R
In the TelTel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone bookand
selects aname or telephone
number
Displaysand operation
169
On-board computer and displays
Z
9
:
Press and hold:
R
In the Audio
Audio menu: selects apre-
set list or astation list in the
desired frequency range, selects
an audio track or video scene
using rapid scrolling
R
In the TelTel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a
R
Confirms the selection or display
message
R
In the TelTel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
Switches off voice-operated con-
trol for navigation or the Voice
Control System
R
Hides display messages or calls
up the last TripTrip menu function
used
R
Exitsthe telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Callsupthe standard display in
the TripTrip menu
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends acall
R
Exitsthe telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts acall
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
?
R
Switches on voice-operated con-
trol for navigation or the Voice
Control System
You can find further information on voice-oper-
ated control for navigation in the manufactur-
er's operating instructions in vehicles with an
Audio 20 multimedia system.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information on the
Voice Control System in the separate operat-
ing instructions.
Multifunction display
:
Drive program (Y page 125)
;
Transmission position (Y page 125)
=
Text field
?
Menu bar
A
Time
B
Outside temperature or speed
(Y page 177)
Set the time using the multimedia system; see
the Digital Operator's Manual.
X
To display menu bar ?: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after afew sec-
onds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or
submenu and display messages.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis-
play:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (Y page 131)
R
j Parking Guidance (Y page 157)
R
CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 142)
170
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
R
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 100)
R
è ECO start/stopfunction(Ypage 121)
R
ë HOLD function(Ypage 152)
Menus and submenus
Menuoverview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer
(Y page 169).
Depending on the vehicleequipment,you can
select the following menu:
R
Trip
Trip menu (Y page 171)
R
NaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)
(Y page 172)
R
AudioAudio menu (Y page 174)
R
TelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 174)
R
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)
(Y page 175)
R
Serv.Serv. menu (Y page 177)
R
Sett.Sett. menu (settings) (Y page 177)
R
AMGAMG menu (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
(Y page 180)
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and holdthe % button on the
steering wheeluntilthe TripTrip menu with trip
odometer : and odometer ; appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Averagespeed
?
Averagefuelconsumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
FromStartFromStart or FromResetFromReset.
The values in the FromStartFromStart submenu are
calculatedfrom the start of ajourney whilst
the values in the FromResetFromReset submenu are
calculatedfrom the last time the submenu was
reset (Y page 172).
In the following cases, the trip computeris
automaticallyreset FromStartFromStart:
R
the ignition hasbeenswitched off for more
thanfourhours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded,the trip computerisautomatically
reset FromResetFromReset.
ECOdisplay
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
ECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
thanfourhours, the ECO display will be auto-
maticallyreset.
For more informationonthe ECO display,see
(Y page 138).
Menus and submenus
171
On-board computer and displays
Z
Displaying therange andcurrent fuel
consumption
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ingwheeltoselectthe TripTrip menu.
X
Press 9 or : to selectthe display
withapproximaterange : and currentfuel
consumption ;.
Approximaterange : that can be covered
is calculated accordingtoyour currentdriv-
ingstyle and theamount of fuelinthe tank.
If there is only asmall amount of fuelleftin
thefueltank, avehicle beingrefueled C
appears instead of approximaterange :.
Recuperation display = shows you if
energyhas beenrecuperated from the
kineticenergyinoverrun mode and saved in
thebattery. Recuperation display =
dependsonthe engineinstalled and is
therefore notavailable in all vehicles.
Digital speedometer
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ingwheeltoselectthe TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselectthe
digitalspeedometer.
Agearshift recommendation Z may also
appear in thedisplay.
Observethe information on gearshift recom-
mendation when shiftingmanually
(Y page 131).
Mercedes-AMG SLC43: agearshift recom-
mendation is shown in thestatusbar of the
multifunction display and notinthe digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ingwheeltoselectthe TripTrip menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselectthe
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : to select Yes
Yes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset thevalues of thefollowingfunc-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start"tripcomputer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECOdisplay
If you reset thevalues in theECO display, the
values in the"From Start"tripcomputerare
also reset.Ifyou reset thevalues in the"From
Start"tripcomputer, thevalues in theECO dis-
play are also reset.
Navigation systemmenu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the NaviNavi menu, themultifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
Observethe additional information on naviga-
tion in theDigital Operator's Manual of the
multimedia system.
X
Switchonthe multimedia system (seethe
Digital Operator's Manual)
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ingwheeltoselectthe NaviNavi menu.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Currentroad
172
Menus andsubmenus
On-board computerand displays
Route guidanceactive
No changeofdirection announced
:
Distance to destination
;
Distance to the next change of direction
=
Current road
?
"Follow the road's course"symbol
Changeofdirection announcedwithout
alanerecommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
Whenachange of direction is announced, you
will see change-of-direction symbol = and
distance graphic ;.The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announcedchange
of direction.
Changeofdirection announcedwitha
lanerecommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Lanesnot recommended
?
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A
Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, new lane recommenda-
tions can be displayed for the next change of
direction if the digital map supports this data.
During the change of direction, new lanes may
be added.
Lane not recommended =:you will not be
able to complete the next change of direction
if youstay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?:inthis lane youwillbe
able to complete the next two changes of
direction withoutchanging lane.
Otherstatus indicators of the naviga-
tionsystem
The navigation system displaysadditional
information and the vehiclestatus.
Possible displays:
R
New Route...
New Route... or Calculating Route...Calculating Route...
Anew route is calculated.
R
Road Not MappedRoad Not Mapped
The vehicleposition is inside the areaofthe
digital map butthe roadisnot recognized,
e.g. newly builtstreets, car parks or private
land.
R
No RouteNo Route
No route could be calculatedtothe selected
destination.
R
O
Youhavereached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
Menus and submenus
173
On-board computer and displays
Z
Audio menu
Selecting aradio station
:
Active station list
;
Station frequency withmemory position
The multifunction display shows station ;
withstation frequency or station name. The
preset position is only displayed alongwith
station ; if this has been stored.
X
Switchonthe multimedia system and select
radio(see theDigital Operator'sManual).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Audio
Audio menu.
X
To select apreset list or station list:
press and brieflyhold the 9 or : but-
tonuntil thepreset list or station list in the
desired frequency range is shown.
X
To select astation: brieflypress 9
or :.
SIRIUS XM
®
satelliteradioactslikeanormal
radio.
Formoreinformation on radiooperation,see
"Satelliteradio" in theDigital Operator'sMan-
ual.
Operating an audio player or media
You can play audio filesfromvarious audio
playersordatamedia, depending on the
equipmentinstalled in thevehicle.
X
Switchonthe multimedia system and select
CD or MP3 mode(see theDigital Operator's
Manual).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ing wheeltoselect the AudioAudio menu.
X
To select thenext/previoustrack: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X
To select atrack from thetrack list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : buttonuntil desired track :
appears.
If you press and hold the 9 or : but-
ton, therapidscrollingspeedisincreased.
Not all audio playersormedia support this
function.
If track information is saved on theaudio
player or media, themultifunction display
will showthe number and titleofthe track.
Video DVD operation
X
Switchonthe multimedia system and select
video DVD(see theDigital Operator'sMan-
ual).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Audio
Audio menu.
X
To select thenext or previousscene:
brieflypress the 9 or : button.
X
To select ascene from thescene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : buttonuntil desired scene :
appears.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe
vehiclewhen driving, you may be distracted
from thetraffic situation.You could also
lose control of thevehicle. There is ariskof
an accident.
Only operate this equipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsurethat
this is possible, park thevehiclepaying
174
Menusand submenus
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
attention to traffic conditionsand operate
theequipment when thevehicle is station-
ary.
When telephoning, you must observethe legal
requirementsfor thecountryinwhichyou are
currently driving.
X
Switch on themobile phone(see themanu-
facturer’s operatinginstructions).
X
Switch on themultimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual)
X
Establish aBluetooth
®
connectiontothe
multimedia system (Y page 222).
X
Pressthe = or ; button on thesteer-
ing wheel to selectthe TelTel menu.
You will see oneofthe followingdisplay mes-
sages in themultifunction display:
R
Phone READYPhone READY or thenameofthe network
provider:the mobile phonehas foundanet-
work and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No ServicePhone No Service:there is no network
availableorthe mobile phoneissearching
for anetwork.
Accepting acall
If someonecalls you when you are in the TelTel
menu, adisplay message appearsinthe multi-
function display.
You can accept acall at any timeregardless of
themenuselected.
X
Pressthe 6 button on thesteering wheel
to accept an incomingcall.
Rejectingorending acall
X
Pressthe ~ button on thesteering wheel
to reject or end acall.
Selecting an entry in thephone book
X
Pressthe = or ; button on thesteer-
ing wheel to selectthe TelTel menu.
X
Pressthe 9, : or a button to
switch to thephonebook.
X
Authorize access to thephonebook on the
phone.
X
Press : or 9 to selectthe names one
after theother.
or
X
To startrapid scrolling: pressand hold
the : or 9 button for longer than one
second.
The names in thephonebook are displayed
quickly oneafter theother.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reachthe end of thelist.
X
If only one telephone number is stored
for aname: pressthe 6 or a button
to start dialing.
or
X
If there is morethanone number for a
particularname: pressthe 6 or a
button to display thenumbers.
X
Pressthe 9 or : button to selectthe
number you want to dial.
X
Pressthe 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
To exit thetelephone book: pressthe
~ or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computersavesthe last names
or numbers dialed in theredial memory.
X
Pressthe = or ; button on thesteer-
ing wheel to selectthe TelTel menu.
X
Pressthe 6 button to switch to the
redial memory.
X
Pressthe 9 or : button to selectthe
desired nameornumber.
X
Pressthe 6 or a button to start dial-
ing.
or
X
To exit theredial memory: pressthe ~
or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
Dependingonyour vehicle's equipment,inthe
DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing
options:
Menusand submenus
175
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
R
Displaying the assistance graphic
(Y page 176)
R
Activating/deactivating ActiveBrake Assist
(Y page 176)
R
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(Y page 176)
R
Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssist
(Y page 176)
R
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 176)
Displaying the assistancegraphic
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Assist.GraphicAssist.Graphic.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The multifunctiondisplay shows the Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONICdistance displayin
the assistance graphic display.
The assistance graphic shows youthe status
of and/or informationfromotherdriving
systemsordrivingsafety systems:
R
Distance Assist DISTRONIC(Ypage 144)
R
ActiveBrake Assist (Y page 58)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 163)
R
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 166)
Activating/deactivating ActiveBrake
Assist
Youcan usethisfunctiontoactivate or deacti-
vate ActiveBrake Assist.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
DriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Brake AssistBrake Assist.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When ActiveBrake Assist is deactivated,the
æ symbolappears in the multifunction
displayinthe assistance graphic display.
FurtherinformationonActiveBrake Assist
(Y page 58).
SettingATTENTIONASSIST
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention AssistAttention Assist.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,the
é symbolappears in the multifunction
displayinthe assistance graphics display.
For furtherinformationabout ATTENTION
ASSIST,see (Y page 163).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind SpotAssistBlind SpotAssist.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a
button again.
FurtherinformationonBlind SpotAssist
(Y page 164).
Activating/deactivating LaneKeeping
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
LaneKeepingAssistLaneKeepingAssist.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a again.
176
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press : or 9 to set OffOff, StandardStandard or
Adaptive
Adaptive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the
multifunction display shows the lane mark-
ings as bright lines in the assistance
graphic.
Further information on Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 166).
Service menu
Dependingonthe equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv.Serv. menu:
R
Calling up display messages (Y page 183)
R
Restartingthe tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 275)
R
Checking the tire pressure electronically
(Y page 275)
R
Calling up the service due date
(Y page 246)
Settings menu
Introduction
Dependingonthe equipment installed in the
vehicle, in the Sett.Sett. menu you have the fol-
lowing options:
R
Changing the instrument cluster settings
(Y page 177)
R
Changing the light settings (Y page 177)
R
Changing the vehicle settings (Y page 179)
R
Changing the conveniencesettings
(Y page 179)
R
Restoring the factorysettings (Y page 180)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
plays appear in kilometersormiles in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion.
The currentsetting kmkm or milesmiles appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
R
the digital speedometer in the TripTrip menu
R
the odometer and trip odometer
R
the trip computer
R
the currentconsumption and the range
R
navigation instructionsinthe NaviNavi menu
R
cruise control
R
DISTRONIC
R
ASSYST PLUS
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display:Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
alwaysshows the outside temperature or the
speed.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
ter.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display:Permanent Display: function.
The currentsetting, Outside TemperatureOutside Temperature
or Speedometer[km/h]Speedometer[km/h] or SpeedometerSpeedometer
[mph][mph],appears.
X
To change the setting: press a again.
Lights
Setting the daytime running lamps
This function is not availableinCanada.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light
Light submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Daytime Running Lights
Daytime Running Lights function.
If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function
has been switched on, the cone of light and
Menus and submenus
177
On-board computer and displays
Z
the W symbolinthe multifunctiondisplay
areshown in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Furtherinformation on daytime running lamps
(Y page 97).
Settingthe brightnessofthe ambient
lighting
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb.Light +/-Amb.Light +/- function.
The current setting appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to adjustthe
brightnesstoany level from OffOff to Level 5Level 5
(bright).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Settingthe ambientlighting color
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb.Light Col.Amb.Light Col. function.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to setthe
color to SOLAR
SOLAR, SOLAR OrangeSOLAR Orange or SOLARSOLAR
RedRed.
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Activating/deactivating surround light-
ingand exterior lighting delayedswitch-
off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
Lights submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : or 9 to select the Sur‐Sur‐
round Lightinground Lighting function.
If the Surround LightingSurround Lighting functionisacti-
vated,the multifunctiondisplay shows the
light cone and the area around the vehiclein
orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating exteriorlighting delayedswitch-
off temporarily:
X
Before leaving the vehicle, turnthe Smart-
Key to position u in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition 2 in the igni-
tionlock.
Exterior lighting delayedswitch-off is deacti-
vated.
Exterior lighting delayedswitch-off is reactiva-
ted the next timeyou start the engine.
If youhaveactivated the Surround Lighting
Surround Lighting
functionand youturnthe light switch to Ã,
the following functions areactivated when it is
dark:
R
surround lighting: the exteriorlighting
remains litfor 40 secondsafter unlocking
with the SmartKey. If youstart the engine,
the surround lighting is switched off and
automatic headlamp modeisactivated
(Y page 97).
R
exterior lighting delayedswitch-off: the
exteriorlighting remains litfor 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off.Ifyou close
allthe doors and the trunk lid, the exterior
lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, when
the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off
exteriorlighting areon, the following light up:
R
parkinglamps
R
low-beamheadlamps
R
daytime running lamps
R
side marker lamps
R
surround lighting in the exteriormirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayedswitch-off
If youactivate the Interior Lighting
Interior Lighting
DelayDelay function, the interiorlighting remains
on for 20 secondsafter youremove the Smart-
Key fromthe ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Sett.
Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
LightLight submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
178
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Interior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.
When the Interior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay func-
tion is activated, the vehicle interior is dis-
played in orange in the multifunction dis-
play.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
If you activatethe Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
aspeed of approximately 9mph (15 km/h).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
VehicleVehicle submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function.
When the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function
is activated, the multifunction display shows
the left-hand vehicle door in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on the automatic lock-
ing feature, see (Y page 73).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock
Acoustic Lock function,
an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the
vehicle.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
VehicleVehicle submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic LockAcoustic Lock function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction display
lights up orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
X
Multimedia system: u Þ uSet-
tings uVehicle u Acoustic Lock
i
Please note: the setting selected for the
acoustic lockingverification signal must
comply with the relevant national road traf-
fic rules. In some countries, including Ger-
many, using the audible lockingconfirma-
tion is forbidden by traffic laws (in accord-
ance with §16 Para. 1and §30 Para. 1of
the German national road traffic regula-
tions). The driver of the vehicle is responsi-
ble for ensuring compliance with these
rules. In countries in which the use of this
function is prohibited, the function will be
disabled in your vehicle and you will not be
permitted to enable it.
Comfort
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXITfeature
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steeringwheel and the driver's seat, you
and other vehicle occupants–particularly
children –could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the seat and
the steeringwheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons, or
R
press one of the memory function mem-
ory buttons, or
R
move the switch for steeringwheel
adjustmentinthe opposite direction to
that in which the steeringwheel is moving
The adjustmentprocess is stopped.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function is activa-
ted, the multifunction display shows the
steeringwheel in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Menus and submenus
179
On-board computer and displays
Z
Furtherinformation on the easy entry and exit
feature (Y page 91).
Switchingthe seat belt adjustment
on/off
X
Pressthe = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Pressthe : or 9 button to select the
ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Pressthe : or 9 button to select the
Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.
Whenthe Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function is
activated, the seatbeltisdisplayedin
orange in the multifunction display.
X
Pressthe a button to savethe setting.
For further information on beltadjustment,
see (Y page 42).
Switchingthe fold-in mirrors whenlock-
ing feature on/off
Thisfunction is only available whenthe vehicle
is equipped with the electricalfold-in function.
Thisfunction is only available in Canada.
Whenyou activate the Auto.Mirror Fold‐Auto.Mirror Fold‐
inging function, the exterior mirrors are folded in
whenthe vehicle is locked.
If youhaveswitched on the Auto.Mirror
Auto.Mirror
FoldingFolding function and youfoldinthe exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(Y page 93), they will not foldout automati-
cally.The exterior mirrors can then only be fol-
ded outusing the button on the door.
X
Pressthe = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Pressthe : or 9 button to select the
ConvenienceConvenience submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Pressthe : or 9 button to select the
Auto.Mirror FoldingAuto.Mirror Folding function.
If the Auto.Mirror FoldingAuto.Mirror Folding function is
switched on, the multifunction display
showsthe exterior mirrorinorange.
X
Pressthe a button to savethe setting.
Restoring the factory settings
X
Pressthe = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.
X
Pressthe : or 9 button to select the
Factory SettingFactory Setting submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The ResetAll Settings?
ResetAll Settings? function
appears.
X
Pressthe : or 9 button to select NoNo
or YesYes.
X
Pressthe a button to confirmthe selec-
tion.
If youhaveselected YesYes and confirmed,the
multifunction displayshowsaconfirmation
message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime Running
LightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu is
only resetifthe vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG SLC 43)
Warm-up
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Coolant temperature
B
Transmissionoil temperature
X
Pressthe = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UPUP =
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving rangewheninthe manual drive
program.
Engineand transmission oiltempera-
ture: whenthe engine and transmission are
at normaloperating temperature, oil tem-
perature ? and B are displayedinwhite in
the multifunction display.
If the multifunction displayshowsoil tem-
perature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yetatnormaloperating
temperature. Avoid driving at fullengine out-
putduring this time.
180
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
SETUP
:
Enginemode EcoEco/ComfortComfort/SportSport/
Sport +Sport +/ManualManual
;
Steering Comfort
Comfort/SportSport
=
ESP
®
OnOn/OffOff or SPORT handling mode
SportSport
SETUP displaysthe following information,
functions and settings:
R
the digital speedometer
R
the gear indicator
R
the engine mode
R
the steering setting
R
the settingofthe ECO start/stop function
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
mode
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.
RACE TIMER
Displaying and starting RACE TIMER
The RACE TIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
:
Lap
;
RACE TIMER
You can start the RACE TIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-
tion 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACE TIMER appears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACE TIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. TimeInterm. Time.
X
Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time appears for five sec-
onds.
Starting anew lap
:
RACE TIMER
;
Fastest lap time (best lap)
=
Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap
New Lap.
It is possible to store amaximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish LapFinish Lap.
Stopping the RACE TIMER
Menus and submenus
181
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
X
Confirm YesYes with a.
The RACE TIMER interrupts timing if you stop
the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position
1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the Smart-
Key to position 3 and then press a to con-
firm StartStart,timing is continued.
Resetting the current lap
X
Stop the RACE TIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset LapReset Lap.
X
Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACE TIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds.All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the currentlap does not
have to be reset.
X
Reset the currentlap.
X
Press a to confirm ResetReset.
Reset Race-Timer?Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the : button to select YesYes and
press the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
:
RACETIMERoverall evaluation
;
Total time driven
=
Average speed
?
Distance covered
A
Maximum speed
If you save at least one lap and then stop
RACETIMER, an overall evaluation is available.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
AMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
A
Top speed during lap
This function is only availableifyou have
stored at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the AMG
AMG menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
lap evaluation is shown.
Each lap is shown in aseparate submenu.
The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-
bol :.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select a
different lap evaluation.
182
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in themultifunction display.
Display messages withgraphicdisplays may be shown in simplified form in theOperator's Man-
ual and may therefore differfromthe multifunction display.
Please respondinaccordance withthe display messages and follow theadditional notesinthis
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warningtoneoracontinuous tone.
Whenyou stop and parkthe vehicle, please observethe noteson:
R
HOLD function (Y page 152)
R
Parking (Y page 134)
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % buttononthe steeringwheel.
The multifunction display hidesthe display message.
High-prioritydisplay messages are shown in red in themultifunction display. Some high-priority
display messages cannotbehidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until thecauses forthe messages
havebeenremedied.
Message memory
The on-boardcomputersaves certain display messages in the message memory.You can call
up thedisplay messages:
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steeringwheeltoselectthe Serv.Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, themultifunction display shows 2Messages2Messages,for example.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselectthe entry, e.g. 2Messages2Messages.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoscrollthrough thedisplay messages.
Whenthe ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apartfromsomehigh-priority
display messages. Once thecauses of thehigh-prioritydisplay messages havebeenrectified, the
correspondingdisplay messages are also deleted.
Display messages
183
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily not available.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete
R
The on-board voltage may be insufficient
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitabledistance, making slight steering move-
ments at aspeed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the displaymessage disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction displaystill shows the displaymessage:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canadaonly), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
184
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
÷
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
ESP
®
is temporarily unavailable.
Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition,the ÷ and å warning lampslightupinthe instru-
mentcluster.
The self-diagnosis function might notbecomplete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the
functionslisted above.
The braking distanceinanemergencybraking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is notoperational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilizethe vehicle.
There is an increased riskofskiddingand an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at aspeed above12mph (20 km/h).
If the display messagedisappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.
÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator's ManualOperator's Manual
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lampslightupinthe instru-
ment cluster.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally,but withoutthe
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unabletostabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
185
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
T !
÷
Inoperative SeeInoperative See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
EBD(electronic brakeforce distribution), ABSand ESP
®
are mal-
functioning.
Other drivingsystems and drivingsafetysystems may also malfunc-
tion.
In addition,the ÷, å and ! warning lampslightupinthe
instrumentclusterand awarning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the
functionslisted above. The frontand rear wheels could therefore
lockifyou performafull brakeapplication,for example.
The steerabilityand braking characteristics may be severely affec-
ted. The braking distanceinanemergencybraking situation can
increase.
If ESP
®
is notoperational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilizethe vehicle.
There is an increased riskofskiddingand an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
TurnOnthe Igni‐
TurnOnthe Igni‐
tiontoReleasetiontoRelease
the ParkingBrakethe ParkingBrake
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attemptedtorelease theelectric parking brakewhile theigni-
tion was switched off.
X
SmartKey: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.
X
KEYLESS-GO: switch on theignition.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
Please ReleasePlease Release
ParkingBrakeParkingBrake
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and awarning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic
release of theelectric parking brakeisnot fulfilled (Y page 135).
You are drivingwiththe electric parking brakeapplied.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and awarning tone sounds.
You are usingthe electric parking brakefor emergencybraking
(Y page 135).
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
ParkingBrake SeeParkingBrake See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Press theelectric parking brakehandle for at least tenseconds.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
186
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and thered F (USAonly) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp lightup.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
or
X
Releasethe electric parking brakeautomatically (Y page 135).
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
flashes and theyellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
To apply:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply theelectric parking brakemanually.
If thered F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp
continues to flash:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 290).
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Turn thefront wheels towardsthe curb.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
187
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds
after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedorreleased. It then
goesout or remainslit.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply theelectric parking brake.
If it is notpossibletoapply theelectric parking brake:
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
If it is notpossibletorelease theelectric parking brake:
X
Releasethe electric parking brakeautomatically (Y page 135).
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release theelectric parking brake, thered F (USAonly) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.Itisnot possibleto
apply theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j,asthe electric parking
brakeisnot appliedautomatically.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
F (USA
only) ! (Canada
only)
ParkingBrake Inop‐ParkingBrake Inop‐
erativeerative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds
after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedorreleased. It then
goesout or remainslit.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning,e.g.because of over-
voltageorundervoltage.
X
Remove thecausefor theovervoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging thebattery or restarting theengine.
X
Apply or release theelectric parking brake.
If it remainsimpossible to apply or release theelectric parking
brake:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply or release theelectric parking brake.
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbeapplied:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
188
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and thered F (USA
only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is notpossibletoapply theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
$ (USAonly)
J (Canada only)
Check Brake FluidCheck Brake Fluid
LevelLevel
There is notenough brakefluidinthe brakefluid reservoir.
In addition,the $ (USAonly) or J (Canada only) warning
lamp lights up in theinstrumentclusterand awarning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The braking effectmay be impaired.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Do notadd brakefluid.This does notcorrect themalfunction.
#
Check Brake PadCheck Brake Pad
WearWear
The brakepads/linings havereached their wear limit.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Inopera‐PRE-SAFE Inopera‐
tiveSee Opera‐tiveSee Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
ImportantfunctionsofPRE-SAFE
®
havefailed. Allother occupant
safetysystems,e.g.air bags,remain available.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
Currently LimitedCurrently Limited
See Operator'sMan‐See Operator'sMan‐
ualual
Active Brake Assististemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
theradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations
or other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation
R
thesystem is outside theoperating temperature range
R
theon-boardvoltageistoo low
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Active Brake Assistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Restart theengine.
Display messages
189
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active BrakeActive Brake
Assist FunctionsAssist Functions
LimitedSee Opera‐LimitedSee Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
Active Brake Assistisunavailable due to amalfunction.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Radar SensorsRadar Sensors
Dirty See Opera‐Dirty See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possiblecauses are:
R
dirtonsensors
R
heavyrain or snow
R
when drivingoninter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least onedrivingsystem or drivingsafetysystem is malfunction-
ing or is temporarily unavailable:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONIC
Once thecauseofthe problem is no longer present, thedrivingand
drive safetysystems will be available again.The display message
disappears.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Switchoff theengine.
X
Clean all sensors(Ypage 251).
X
Restart theengine.
The display message disappears.
6
SRS MalfunctionSRS Malfunction
ServiceRequiredServiceRequired
The restraintsystem is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbe
triggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Further information about therestraintsystem (Y page 39).
190
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
6
Front LeftMalfunc‐Front LeftMalfunc‐
tionServicetionService
RequiredRequired or FrontFront
Right MalfunctionRight Malfunction
ServiceRequiredServiceRequired
The restraintsystem has malfunctioned at thefront on theleftor
right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentclus-
ter.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-
gered unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbe
triggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
LeftSideCurtainLeftSideCurtain
Air Bag Malfunc‐Air Bag Malfunc‐
tionServicetionService
RequiredRequired or RightRight
SideCurtainAirSideCurtainAir
Bag MalfunctionBag Malfunction
ServiceRequiredServiceRequired
There is amalfunction in theleft-handand/orright-hand head bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The leftorright head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or,
in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
191
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Front-passengerFront-passenger
Air Bag DisabledAir Bag Disabled
See Operator'sMan‐See Operator'sMan‐
ualual
The front-passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee air bag
are disabled during thejourney, although:
R
an adult
or
R
aperson of thecorrespondingstatureisonthe front-passenger
seat
If additional forcesare appliedtothe seat,the system may interpret
theoccupant's weightaslower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee air bag
may notbetriggered in theevent of an accident.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Havethe occupant on thefront-passenger seat get out of the
vehicle.
X
Keepthe seat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and
switch on theignition.
X
Observethe PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lampsinthe center
console and themultifunction display and checkthe following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
aself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
and PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lampsmustlightup
simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds.
R
thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp mustthenlight
up and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.Ifthe indicator lamp
is on,OCS has disabled thefront-passenger frontair bag and
front-passenger knee bag (Y page 46)
R
the Front-passenger Air Bag EnabledSee Operator'sFront-passenger Air Bag EnabledSee Operator's
ManualManual or Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manualator's Manual display messagesmustnot appear in themul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysys-
temcheckshavebeen completed.
X
Makesurethatthe display messagesdonot appear in themulti-
function display.
If these conditionsare fulfilled,the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFForONindi-
cator lamp remainslit or goesout dependsonhow OCS classifies
theoccupant.
If theconditionsare notfulfilled,the system is notoperating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observethe additional information on OCS (Y page 46).
192
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Front-passengerFront-passenger
Air Bag EnabledAir Bag Enabled
See Operator'sMan‐See Operator'sMan‐
ualual
The front-passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee air bag
are enabled during thejourney, although:
R
achild, asmall adult or an objectweighing less than thesystem's
weightthreshold is locatedonthe front-passenger seat
or
R
thefront-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detectobjects or forcesapplyingadditional weight
on theseat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger frontair bag and thefront-passenger knee bag
may be deployed unintentionally.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Openthe front-passenger door.
X
Remove thechild and thechild restraintsystem from thefront-
passenger seat.
X
Makesurethatthere are no objects on theseat addingtothe
weight.
The system might otherwise detectthe additional weightand
interpret theseat occupant's weightasgreaterthanitactually is.
X
Keepthe seat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and
switch on theignition.
X
Observethe PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lampsinthe center
console and themultifunction display and checkthe following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
aself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF
and PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lampsmustlightup
simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds.
R
thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp mustthenlight
up and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.Ifthe indicator lamp
is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the
front-passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee air bag
(Y page 46)
R
the Front-passenger Air Bag EnabledSee Operator'sFront-passenger Air Bag EnabledSee Operator's
ManualManual or Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐Front-passenger Air Bag Disabled See Oper‐
ator's Manualator's Manual display messagesmustnot appear in themul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysys-
temcheckshavebeen completed.
X
Makesurethatthe display messagesdonot appear in themulti-
function display.
If these conditionsare fulfilled,the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFForONindi-
Display messages
193
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
cator lamp remainslit or goesout dependsonhow OCS classifies
theoccupant.
If theconditionsare notfulfilled,the system is notoperating cor-
rectly.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observethe additional information on OCS (Y page 46).
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
b
Check LeftLowCheck LeftLow
BeamBeam (Example)
The correspondingbulb is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
or
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(Y page 101).
LEDlightsources: thedisplay message for thecorrespondinglamp
only appearswhen all theLEDsinthe lamp havefailed.
b
Active HeadlampsActive Headlamps
InoperativeInoperative
The active lightfunction is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction SeeMalfunction See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
The exteriorlighting is malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
AutoLampFunctionAutoLampFunction
InoperativeInoperative
The lightsensor is defective.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leavethe vehicle. Awarn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Turn thelightswitch to position Ã.
194
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
Adaptive HighbeamAssistisdeactivated and temporarily inopera-
tive.
Possiblecauses are:
R
The windshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty.
R
Visibilityisimpaireddue to heavyrain,snoworfog.
X
Clean thewindshield.
If thesystem detects that thecamera is fullyoperational again,the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is dis-
played.
Adaptive HighbeamAssistisoperational again.
Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Adaptive HighbeamAssistisfaulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
Check CoolantCheck Coolant
Level See Opera‐Level See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The coolantlevel is toolow.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficientcoolantinthe
enginecoolingsystem. You could otherwise damagethe engine.
X
Addcoolant, observing thewarning notesbefore doingso
(Ypage 243).
X
If you need to add coolantmoreoften than usual, havethe engine
coolantsystem checkedataqualified specialist workshop.
?
The fan motor is defective.
X
If thecoolanttemperature gage is belowthe H marking
(Y page 169), drive on to thenextqualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavyloads on theengineasyou do so, e.g. drivingin
mountainous terrain and stop-and-gotraffic.
Display messages
195
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
?
CoolantToo HotCoolantToo Hot
StopVehicleTurnStopVehicleTurn
Engine OffEngine Off
The coolantistoo hot.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do notdrive when your engineisoverheated. This can causesome
fluids whichmay haveleaked intothe enginecompartmenttocatch
fire.
Steam from theoverheatedenginecan also causeserious burns
whichcan occur justbyopening thehood.
There is ariskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine,
payingattention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Leavethe vehicleand keep asafedistancefromthe vehicleuntil
theenginehas cooled down.
X
Makesurethatthe air supply to theengineradiatorisnot
blocked, e.g. by snow, slushorice.
X
Do notstart theengineagain until thedisplay message goesout
and thecoolanttemperature gage is belowthe H marking
(Y page 169). Otherwise,the enginecould be damaged.
X
Pay attention to thecoolanttemperature gage,observing the
warning notes(Ypage 243).
X
If thetemperature increases again,visit aqualified specialist
workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditionsand at thecorrect coolantlevel,
thecoolanttemperature gage may risetothe H marking
(Y page 169).
#
See Operator'sMan‐See Operator'sMan‐
ualual
The battery is notbeingcharged.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Possiblecauses are:
R
adefective alternator
R
atornpoly-V-belt
R
amalfunction in theelectronics
!
Do notdrive any further. Otherwise theenginemay overheat.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine,
payingattention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
196
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
#
StopVehicleSeeStopVehicleSee
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
The battery is no longer beingcharged and thecondition of charge
is toolow.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine,
payingattention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Observethe instructionsinthe # See Operator'sManualSee Operator'sManual
display message.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil
At NextRefuelingAt NextRefueling
The engineoil level has dropped to theminimum level.
Awarning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficientengineoil. You
could otherwise damagethe engine.
X
Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at thelatest
(Y page 242).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 242).
X
Havethe enginechecked at aqualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engineoil moreoften than usual.
Information on approvedengineoils can be obtained from aquali-
fiedspecialist workshop or on theInternetathttp://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4
Check Engine OilCheck Engine Oil
Level (Add1quart)Level (Add1quart)
Mercedes-AMG SLC43:
The engineoil level is toolow.
!
Avoid longer journeys when there is insufficientengineoil. You
could otherwise damagethe engine.
X
Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at thelatest
(Y page 242).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 242).
X
Havethe enginechecked at aqualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engineoil moreoften than usual.
Information on approvedengineoils can be obtained from aquali-
fiedspecialist workshop or on theInternetathttp://
bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
4
Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Level
Low StopVehicleLow StopVehicle
TurnEngine OffTurnEngine Off
Mercedes-AMG SLC43:
The engineoil level is toolow.
There is ariskofenginedamage.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine,
payingattention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Checkthe engineoil level (Y page 242).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 242).
Display messages
197
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
8
FuelLevel LowFuelLevel Low
The fuel level has dropped intothe reserverange.
X
Refuelatthe nearestgas station.
C
There is only averysmall amount of fuel in thefuel tank.
X
Refuelatthe nearestgas station without fail.
8
Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is notclosed correctlyorthe fuel system is leak-
ing.
X
Checkthatthe fuel filler cap is correctlyclosed.
If thefuelfiller cap is not correctlyclosed:
X
Closethe fuel filler cap.
If thefuelfiller cap is correctlyclosed:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
À
Attention Assist:Attention Assist:
TakeaBreak!TakeaBreak!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detectedfatigue
or alack of concentration on thepart of thedriver.Awarning tone
also sounds.
X
If necessary, takeabreak.
During longjourneys, takeregular breaks in goodtimesoyou get
enough rest.
À
Attention AssistAttention Assist
InoperativeInoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ë
OffOff
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicleisskidding.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivatethe HOLD function later (Y page 152).
198
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
LaneKeepingLaneKeeping
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
LaneKeepingAssistisdeactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
thewindshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty
R
visibilityisimpaireddue to heavyrain,snoworfog
R
there havebeen no lanemarkingsfor an extended period
R
thelanemarkingsare wornaway, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt
or snow
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
LaneKeepingAssistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Clean thewindshield.
LaneKeepingLaneKeeping
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
LaneKeepingAssistisfaulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Blind SpotAssistBlind SpotAssist
Currently Unavaila‐Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator'sble See Operator's
ManualManual
Blind Spot Assististemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
function is impaireddue to heavyrain or snow
R
theradar sensor system is outside theoperating temperature
range
R
theradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations
or other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation
The yellow 9 indicator lampsalso lightupinthe exteriormirrors.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Clean thesensors(Ypage 251).
X
Restart theengine.
Blind SpotAssistBlind SpotAssist
InoperativeInoperative
Blind Spot Assistismalfunctioning.
The yellow 9 indicator lampsalso lightupinthe exteriormirrors.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
199
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ParkingGuidanceParkingGuidance
InoperativeInoperative
Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 157).
X
Restart theengine.
If themultifunction display still shows thedisplay message:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ParkingGuidanceParkingGuidance
CanceledCanceled
Parking Guidance is deactivated.
Possiblecauses are:
R
thevehicleisskidding
R
thesensorsare dirty
R
amalfunction has occurred
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
ReactivateParking Guidance later (Y page 157).
If themultifunction display does notshowthe parking spacesymbol
at speeds below19mph (30 km/h):
X
Clean thesensors(Ypage 251).
X
Restart theengine.
If themultifunction display still does notshowthe parking space
symbol at speeds below19mph (30 km/h):
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer
following the recommended path.
X
Park againand, whiledoing so, observe the display messages in
the multifunction display.
Parking GuidanceParking Guidance
FinishedFinished
The vehicle is parked. Awarning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist OffAssist Off
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated (Y page 144).
If it was deactivated automatically, awarning tone also sounds.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist Now Availa‐Assist Now Availa‐
bleble
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational againafter having
been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page 144).
200
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist CurrentlyAssist Currently
Unavailable SeeUnavailable See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONICistemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
theradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations
or other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation
R
thesystem is outside theoperating temperature range
R
theon-boardvoltageistoo low
Awarning tone also sounds.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONICisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Restart theengine.
Active DistanceActive Distance
Assist InoperativeAssist Inoperative
Active DistanceAssistDISTRONICisfaulty.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Act.DistanceAct.Distance
Assist SuspendedAssist Suspended
You havedepressed theacceleratorpedal.ActiveDistance Assist
DISTRONICisnolonger controllingthe speed of thevehicle.
X
Remove your footfromthe acceleratorpedal.
Distance Assist --Distance Assist --
-mph-mph
Acondition for activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has not
been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC (Y page 144).
Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off
Cruise control has been deactivated.
If awarning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (Y page 142).
Cruise Control --Cruise Control --
-mph-mph
Cruise control cannot be activated, since not all of the activation
conditions have been met.
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 142).
Cruise ControlCruise Control
InoperativeInoperative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
201
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequencesand MM Solutions
Check TirePres‐Check TirePres‐
sureSoonsureSoon
Canadaonly:
The tire pressure loss warning system hasdetectedasignificant
loss in pressure.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Possiblecauses:
R
youhavechangedthe positions of the wheels and tiresorinstal-
lednew wheels and tires
R
the tire pressure in one or moretireshas dropped
G
WARNING
Tire pressures thatare too lowposethe following hazards:
R
theymay burst, especially as the load and vehiclespeed increase
R
theymay wear excessivelyand/or unevenly, which maygreatly
impairtire traction.
R
the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steeringand braking,may
be greatlyimpaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop the vehiclewithoutmaking any sudden steeringorbraking
maneuvers. Payattentiontothe trafficconditions as youdoso.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away (Y page 134).
X
Check the tiresand,ifnecessary,followthe instructions for aflat
tire (Y page 253).
X
Check the tire pressures and,ifnecessary,correct the tire pres-
sure.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (Y page 275).
Check TirePres‐Check TirePres‐
sureThenRestartsureThenRestart
Run FlatIndicatorRun FlatIndicator
Canadaonly:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated adisplay message
and hasnot been restarted since.
X
Set the correct tire pressure in allfourtires.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 275).
Run FlatIndicatorRun FlatIndicator
InoperativeInoperative
Canadaonly:
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X
Visitaqualified specialistworkshop.
Please CorrectPlease Correct
TirePressureTirePressure
USA only:
The tire pressure is too lowinatleast one of the tires, or the tire
pressure differencebetween the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 275).
X
If necessary,correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 278).
202
Displaymessages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
TirePressure SoonTirePressure Soon
The tire pressureinone or moretires has dropped significantly. The
wheelposition is shown in themultifunction display.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tirepressures that are toolow posethe followinghazards:
R
they may burst, especially as theload and vehiclespeed increase
R
they may wear excessivelyand/orunevenly, whichmay greatly
impair tire traction.
R
thedrivingcharacteristics,aswell as steering and braking,may
be greatlyimpaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (Y page 253).
X
Checkthe tire pressure(Ypage 275).
X
If necessary, correctthe tire pressure.
WarningTireMal‐WarningTireMal‐
functionfunction
The tire pressureinone or moretires has dropped suddenly. The
wheelposition is shown in themultifunction display.
G
WARNING
Drivingwithaflat tire poses ariskofthe followinghazards:
R
aflat tire affects theabilitytosteer or brakethe vehicle
R
you could lose control of thevehicle.
R
continued drivingwithaflat tire will causeexcessive heat build-
up and possiblyafire
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (Y page 253).
TirePress. Moni‐TirePress. Moni‐
tor Currentlytor Currently
UnavailableUnavailable
Becausethere is interferencefromastrongsource of radiowaves,
no signals from thetirepressuresensorsare detected. The tire
pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressuremonitor restarts automatically as soonasthe
problem has been resolved.
TirePress.Sen‐TirePress.Sen‐
sor(s) Missingsor(s) Missing
There is no signal from thetirepressuresensor of oneorseveral
wheels. The pressureofthe affectedtiredoes notappear in the
multifunction display.
X
Havethe faultytirepressuresensor replacedataqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Display messages
203
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
TirePressure Moni‐TirePressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative Notor Inoperative No
Wheel SensorsWheel Sensors
The wheels mounteddonot haveasuitable tire pressuresensor.
The tire pressuremonitor is deactivated.
X
Mountwheels withsuitable tire pressuresensors.
The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after driving
for afew minutes.
TirePress. Moni‐TirePress. Moni‐
tor Inoperativetor Inoperative
The tire pressuremonitor is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Shift to 'P' orShift to 'P' or
'N' to Start Engine'N' to Start Engine
You haveattemptedtostart theenginewiththe transmission in
position k or h.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j or i.
Apply Brake toApply Brake to
Shift from'P'Shift from'P'
You haveattemptedtoshift thetransmission to position h, k or
i without depressing thebrakepedal.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
To Shift out of PTo Shift out of P
or N, Depressor N, Depress
Brake and SwitchBrake and Switch
on Engineon Engine
You haveattemptedtoshift thetransmission out of position j or
i intoanother transmission position withthe engineswitched off.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
X
Start theengine.
Driver's DoorOpenDriver's DoorOpen
&Transmission Not&Transmission Not
in PRiskofVehi‐in PRiskofVehi‐
cle RollingAwaycle RollingAway
The driver's door is notfullyclosed and thetransmission is in posi-
tion k, i or h.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehiclemay rollaway.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Whenparking thevehicle, shift thetransmission to position j.
OnlySelect ParkOnlySelect Park
(P) WhenVehicle(P) WhenVehicle
is Stationaryis Stationary
The vehicleismoving.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
Apply Brake toApply Brake to
Select RSelect R
You haveattemptedtoshift from position h to position k.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
X
Shift thetransmission to position k.
204
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ServiceRequiredServiceRequired
Do Not Shift GearsDo Not Shift Gears
Visit DealerVisit Dealer
You cannotchangethe transmission position due to amalfunction.
Awarning tone also sounds.
If transmission position h is selected:
X
Drive to aqualified specialist workshop without shifting thetrans-
mission from position h.
If position k, i or j is selected:
X
Notify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Pos‐Reversing Not Pos‐
sible Servicesible Service
RequiredRequired
You can no longer shift to transmission position k due to amal-
function.
Transmission positions j, i or h continuetobeavailable.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐
function Stopfunction Stop
Amalfunction has occurred in themechanical transmission compo-
nents.
Awarning tone also sounds. The transmission shiftsautomatically
to position i.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Notify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
StopVehicleLeaveStopVehicleLeave
Engine RunningEngine Running
WaitTransmissionWaitTransmission
CoolingCooling
The transmission has overheated. Pullingaway can be temporarily
impairedornot possible.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Wait until thedisplay message disappearsbefore pullingaway.
Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary Battery
MalfunctionMalfunction
The auxiliary battery for theautomatic transmission is no longer
beingcharged.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop at thenextopportunity.
X
Untilthen, always shift thetransmission to position j before
you switch off theengine.
X
Beforeleaving thevehicle, apply theelectric parking brake.
N
The trunk lid is open.
X
Closethe trunk lid.
Display messages
205
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
M
The hoodisopen.
G
WARNING
The open hoodmay blockyour viewwhen thevehicleisinmotion.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Closethe hood.
C
At least onedoor is open.Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Closeall thedoors.
Ð
Power Steering Mal‐
Power Steering Mal‐
function See Opera‐function See Opera‐
tor's Manualtor's Manual
The powersteering is malfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use moreforce to steer.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Checkwhether you are able to apply theextra force required.
X
If you areabletosteer safely: carefully drive on to aqualified
specialist workshop.
X
If you areunable to steer safely: do notdrive on.Contactthe
nearestqualified specialist workshop.
J
Trunk PartitionTrunk Partition
OpenOpen
The trunk partition is open or thetrunk is loadedtoo high.
X
Stow theload suchthatthe trunk partition can close unhindered
and is notpushed upwards.
X
Closethe trunk partition (Y page 81).
Phone No ServicePhone No Service
Your vehicleisoutside thenetwork provider'stransmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until themobile phone operational readiness symbol
appearsinthe multifunction display.
K
Decrease SpeedDecrease Speed
You wantedtoopen theroofwhile thevehiclewas in motion.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Openthe roof(Ypage 79).
K
Vario-RoofLoweringVario-RoofLowering
The roofisnot fullyopened or closed.The hydraulicsare depressur-
ized.
X
Fullyopen or close theroof(Ypage 79).
206
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
K
Open/CloseVario-
Open/CloseVario-
RoofCompletelyRoofCompletely
The roofisnot locked.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Push or pull and hold theroofswitch until theroofisfullyopen or
closed (Y page 79).
K
Start Engine See
Start Engine See
Operator'sManualOperator'sManual
The on-boardvoltageistoo low.
X
Start theengine.
X
Afterapproximately tenseconds, repeat theopening or closing
procedure (Y page 79).
The roofhas been opened and closed several times in arow.The
roofdrive has been switched off automatically for safetyreasons.
You can open and close theroofagain after approximately ten
minutes.
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Repeat theopening or closingprocedure (Y page 79).
Close RearSideClose RearSide
WindowsWindows
You leavethe vehicleand at least onerear side window is open.
X
Closethe side windows (Y page 76).
¥
Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid
The washer fluidlevel in thewasher fluid reservoir has dropped
belowthe minimum.
X
Addwasher fluid(Ypage 244).
Wiper Malfunction‐Wiper Malfunction‐
inging
The windshield wipersare malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Hazard WarningHazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐Flashers Malfunc‐
tioningtioning
The hazard warning lampsare faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
Key DoesNotKey DoesNot
Belong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle
You haveput thewrong SmartKey in theignition lock.
X
Use thecorrect SmartKey.
Â
TakeYourKey from
TakeYourKey from
IgnitionIgnition
The SmartKey is in theignition lock.
X
Remove theSmartKey.
Â
Obtain aNew KeyObtain aNew Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
207
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
Â
ReplaceKey BatteryReplaceKey Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change thebattery (Y page 69).
Â
Don't Forget YourDon't Forget Your
KeyKey
The SmartKey is notinthe ignition lock. You haveopened thedriv-
er'sdoor withthe engineswitched off.
The multifunction display shows thedisplay message amaximum of
60 seconds and is simply areminder.
X
Takethe SmartKey withyou when you leavethe vehicle.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(reddisplay message)
The SmartKey is notinthe vehicle.
Awarning tone also sounds.
If theengineisswitched off,you can no longer lockthe vehiclecen-
trally or start theengine.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Locate theSmartKey.
X
Press a on thesteering wheeltoconfirmthe display mes-
sage.
Becausethere is interferencefromastrongsource of radiowaves,
theSmartKey is notdetectedwhilstthe engineisrunning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 134).
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand bring intokey
mode.
Â
Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected
(whitedisplay message)
The SmartKey is currentlyundetected.
X
Change thelocation of theSmartKey in thevehicle.
If theSmartKey still cannotbedetected:
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand turnittothe
desiredposition.
Â
Remove 'Start'But‐Remove 'Start'But‐
ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarn-
ing tone also sounds.
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand turnittothe
desiredposition.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
208
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Indicator and warning lamps
General notes
Some systems carry out aself-diagnosis when theignition is switched on.Therefore, someindi-
cator and warning lampsmay lightuporflashtemporarily. This behavior is non-critical.These
indicator and warning lampsonlyindicateamalfunction if they lightuporflashafter starting the
engineorwhilstdriving.
Safety
Seatbelts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N Afterstarting theengine, thered seat belt warning lamp lights up for six sec-
onds.
The seat belt warning lamp remindsthe driver and frontpassenger to fasten
their seat belts.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 42).
ü
N Afterstarting theengine, thered seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition,
awarning tone sounds for up to six seconds.
The driver'sseat belt is notfastened.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 42).
The warning tone ceases.
Indicator and warning lamps
209
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and MM Solutions
ü
N The red seat beltwarning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as
the driver's or the front-passengerdoor is closed.
The driverorfront passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten yourseat belt(Ypage42).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passengerseat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passengerseat and stow them in asecure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat beltwarning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driverorfront passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicleis
being drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h)orhas briefly been drivenfaster
than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Fasten yourseat belt(Ypage42).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passengerseat. The vehicleisbeing drivenfaster
than 15 mph (25 km/h)orhas briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passengerseat and stow them in asecure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
210
Indicator and warning lamps
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp
is lit while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is arisk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to
road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 134).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$
N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is run-
ning. The multifunction display also shows adisplay message with the #
symbol.
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion) is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you perform afull
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is defective, there is also apossibility that other systems,
such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be availa-
ble.
Indicator and warning lamps
211
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and MM Solutions
$J
֌
!
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the
yellow ESP
®
,ESP
®
OFF and ABS warning lampsare lit while the engine is run-
ning.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may alsomalfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above. The front and rear wheels couldtherefore lock if you perform afull
brake application, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brak-
ing distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicleisinmotion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is arisk of skidding or at
least one wheelhas started to spin.
Cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedalasfar as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedalwhile the vehicleisinmotion.
X
Adapt yourdriving style to suitthe road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (Y page61) it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page61).
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lampsare lit while the engine is run-
ning.
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may alsomalfunction.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions lis-
ted above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
212
Indicator and warning lamps
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and MM Solutions
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the
ECO start/stop function is activated.
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (Y page61) it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page61).
X
Adapt yourdriving style to suitthe road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Have ESP
®
checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
M
N Only Mercedes-AMG SLC 43:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehi-
cle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions
described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP
®
"section (Y page61).
F!
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake is lit.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The air bagsorEmergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggereduninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact aqualified specialist workshopand have the restraint system
checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page39).
Indicator and warninglamps
213
On-board computer and displays
Z
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signaltype
Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions
;
N The yellow CheckEnginewarning lamp lightsupwhile theengine is running.
Theremay be amalfunction, for example:
R
in theengine management
R
in thefuel injection system
R
in theexhaust system
R
in theignition system
R
in thefuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and theengine may be in emer-
gency mode.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshop immediately.
In somestates, you must immediately visitaqualified specialist workshop as
soon as theyellow CheckEnginewarning lamp lightsup. This is due to thelegal
requirementsineffect in these states. If in doubt,check whether suchlegal reg-
ulationsapply in thestate in whichyou are currently driving.
8
N The yellow reservefuel warning lamp lightsupwhile theengine is running.
The fuel levelhas dropped intothe reserverange.
X
Refuel at thenearest gas station.
8
N The yellow reservefuel warning lamp flashes while thevehicle is in motion.
In addition,the ; CheckEnginewarning lamp may light up.
The fuel fillercap is notclosed correctly or thefuel system is leaking.
X
Checkthatthe fuel fillercap is correctly closed.
X
If thefuelfiller cap is not correctly closed: close thefuel fillercap.
X
If thefuelfiller cap is closed: visitaqualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lightsupwhile theengine is runningand the
coolant temperaturegage is at thestart of thescale.
The temperaturesensor for thecoolant temperaturegage is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperatureisnolonger beingmonitored. Thereisarisk of engine
damageifthe coolant temperatureistoo high.
X
Pull overand stop thevehicle safely and switch off theengine,payingatten-
tiontoroad and traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving underany circum-
stances.
X
Secure thevehicle against rolling away (Y page 134).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
214
Indicator and warning lamps
On-boardcomputer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and MM Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant levelistoo low.
If the coolant leveliscorrect, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked
or the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pullover and stop the vehiclesafelyand switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away(Ypage134).
X
Leave the vehicleand keep asafe distance from the vehicleuntil the engine
has cooleddown.
X
Check the coolant leveland add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page243).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gage is below the
H marking (Y page169).Otherwise, the engine couldbedamaged.
X
Drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter-
rain and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant temperature gage has exceededthe H marking (Y page169). The
airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too
low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooledsufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when yourengine is overheated. This can causesome fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can alsocauseserious burns which can
occur just by opening the hood.
There is arisk of injury.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pullover and stop the vehiclesafelyand switch off the engine, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away(Ypage134).
X
Leave the vehicleand keep asafe distance from the vehicleuntil the engine
has cooleddown.
X
Check the coolant leveland add coolant, observing the warning notes
(Y page243).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system
checked.
Indicator and warninglamps
215
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and MM Solutions
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by
snow, slush or ice.
X
If the coolant temperature gage is below the H marking (Y page169),drive
on to the next qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous ter-
rain and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and MM Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicleisinmotion. A
warning tone alsosounds.
You are approaching avehicle, apedestrian or astationary obstacleinyourline
of travel at too high aspeed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay carefulattention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (Y page144).
Further information on Active Brake Assist (Y page58).
216
Indicator and warning lamps
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
NN Signal type
Possible causes/consequencesand MM Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is
lit.
The tire pressure monitor hasdetectedalossofpressure in at leastone of the
tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures thatare too lowposethe following hazards:
R
theymay burst, especially as the load and vehiclespeed increase
R
theymay wear excessivelyand/or unevenly, which maygreatlyimpairtire
traction.
R
the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steeringand braking,may be greatly
impaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop the vehiclewithoutmaking any sudden steeringorbraking maneuvers.
Payattentiontothe trafficconditions as youdoso.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away (Y page 134).
X
Observe the additional displaymessagesinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Check the tiresand,ifnecessary,followthe instructions for aflattire
(Y page 253).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 275).
X
If necessary,correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashesfor approximately one minute and thenremains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possiblyunabletorecognize or register lowtire pressure.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Observe the additional displaymessagesinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Visitaqualified specialistworkshop immediately.
Indicator and warninglamps
217
On-board computer and displays
Z
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manualdescribes the basicprinciples for
operation. More information can be found in
the Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
municationequipment integrated in the
vehicle when driving, you may be distracted
from the traffic situation. You could also
lose control of the vehicle.There is arisk of
an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that
this is possible, park the vehicle paying
attention to traffic conditions and operate
the equipment when the vehicle is station-
ary.
You must observe the legalrequirements for
the country in which you are currently driving
when operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination withouttaking the following
into account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rulesand regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
adiverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of aone-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must alwaysobserve road
and traffic rulesand regulations during your
journey. Roadand traffic rulesand regulations
alwayshave priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you whiledriving withoutdiverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please alwaysuse this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you
from traffic conditions and driving, and
increase the risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radiofrequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement Cto
OET65.
This equipment has very low levelsofRF
energy that is deemedtocomply withoutmaxi-
mum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
However, it is recommended to install it at a
distance of at least 8inches (approx. 20 cm)
betweenthe radiation source and aperson's
body (not including limbssuch as hands,
wrists, feet and legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components,
their software as wellaswiring can impair
their function and/or the function of other
networked components. In particular, sys-
tems relevant to safety could also be affec-
ted. As aresult, these may no longer func-
tion as intended and/or jeopardize the oper-
ating safety of the vehicle.There is an
increasedrisk of an accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as wellaselec-
tronic components or their software.You
shouldhave all work to electricaland elec-
tronic equipment carried out at aqualified
specialist workshop.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable whilethe vehicle is in
motion. You willnotice this, for example,
because either you willnot be abletoselect
certain menu items or amessagewillappear
to this effect.
218
Function restrictions
Multimedia system
Operating system
Overview
General notes
!
Do not use the space in frontofthe dis-
play for storage. Objects placed here could
damage the display or impair its function.
Avoid any direct contact with the display
surface. Pressure on the display surface
may result in impairmentstothe display,
which could be irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-
controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is
too high. The display may temporarily switch
off completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching.Ifyou have to clean the
screen,however, use amild cleaningagent
and asoft,lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaningit, as this could cause irreversible
damage to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
X
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during an active call
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the sta-
tus line will show the 8 symbol. If you
switch the media source or set the volume,
the sound is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound systems
R
Navigation system
COMAND:navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
R
Vehicle functionswith system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select adestination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit amenu or
to call up the main menu of the currentoperat-
ing mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the currentoperating
mode.
X
To call up the main menu: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the main
menu of the currentoperatingmode.
Operating system
219
Multimedia system
Z
Favorites button
You can assign predefinedfunctionsusingthe
g favoritesbuttonand call them up by
pressingthe button(Ypage 220).
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the g buttononthe
controller.
X
Selectafavorite,e.g. VehicleVehicle.
The favoritesare displayed.
X
To exit: press the g buttonagain.
Adding favorites
Adding predefined favorites
X
Press the g button.
X
COMAND: slide 6 thecontroller.
X
Audio 20: slide 5 or 6 thecontroller.
The menubar is displayed.
X
Select ReassignReassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Selectacategory.
The favoritesare displayed.
X
Selectafavorite.
X
COMAND: to add thefavorite to thedesired
position,turnand press thecontroller.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
X
Audio 20: to add thefavorite to thedesired
position,turn, slide 5 or 6 and press
thecontroller.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
Adding yourown favorites
You can add climatecontrolasafavorite,for
example.
X
Select Vehicle
VehicleQVehicle SettingsVehicleSettings.
X
Press and hold the g buttonuntil the
favoritesare displayed.
X
Addafavorite to thedesired position.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe
vehiclewhen driving,you may be distracted
from thetraffic situation.You could also
lose control of thevehicle. Thereisariskof
an accident.
Only operate this equipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsure that
this is possible,park thevehiclepaying
attention to traffic conditionsand operate
theequipmentwhen thevehicleisstation-
ary.
You must observethe legal requirements for
thecountry in whichyou are currentlydriving
when operating thenavigation system.
General notes
Amongother things, correct functioning of the
navigation system dependsonGPS reception.
In certainsituations, GPS reception may be
impaired,there may be interferenceorthere
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped withGarmin
®
MAPPILOT
(see themanufacturer'soperating instruc-
tions). The Garmin
®
MAPPILOT operating
instructionsare storedonthe SD cardasa
PDFfile.The SD cardbox contains aquick
guide.
The followingdescriptionsapply to navigation
withCOMAND.Further information can be
foundinthe Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting aroute type and route
options
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
The map shows thevehicle's currentposi-
tion.
X
Slide 6 thecontroller.
X
Select OptionsOptionsQRouteSettingsRoute Settings.
220
Operating system
Multimedia system
Notes for route types:
R
Eco RouteEco Route
R
Dynamic Traffic RouteDynamic Traffic Route
Traffic reports on the route for the route
guidance are taken into account (not availa-
ble in all countries).
R
Dynamic TRF. Route After RequestDynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traf-
fic reports shouldbeincluded in the route
calculation (not availableinall countries).
R
Calculate Alternative RoutesCalculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In
order to do so, instead of StartStart,select the
menu item ContinueContinue.
X
To avoid/use route options: select
Avoid Options
Avoid Options.
X
Select aroute option.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll RoadsUse Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay ausagefee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only availableinthe USA)
Prerequisite: yourvehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes willbeincluded if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviNaviQNavigationNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current posi-
tion.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select DestinationDestinationQAddress EntryAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
R
city or ZIP code, street, house number
R
state/province, city or ZIP code
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
street, city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select CityCity.
The city in which the vehicle is currently
located (current vehicle position) is at the
top. Below this, you willsee locations for
which route guidance has already been car-
ried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol:the location is contained on
the digital map multipletimes.
X
To switchtothe list: slide 5 the control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there
are different ZIP codes availablefor the
location, the corresponding digits are dis-
played with an XX.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
R
search for akeyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
R
select the last destination
R
select acontact
R
select aPOI
You can search for aPOI by location, name
or telephone number.
R
select destination on the map
R
enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate desti-
nations.
R
select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered
and is in the menu.
X
Select StartStart or ContinueContinue.
The route is calculated with the selected
route type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activa-
ted, aprompt willappear asking whether
you wish to end the current route guidance.
X
Select Cancel Active Route GuidanceCancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination.
Cancel Active Route GuidanceCancel Active Route Guidance cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate DestinationSet as Intermediate Destination adds
the new destination in addition to the exist-
ing destination and opens the intermediate
destinations list.
Operating system
221
Multimedia system
Z
Connecting amobile phone
(COMAND)
Requirements
For telephony via theBluetooth
®
interface, you
require aBluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone.
The mobile phonemust support Hands-Free
Profile 1.0orabove.
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleVehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobilephone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and,ifnecessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibilityfor other devices (see the
manufacturer'soperatinginstructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one
manufacturer'sproductsmightbeidentical. To
makeitpossible to clearly identifyyour mobile
phone, changethe device name(see theman-
ufacturer'soperatinginstructions).
If themobile phonesupportsthe PBAP(Phone
Book Access Profile)and MAP(Message
Access Profile)Bluetooth
®
profiles, thefollow-
ing informationwill be transmittedafter you
connect:
R
Phonebook
R
Call lists
R
Textmessages and e-mail
i
Further informationonsuitable mobile
phones can be foundat: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In theUSA,you can get in touch withthe
Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistanceCenter
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the
Customer Relations Center on
1-800-387-0100.
Searchingfor and authorizing (con-
necting) amobile phone
Before using yourmobilephone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you willneed
to search for the phone and then authorize
(connect) it. Depending on the mobilephone,
authorization either takes place by means of
Secure Simple Pairing or by entering apass-
key. The multimedia system automatically
makes the procedure that is relevant for your
mobilephone available. The mobilephone is
always connected automatically after authori-
zation. Further information on using amobile
phone with the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobilephone, this may be due to particular
security settings on yourmobilephone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobilephone can be connected to
the multimedia system at any one time.
Searchingfor amobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/Tel/®QConn.Conn.
DeviceDeviceQSearchfor PhonesSearch for PhonesQStartStart
Search
Search.
The available mobilephones are displayed.
Symbols in the devicelist
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobilephone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobilephone is authorized, but is
not connected.
Connecting amobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X
Select mobilephone.
Acode is displayedinthe multimedia sys-
tem and on the mobilephone.
X
If codesmatch: select YesYes on the multime-
dia system.
X
Confirm code on the mobilephone. Depend-
ing on the mobilephone used,confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and
for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles.
The prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed(see the manufac-
turer's operating instructions).
X
If the codesare different: select NoNo on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
222
Operating system
Multimedia system
Authorization by entering apasskey(pass-
code):
X
Select the Bluetooth
®
nameofthe mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkeyisdisplayed.
X
Chooseaone to sixteen-digitnumbercom-
bination as apasskey.
X
Enter the passkeyonthe multimedia sys-
tem.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkeyonthe
mobilephone. Depending on the mobile
phone used,confirm the connectiontothe
multimedia system and for the PBAP and
MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to
confirm maytake up to two minutes to be
displayed (seethe manufacturer's operating
instructions).
Connectingamobilephone(Audio
20)
Requirements
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require at leastone Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile
phone depending on useofone-telephone
mode or two-telephonemode.The mobile
phone must support Hands-FreeProfile1.0 or
above.
In two-telephonemode youcan useall the
functions of the multimedia system with the
main telephone.Withthe additional tele-
phone,you can receive incoming calls.
Multimedia system:
X
Select Vehicle
VehicleQSystem Set‐System Set‐
tingstingsQActivate BluetoothActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobilephone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and,ifnecessary,Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for otherdevices(seethe
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for allofone
manufacturer's products might be identical.To
make it possibletoclearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name(seethe man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobilephone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing informationistransmittedafteryou con-
nect the main telephone:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
i
Further informationonsuitablemobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In the USA, youcan getintouch with the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, youcan getintouch with the
Customer Relations Center on
1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (con-
necting) amobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need
to search for the phone and then authorize
(connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone,
authorization either takes place by means of
Secure Simple Pairing or by enteringapass-
key. The multimedia system automatically
makes the procedure that is relevant for your
mobile phone available. The mobile phone is
always connected automatically after authori-
zation. Further information on using amobile
phone with the multimedia system (see the
Digital Operator's Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see
the manufacturer's operating instructions).
Searching for amobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/Tel/®QConn. DeviceConn. DeviceQCon‐Con‐
nect New Devicenect New Device.
X
Select Connect via VehicleConnect via Vehicle.
X
Select mobile phone.
Operating system
223
Multimedia system
Z
Connecting amobile phone
X
One-telephone mode: select ConnectasConnectas
New MainPhoneNew MainPhone.
X
Two-telephone mode: select ConnectasConnectas
AdditionalPhoneAdditionalPhone when amobile phoneis
already connected.
X
Authorization usingSecureSimple Pair-
ing:
Acodeisdisplayed in themultimediasys-
tem and on themobile phone.
X
Confirm codeonthe mobile phone. Depend-
ing on themobile phoneused, confirmthe
connectiontothe multimediasystem and
for thePBAPand MAPBluetooth
®
profiles.
The prompt to confirmmay takeuptotwo
minutes to be displayed (see themanufac-
turer'soperatinginstructions).
X
If thecodes are different: select NoNo on the
multimediasystem.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
or
X
Authorization by enteringapasskey
(passcode): enter any one-tosixteen-digit
number sequence whichyou have chosen
yourself intothe passkey input menu.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirmthe passkey on the
mobile phone. Depending on themobile
phoneused, confirmthe connectiontothe
multimediasystem and for thePBAPand
MAPBluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to
confirmmay takeuptotwo minutes to be
displayed (see themanufacturer'soperating
instructions).
Symbols in thedevice manager
The symbols are shown in colordepending on
their use.
Symbol Explanation
Mobile phoneconnected to the
multimediasystem
Main telephonewith full range of
functions
Additional telephonefor incom-
ing calls in two telephonemode
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources,the
appropriatemedia mode must already be
turned on. Further informationonmedia mode
(see theDigital Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USBdevices (e.g. USBstick,MP3 player)
(Y page 225)
R
CD
R
DVD(COMAND)
R
SD cards
R
Via devices connected by Bluetooth
®
i
Information on single CD/DVDdriveor
DVDchanger (see theDigital Operator's
Manual).
Selecting usingthe device list
Multimediasystem:
X
Select MediaMediaQDevicesDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates thecurrentsetting.
X
Select themedia source.
Playable files are played.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-
lowed and cause choking. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Keep theSDcardout of thereachofchil-
dren.IfaSDcardisswallowed, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
!
If theSDcardisnolonger in use, you
should takeitout and remove it fromthe
vehicle.High temperatures can damage the
card.
224
Operating system
Multimedia system
InsertinganSDcard
The SD cardslot is locatedonthe control
panel.
X
Insertthe SD cardintothe SD cardslot until
theSDcardengages.The side withthe con-
tacts must facedown.
Removing an SD card
X
Press theSDcard.
The SD cardisejected.
X
Remove theSDcard.
Connecting USB devices
X
Connect theUSB device to theUSB port.
Thereare two USBports in thestowage
spaceunder thearmrest.
X
Select themedia source (Y page 224).
Operating system
225
Multimedia system
Z
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objectsinthe passenger compartmentare
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objectsthey contain. There is a
risk of injury, particularly in the event of sud-
den braking or asudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objectssothat they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objectsdonot pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
startingajourney.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects
in the trunk.
Glove box
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; up until it
engages.
The glove box flap contains brackets for coins,
pens, and credit and service cards.
The glove box can be locked and unlocked
using the mechanical key.
X
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it to position 2.
X
To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it to position 1.
Stowage compartment/telephone
compartment under the armrest
X
To open: push button : up and raise arm-
rest ;.
The stowage compartmentcan be locked and
unlocked centrally using the SmartKey
(Y page 66).
i
Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
USB port and aMedia Interface is installed
in the stowage compartment. AMedia Inter-
face is auniversal interface for mobile audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod
®
or MP3 Player.
226
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Eyeglasses compartment
X
To open: pressmarking :.
Makesure that theeyeglasses compartmentis
always closed while thevehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in thecenter
console
X
To open: briefly pressthe lower sectionof
cover :.
X
To remove theinsert: pull theleft-hand
side of theinsert up and out.
X
To install theinsert: pressthe insert into
thehousing.
X
To close: fold cover : downwards until it
engages.
Dependingonthe vehicle equipment,there
may be an ashtray in thecenterconsole
instead of astoragecompartment.
Stowage compartment in thedoors
Ruffled pocket ; with parking disc holder :
is locatedinthe door panel.
Stowage box in therearwall between
theseats
Astowage compartment, in theformofaruf-
fled pocket, is locatedonthe rear wall
between theseats.
:
Ruffled pocket
Stowage net
Stowage netsare locatedinthe front-
passenger footwell and on therear wall behind
thedriver'sseat.
Stowage areas
227
Stowage and features
Z
Reversible floor panelinthe trunk
The trunk floor is level when youuse the outer
sideofthe reversiblefloor panel.Ifyou turn
the floor panel over, youcan transportobjects
such as abeverage crate on the undersideof
the panel.
X
To turn over: lift reversiblefloor panel ;
using tab :.
X
Turn overand then re-insert reversiblefloor
panel ;.
Twoflexible straps ; are attached to the
reversiblefloor panel,use thesetosecure
objects, such as wind screen =,whenreversi-
blefloor panel : hasbeenturnedover.
Roofcarrier
!
Thisvehicleisnot designed to transport
itemsonthe roof. Roof carriers and other
deviceswhich are mounted on the roofthat
have not beenspecifically approved for this
model by Mercedes-Benz mustnot be used
as they could damagethe vehicleand the
retractable hardtop(vario-roof).
At the time of going to print, Mercedes-Benz
doesnot offerany roofcarrierorotherroof-
installed devicesfor this model.
!
Thisvehicleisnot designed to transport
any itemsonthe trunk lidortoallow lug-
gage carriers or equipment of any kind to be
installed to the trunk lid. Otherwise the vehi-
cle and the retractable hardtopcould be
damaged.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrownaround and hit vehicleoccupants. In
addition, cup holders, openstowagespaces
and mobilephone brackets cannotalways
retain allobjects they contain. There is a
riskofinjury, particularly in the event of sud-
den braking or asuddenchange in direction.
R
Alwaysstow objects so that they cannot
be thrownaround in such situations.
R
Alwaysmake sure that objects do not pro-
trudefrom stowagespaces, parcel nets or
stowagenets.
R
Close the lockable stowagespaces before
starting ajourney.
R
Alwaysstow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects
in the trunk.
G
WARNING
The heating elements of the cup holder can
become very hot. Youcould burn yourselfon
them.
There is ariskofinjury.
Do not touch the hot heating elements of
the cup holder.Alwaysmake sure that chil-
drencannotaccess the hot heating ele-
ments of the cup holder.Neverleave chil-
drenunsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Only usethe cup holdersfor containers of
the right size and which have lids. The
drinks could otherwise spill.
228
Features
Stowage and features
!
Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damagedbythe con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Cup holder in the center console
X
To open: slide cover ; back.
X
To remove the insert: slide catch :
inwards on both sides in the direction of the
arrow.
X
Remove the cup holder insert upwards.
X
To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
X
Slide catch : outwards in the direction of
the arrow until it engages.
You can remove the cup holder insert for
cleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarm water
only.
Bottle holder
Observe the "Important safety notes" in the
"Stowage compartments" section
(Y page 226).
!
Make sure that any bottles weighing more
than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the
bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The
bottle holder could otherwise be damaged.
X
Press the outer edge of button : and slide
in the direction of the arrow until the bottle
fits into the opening.
X
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
The bottle holder is suitablefor bottles with a
capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;
it merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is fol-
ded up when the vehicle is in motion, you
could be blinded by incident light. There is a
risk of an accident.
Alwayskeep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Bracket
=
Retaining strip, e.g. for aparking lot ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
Features
229
Stowage and features
Z
i
When driving at high speeds with the side
window or roof open:
If you have inserted acar park ticket into
retainingstrip =,make sure that it is not
blown away by the wind.
Ashtray
X
To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The cover opens.
X
To remove the insert: lift insert = up ;
and out.
X
To re-install the insert: press insert =
into the holder until it engages.
Cigarettelighter
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the ciga-
rettelighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite
if:
R
the hot cigarettelighter falls
R
achild holds the hot cigarettelighter to
objects, for example
There is arisk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarettelighter by the
knob. Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of reach of children. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must alwaysbefocused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette
lighter when road and traffic conditions per-
mit.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The ashtray opens.
X
Press in cigarettelighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automati-
cally when the heating element is red-hot.
12 Vsockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
The sockets can be used for accessories with
amaximum draw of 180 W(15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when
the engine is switched off, the batterymay dis-
charge.
i
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the
on-board voltage is too low, the power to
the sockets is automatically cut. This
ensures that there is sufficientpower to
start the engine.
230
Features
Stowage and features
Socket in the front center console
X
To open: push the lower section of
cover :.
The stowage compartmentopens.
X
Lift up the cover of socket ;.
Mercedes me connect
General notes
Alicense agreement must be in place in order
to activate the Mercedes me connect service.
Make sure that your system is activated and
operational. To register, press the ï MB
Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned
are not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If you have questions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registering with the
service, auser ID and password will be sent to
you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log
onto the Mercedes me connect area under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
R
it has been activated and is operational
R
the correspondingmobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center
R
aservice subscription is available
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determining the location of the vehicle on
amap is only possible if:
R
GPS reception is available
R
the vehicle position can be forwarded to
the Customer AssistanceCenter
The Mercedes me connect system
To adjust the volume during acall, proceed as
follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volume controller of the audio sys-
tem/COMAND.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
R
Automatic and manual emergency call
R
RoadsideAssistancecall
R
MB Info call
USA only: you can find information and a
description of all available features under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the
system carries out aself-diagnosis.
Amalfunction in the system has been detec-
ted if one of the following occurs:
R
The indicator lamp in the SOS button does
not come on during the system self-test.
R
The indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistancebutton does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diagno-
sis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
lowing buttons continues to light up red
after the system self-diagnosis:
-
SOS button
-
F RoadsideAssistancecall button
-
ï MB Info call button
R
After the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐Inoper‐
ativeative or Service Not ActivatedService Not Activated mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If amalfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
the event of an emergency, help will have to
be summoned by other means.
Features
231
Stowage and features
Z
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center or contact the
following service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Importantsafety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if youhavepressed the SOS button in
an emergency if:
R
yousee smoke inside or outside of the
vehicle, e.g. if there is afire after an acci-
dent
R
the vehicle is on adangerous sectionof
road
R
the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily
be seenbyother roadusers, particularly
whendarkorinpoorvisibility conditions
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or sim-
ilar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to asafe location along with other
vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
the vehicle in accordance with national regu-
lations, e. g. with awarning triangle.
Alicense agreement mustbeinplace in order
to activate the Mercedes me connect service.
Make surethat your system is activated and
operational.Toregister, pressthe ï MB
Info callbutton. If any of the steps mentioned
are not carried out, the system may not be
activated.
If youhavequestions about the activation,
contact one of the following telephone hot-
lines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
General notes
An emergency callisdialed automatically if an
airbag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered.
i
You cannot end an automatically triggered
emergency callyourself.
An emergency callcan also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency callhas beeniniti-
ated,the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes.The multifunction displayshowsthe
ConnectingCallConnectingCall message.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connectionhas beenmade, the
Call ConnectedCall Connected message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
All important informationonthe emergency is
transmitted, for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle (asdeter-
mined by the GPS system)
R
Vehicle identification number
R
Information on the severity of the accident
Shortlyafter the emergency callhas beeniniti-
ated,avoice connectionisautomatically
established between the Customer Assistance
Center and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupants are responsive, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more informationonthe
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle
occupants, an ambulance is immediately
sent to the vehicle.
If no voice connectioncan be established to
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter, the system has beenunable to initiate an
emergency call.
Thiscan occur,for example,ifthe relevant
mobile phone networkisnot available. The
indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-
tinuously.
The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the
multifunction displayand mustbeconfirmed.
In this case,summon assistance by other
means.
232
Features
Stowage and features
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X
Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Waitfor avoice connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
X
After the emergency call,close cover :.
i
If the mobilephone network is unavailable,
Mercedesmeconnect is not abletomake
an emergency call.Ifyou leave the vehicle
immediatelyafter pressing the SOS button,
you do not know if Mercedesmeconnect
has successfully made the emergency call.
In this case, alwayssummon assistance by
other means.
Breakdown assistance call button
X
Press RoadsideAssistance button :.
This initiates acall to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in RoadsideAssistance
button : flashes while the call is active.
The multifunction display showsthe Con‐Con‐
necting Call
necting Call message. The audio output
is muted.
If aconnection can be made,the Call Con‐Call Con‐
nectednected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If amobilephone network and GPS reception
are available,the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicleidentificationnumber
i
The display of the multimediasystem indi-
cates that acall is active. During the call,
you can change to the navigation menu by
pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for
example.
i
Voice outputisnot available.
Avoice connection is establishedbetween the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicleoccupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(Y page234).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sends aqualified Mercedes-Benz
technician or makes arrangements for your
vehicletobetransported to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Center.
You may be chargedfor services such as
repair work and/or towing.
You can obtainfurther information from your
Mercedesmeconnect manual.
i The system has not been abletoinitiate a
RoadsideAssistance call,if:
R
the indicator lamp for RoadsideAssis-
tance call button : is flashing continu-
ously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center has
been established.
R
This can occur if the relevant mobilephone
network is not available,for example.
The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in the
multifunction display.
Features
233
Stowage and features
Z
X
To endacall: press the ~ button on the
multifunctionsteering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending aphone call.
MB Info callbutton
X
Press MB Info callbutton :.
Thisinitiates acalltothe Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton :
flasheswhile the connectionisbeing made.
The multifunctiondisplay shows the Con‐Con‐
nectingCallnectingCall message. The audiosystem
is muted.
If aconnectioncan be made,the CallCon‐CallCon‐
nectednected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If amobilephone network and GPSreception
are available,the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
Current location of the vehicle
R
Vehicleidentificationnumber
i
The multimedia system display indicates
thatacallisactive. During the call, youcan
change to the navigationmenu by pressing
the NAVI button on COMAND, for example.
Voice outputisnot available.
Avoice connectionisestablished between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicleoccupants.
Youreceive informationabout operating your
vehicle, aboutthe nearestMercedes-Benz Ser-
vice Center and aboutotherproducts and
servicesfrom Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: youcan find further informationon
the Mercedes me connect system under "Own-
ers Online"athttp://www.mbusa.com.
i Thesystem hasnot been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info callbut-
ton : is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connectiontothe Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
established.
Thiscan occurifthe relevant mobilephone
network is not available,for example.
The CallFailedCallFailed message appears in the
multifunctiondisplay.
X
To endacall: press the ~ button on the
multifunctionsteering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending aphone call.
Callpriority
Whenservice calls are active, e.g.Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls,anemergency call
can stillbeinitiated.Inthiscase, an emer-
gencycallwilltake priority and override all
otheractive calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashesuntilthe callisended.
An emergency callcan onlybeterminatedby
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter.
All othercalls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunctionsteer-
ing wheel
R
the corresponding button on the audiosys-
tem or on COMAND for ending atelephone
call
i
Whenacallisinitiated,the audiosystem
is muted.The mobilephone is no longer
connected to COMAND. However, if you
want to useyourmobilephone, do so only
when the vehicleisstationary and in asafe
location.
VehicleHealth Check
With the VehicleHealth Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provideimprovedsup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicledataistransferred to the
234
Features
Stowageand features
CustomerAssistanceCenter. The customer
servicerepresentative can use thereceived
datatodecide what kindofassistance is
required.You are then,for example,guided to
thenearestMercedes-BenzServiceCenteror
arecovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle dataneeds to be transferred during
an MB Info call or aRoadside Assistancecall,
this is initiated by theCustomerAssistance
Center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐Roadside Assis‐
tance Connectedtance Connected message in theCOMAND
display. If theVehicle Health Checkcan be
started, the Requestfor vehiclediagno‐Requestfor vehiclediagno‐
sis received. Start vehiclediagno‐sis received. Start vehiclediagno‐
sis?sis? message appearsinthe display.
X
Confirmthe message with YesYes.
X
When the VehicleDiagnosis:Please
VehicleDiagnosis:Please
start ignition.start ignition. message appears, turn
theSmartKey to position 2 in theignition
lock(Ypage 118).
X
When the Please follow the instruc‐Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and move
yourvehicletoasafepositionyourvehicletoasafeposition mes-
sage appears, follow thecustomer service
representative'sinstructions.
The message in thedisplay disappears.
If you select CancelCancel theVehicle Health
Checkiscanceled completely.
The vehicle operatingstate check begins.
You will see the VehiclediagnosisVehiclediagnosis
activated.activated. message.
When thecheck is completed, the SendSend
vehiclediagnostics data(Voice con‐vehiclediagnostics data(Voice con‐
nectionmay be interrupted duringnectionmay be interrupted during
datatransfer)datatransfer) message appears. The vehi-
cle datacan nowbesenttothe Customer
AssistanceCenter.
X
Press OKOK to confirm themessage.
The voiceconnectionwiththe Customer
AssistanceCenteristerminated.
You will see the VehicleDiagnosis:VehicleDiagnosis:
Transferring data...
Transferring data... message.
The vehicle dataissenttothe Customer
AssistanceCenter.
Dependingonwhat thecustomer servicerep-
resentative agreed withyou, thevoiceconnec-
tionisre-established after thetransfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
latertimebyanother means, e.g.bye-mail or
phone.
Another function of theVehicle Health Check
is thetransfer of servicedatatothe Customer
AssistanceCenter. If aserviceisoverdue, the
COMAND display shows amessage about vari-
ous special offers at your workshop.
USAonly: this informationcan also be called
up under"Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Informationonthe datastoredinthe vehicle
(Y page 28).
Information on RoadsideAssistance
(Y page 25).
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garagedoor opener integrated
in therear-view mirror allows you to operate
up to three differentdoor and gatesystems.
Use theintegratedgaragedoor opener only on
garagedoorsthat:
R
have safety stop and reversefeatures and
R
meet currentU.S.federal safety standards
Once programed, theintegratedgaragedoor
opener in therear-view mirror will assumethe
function of thegaragedoor system'sremote
control. Please also read theoperatinginstruc-
tions for thegaragedoor system.
When programmingagaragedoor opener,
park thevehicle outside thegarage. Do not
run theengine while programming.
Certain garagedoor drives are incompatible
with theintegratedgaragedoor opener. If you
have difficultyprograming theintegrated
garagedoor opener, contactanauthorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Alternatively, you can call thefollowingtele-
phoneassistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: CustomerServiceat
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
MoreinformationonHomeLink
®
and/or com-
patible productsisalso availableonline at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on thedeclaration of conformity
(Y page 27).
USA: FCC ID:CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Features
235
Stowage and features
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program thedoor with
theintegratedgarage door opener, persons
in therange of movement of thedoor may
become trapped or be struckbythe door.
Thereisariskofinjury.
When usingthe integratedgarage door
opener, always makesurethatnobody is
within therange of movement of thedoor.
G
DANGER
Combustion engines emit poisonous
exhaust gasessuchascarbon monoxide.
Inhalingthese exhaust gasesishazardous to
healthand can result in poisoning.Thereisa
riskoffatal injury. Therefore, never leavethe
enginerunninganenclosed spacewithout
adequateventilation.
Programming
Programming thebuttons
Pay attention to the"Importantsafetynotes"
(Y page 236).
Garagedoor remotecontrol A is notincluded
withthe integratedgarage door opener.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theigni-
tion lock(Ypage 118).
X
Selectone of buttons ; to ? to use to
control thegarage door drive.
X
To startprogramming mode: press and
hold oneofbuttons ; to ? on theintegra-
tedgarage door opener.
The garage door opener is nowinprogram-
mingmode. Afterashort time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicatorlamp : lights up yellow as soon
as button ;, = or ? is storedfor thefirst
time. If theselected buttonhas already
been programed, indicator lamp : will only
lightupyellow after tenseconds have
elapsed.
X
Releasebutton ;, = or ?.Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To program theremote control: point
garage door remotecontrol A towards but-
tons ; to ? on therear-view mirror at a
distanceof2to8in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remotecontrol
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green:
programmingisfinished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green:pro-
grammingwas successful. The next step is
to synchronizethe rollingcode
(Y page 236).
X
Releasebutton B on remotecontrol A for
thegarage door drivesystem.
If indicator lamp : lights up red:repeat the
programing procedure for thecorresponding
buttononthe rear-view mirror.When doing
so, varythe distancebetween remotecon-
trol A and therear-view mirror.
The requireddistancebetween remotecon-
trol A and theintegratedgarage door
opener dependsonthe garage door drive
system. Several attempts might be neces-
sary. You should test every position for at
least 25 seconds before trying another posi-
tion.
Synchronizing therolling code
Pay attention to the"Importantsafetynotes"
(Y page 236).
If thegarage door system uses arollingcode,
you will also havetosynchronizethe garage
door system withthe integratedgarage door
opener in therear-view mirror.Todothisyou
will need to use theprogrammingbuttonon
thedoor drivecontrolpanel. The programming
buttonmay be locatedindifferentplaces
depending on themanufacturer. It is usually
236
Features
Stowage and features
located on the door drive unit on the garage
ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions,e.g. under "Program-
mingadditional remote controls", beforecarry-
ing out the followingsteps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the
garage door or gate opener drive.Make sure
that neither your vehicle nor any persons/
objectsare presentwithin the sweep of the
door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programmingbutton on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the nextstep.
X
Get intothe vehicle.
X
Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly until the door closes.
The rollingcode synchronization is then
complete.
Notes on programming theremote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequencylaws require a
"break"(or interruption) of the transmission
signals after broadcastingfor afew seconds.
Therefore, these signals may not last long
enoughfor the integrated garage door opener.
The signal is not recognized duringprogram-
ming. Comparable with Canadian law, some
U.S.garage door openers also feature a
"break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada.
R
if you have difficulties programmingthe
garage door opener (regardless of where
you live) when followingthe programming
steps.
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on
the integrated garage door opener.
After ashorttime, indicator lamp : lights
up yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, thenrelease it for
two seconds.
X
Press button B again for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of
remote control A until indicator lamp :
lightsupgreen.
When indicator lamp : lightsupgreen:
programmingisfinished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green:pro-
gramming was successful. The nextstepis
to synchronize the rollingcode.
X
Release button B of remote control A of
the garage door drive.
When indicator lamp : lightsupred:
repeat the programmingprocess for the cor-
respondingbutton on the rear-view mirror.
When doing so, vary the distancebetween
remote control A and the rear-view mirror.
The requireddistancebetweenremote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door
opener depends on the garage door drive
system. Several attemptsmight be neces-
sary. You should testeveryposition for at
least 25 seconds beforetrying another posi-
tion.
Problemswhen programming
If you are experiencing problemsprogramming
the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
view mirror, takenoteofthe followinginstruc-
tions:
R
Check the transmitter frequencyused by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
quencycan usually be foundonthe back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have unitswhich
operateinthe frequencyrangeof280 to
433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door remote
control A.This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit
astrong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varyingdistances and angles frombut-
tons ; to ? which you are programming.
Try various angles at adistancebetween
2and 8inches (5to20cm) or at the same
angle but at varyingdistances.
R
If afurther remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive,repeat the
same programmingsteps with this remote
control A.Before performingthese steps,
Features
237
Stowage and features
Z
make sure that new batterieshave been
installed in garage door drive remote control
A.
R
Note that some remote controls only trans-
mit for alimited amount of time (the indica-
tor lamp on the remote control goes out).
Press button B on remote control A again
before transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cableofthe garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of
the garage door system remote control. Please
alsoread the operating instructions for the
garage door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Press either button ;, = or ? which you
have programmed to operate the garage
door.
Garage door system with afixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with arolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter willtransmit asignal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission
is halted after amaximumoften seconds
and indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if neces-
sary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling
the vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-viewmirror is cleared.
Compass
Calling up the compass
Compass ; displaysthe compass directionin
which the vehicleiscurrently traveling: NN, NENE,
EE, SESE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.
To receive acorrect display in rear-viewmir-
ror :,the compass must be calibrated and
the magnetic fieldzone set.
238
Features
Stowage and features
Setting the compass
North America zone map
South America zone map
X
Set your location using the zone maps.
X
Push around pen into opening =
(Y page 238) for approximately three sec-
onds.
The zone currently selected appears in com-
pass display ; (Y page 238).
X
To selectthe zone: push around pen into
opening = (Y page 238) until the desired
zone is selected.
If, after afew seconds, the display in com-
pass display ; (Y page 238) changes direc-
tion, the zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass
X
Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in acircle without impeding
traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
R
calibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-volt-
age transmission lines.
R
switch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear
window defroster.
R
close all doors and the trunk lid.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Push around pen into opening =
(Y page 238) for approximately six seconds,
until symbol C
C is shown in compass dis-
play ; (Y page 238).
X
Drive your vehicle in afull circle at approx-
imately 3mph (5 km/h) to 6mph
(10 km/h).
When the calibration has successfully been
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ; (Y page 238).
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objectsinthe driver's footwell may restrict
the clearance around the pedals or block a
depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-
ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is
arisk of an accident.
Stow all objectssecurely in the vehicle so
that they do not get into the driver's foot-
well. When using floormats or carpets, make
sure that they are properly secured so that
they do not slip or obstruct the pedals. Do
not place several floormats or carpets on
top of one another.
Features
239
Stowage and features
Z
X
Slide the seatback.
X
To install: place the floormatinthe foot-
well.
X
Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X
To remove: pull the floormatoff retain-
ers ;.
X
Remove the floormat.
240
Features
Stowage and features
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If thehood is unlatched, it may open up
when thevehicle is in motion and blockyour
view. Thereisarisk of an accident.
Never unlatch thehood while driving.Before
everytrip, ensure that thehood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closingthe hood,itmay
suddenly fall intothe closed position.There
is arisk of injury to personswithin range of
movementofthe hood.
Open and close thehood only when no one
is within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening thehood when theengine is over-
heated or when there is afireinthe engine
compartmentcouldexpose you to hot gases
or other serviceproducts. Thereisarisk of
injury.
Let an overheatedengine cooldown before
opening thehood.Ifthere is afireinthe
engine compartment, keep thehood closed
and contactthe firedepartment.
G
WARNING
The engine compartmentcontainsmoving
components. Certain components, suchas
theradiator fan,may continue to run or start
again suddenly when theignition is off.
Thereisarisk of injury.
If you needtodoany work inside theengine
compartment:
R
switch off theignition
R
never reachintothe area wherethere is a
risk of danger from moving components,
suchasthe fan rotationarea
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
To ensure theflow of fresh air throughthe air
vents intothe vehicle interior, please observe
thefollowingnotes:(Ypage 115)
Opening thehood
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe engine compart-
ment, suchasthe engine,radiator and parts
of theexhaust system, can become very
hot.Workinginthe engine compartment
posesarisk of injury.
Wherepossible, let theengine cooldown
and touch only thecomponentsdescribedin
thefollowing.
G
WARNING
When thehood is open and thewindshield
wipersare set in motion,you can be injured
by thewiper linkage. Thereisarisk of injury.
Always switch off thewindshield wipersand
theignition before opening thehood.
!
Makesure that thewindshield wipersare
notfolded away from thewindshield. You
couldotherwise damagethe windshield wip-
ers or thehood.
X
Makesure that thewindshield wipersare
turned off.
X
Pull release lever : on thehood.
The hood is released.
Engine compartment
241
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Reachintothe gap, pull hoodcatch han-
dle ; up and lift hood :.
If you lift thehoodbyapproximately 15 in
(40 cm), thehoodisopened and held open
automatically by thegas-filled strut.
Closingthe hood
X
Lowerthe hoodand let it fall from aheight
of approximately 8in(20 cm).
X
Checkthatthe hoodhas engagedproperly.
If thehoodcan be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
withalittlemoreforce.
Engine oil
Notes on theoil level
Dependingonyour driving style, thevehicle
consumes up to 0.9USqt(0.8 liters)ofoil per
600miles (1,000 km). Theoil consumption
may be higher than this when thevehicle is
neworifyou frequently driveathigh engine
speeds.
Dependingonthe engine, theoil dipstick may
be in adifferent location.
When checking theoil level:
R
park thevehicle on alevelsurface
R
theengineshould be switched off for
approximately fiveminutesifthe engineis
at normal operatingtemperature
R
if theengineisnot at normal operatingtem-
perature, e.g.ifthe enginewas only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carry-
ing out themeasurement
Checking theoil level usingthe oil dip-
stick
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe enginecompart-
ment, suchasthe engine, radiator and parts
of theexhaust system, can become very
hot.Workinginthe enginecompartment
posesariskofinjury.
Only touch thefollowingcomponentsdescri-
bed.
If work is beingcarried out on public roads,
pay attentiontothe road and traffic conditions
and secure thearea as appropriate.
Example
X
Pull out oil dipstick :.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : intothe guide
tubetothe stop, and takeitout again.
If thelevelisbetween MIN mark = and
MAXmark ;,the oil leveliscorrect.
X
If theoil levelhas dropped to MIN mark =
or below, add 1.1USqt(1l)ofengineoil.
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe enginecompart-
ment, suchasthe engine, radiator and parts
of theexhaust system, can become very
hot.Workinginthe enginecompartment
posesariskofinjury.
Wherepossible, let theenginecooldown
and touch only thecomponentsdescribedin
thefollowing.
242
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next
to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down
and thoroughly cleanthe engine oil off the
components before starting the engine.
H
Environmental note
When adding oil,take care not to spillany. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful
to the environment.
!
Use only engine oilsand oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with aservice system.
Alist of the engine oilsand oil filters that
have been tested and approved in accord-
ance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products is available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following causeengine failure or dam-
age to the exhaust system:
R
Use of engine oilsand oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the ser-
vice system
R
Replacement of engine oil and oil filter
after the replacement interval specified
by the service system has expired
R
Use of engine oil additives
!
Do not add too much oil.Ifthe oil levelis
above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too
much oil has been added. This can leadto
damage to the engine or the catalytic con-
verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
Example:engine oil cap
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove
it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil levelisatorbelow the MIN mark
on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)
of engine oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place
securely.
X
Check the oil levelagain with the oil dipstick
(Y page242).
Further information on engine oil
(Y page302).
Checkingand adding other service
products
Checkingcoolantlevel
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses arisk of injury.
Where possible,let the engine cool down
and touch only the components described in
the following.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heatedorwhen there is afire in the engine
compartment couldexpose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is arisk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool downbefore
opening the hood. If there is afire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignitionisoff.
There is arisk of injury.
Engine compartment
243
Maintenance and care
Z
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, awayfrom moving parts
G
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particu-
larlywhen the motor is warm. If you open
the cap, you could be scaldedifhot coolant
spraysout. There is arisk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open
the cap. Wear protective gloves and protec-
tive eyewear when opening. Open the cap
slowly to release pressure.
Example
X
Park the vehicle on alevel surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehi-
cle is on alevel surface and the engine has
cooled down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock (Y page 118).
On vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 118).
X
Check the coolant temperature gage in the
multifunction display.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 ‡(70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position u
(Y page 118) in the ignition lock.
X
Slowlyturn cap : half aturn counter-clock-
wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
X
Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
= in the fillerneck when cold, there is
enough coolant in coolant expansion
tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler
neck when warm, there is enough coolant in
expansion tank ;.
X
If necessary,add coolant that has been tes-
ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it willgo.
Further information on coolant (Y page 303).
Windshield washersystem
G
WARNING
Certaincomponents in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very
hot. Working in the engine compartment
poses arisk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down
and touch only the components describedin
the following.
G
WARNING
If you open the hood when the drive system
has overheated or during afire in the engine
compartment, you could come into contact
with hot gases or other escaping operating
fluids. There is arisk of burns.
Let the overheated components cool down
before opening the hood. In the event of a
fire in the engine compartment, keep the
hood closed and call the fire service.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate is highly
flammable. If windshield washer concentrate
gets onto hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
244
Engine compartment
Maintenanceand care
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
Example
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-
ommended minimum fluid level of 1USqt
(1 liter), amessage appears in the multifunc-
tion display prompting you to add washer fluid
(Y page 207).
Further information on windshield washer
fluid/antifreeze (Y page 304).
Overview of the engine compart-
ment
Example engine
:
Engineoil cap
;
Oil dipstick
=
Brake fluid reservoir
?
Washer fluid reservoir
A
Coolant expansion tank
ASSYST PLUS
Service display
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display indi-
cates the remaining time period or the remain-
ing distance to the next regular service due
date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate MaintenanceBook-
let).
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the
engine oil level. Observe the notes on the
engine oil level (Y page 242).
The multifunction display shows aservice dis-
play for afew seconds, e.g.:
R
Service Ain..DaysService Ain..Days
R
Service ADueService ADue
R
Service AExceeded by .. DaysService AExceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditionsofthe
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until
the next service due date is displayed.
The letter AA or BB,possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, shows the type of
service. AA stands for aminor service and BB for
amajor service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may
reduce the service interval, e.g. in the follow-
ing situations:
X
the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
X
if the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
X
if there are frequent cold start phases
Mercedes-Benzrecommends you avoid such
operating conditions.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time dur-
ing which the battery is disconnected.
ASSYST PLUS
245
Maintenance and care
Z
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.
Hiding service displays
X
Press the a or % button on the steer-
ing wheel.
Showing service displays
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel
to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select the ASSYSTASSYST
PLUSPLUS submenu and confirm by pressing the
a button.
The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service
interval display
!
If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play has been inadvertently reset, this set-
ting can be corrected at aqualified special-
ist workshop.
Have service work carried out as described
in the MaintenanceBooklet. This may other-
wise lead to increased wear and damage to
the major assemblies or the vehicle.
Aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
ized Mercedes-BenzCenter, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can
also obtain further information on mainte-
nance work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenanceinterval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Service work will need to be per-
formed more often if the vehicle is operated
under arduousconditionsorincreased loads.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is
only an aid. The driver of the vehicle is respon-
sible for whether service work will need to be
performed more frequently than required as a
result of the actual operating conditions
and/or loads.
Examples of arduousoperating conditions:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermedi-
ate stops
R
the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
R
frequent use in mountainous terrain or on
poor road surfaces
R
the engine is often left idling for long peri-
ods
R
particularly dusty conditions, or if air-recir-
culation mode is frequently used
In these or similar operating conditions, have
the interior filter, air filter, engine oil and oil fil-
ter, for example, changed more frequently.
Under arduousoperating conditions, the tires
must be checked more often. Further informa-
tion can be obtained at aqualified specialist
workshop.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-BenzService network
is also available in other countries. You can
obtain further information from any authorized
Mercedes-BenzService Center.
Care
Notes on care
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible
manner.
!
When cleaning your car, do not use:
R
dry, coarse or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
246
Care
Maintenance and care
R
solvents
R
cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces and films with
hard objects, e.g. rings or ice scrapers. Oth-
erwise, you may scratch or damage the sur-
faces and films.
!
Do not park your vehicle for along period
of time directly after cleaning, particularly
after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaner can lead to the
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
pads. Therefore, drive for afew minutes
after cleaning. By heating up the brakes, the
brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can
then be parked for along period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is acondition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicleand cleaning
the paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is
restored.
!
When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-
tion is activated, the vehicle brakes auto-
matically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
It is preferable to use car washes with
adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that
corresponds to the specification for the
Cabriolet program. In car washes that use
high water pressures, there is arisk that a
small amount of water may leak into the
vehicle.
!
Lock the car if you wash it in an automatic
car wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might be
damaged.
!
Never clean your vehicle in aTouchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
If you have your vehicle cleaned in ahigh-
pressure automatic car wash, small
amounts of water may enter the vehicle.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in position N when washing your vehicle
in atow-through car wash. The vehicle could
be damaged if the transmission is in another
position.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and roof are completely
closed
R
the climate control blower is switched off
R
the windshieldwiper switch is in position
0
The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.
You can clean the vehicle at an automatic car
wash from the very start.
Preferably clean the vehicle at automatic car
washes that use textile washing elements
without brushes. This prevents fine scratches
from forming on the paintwork and film.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
wax from the windshieldand the wiper blades.
This will prevent smears and reduce wiping
noises caused by residue on the windshield.
i
Vehicles with decorative film: select a
wash program without hot wax at the auto-
matic car wash.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at speciallyequipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each coun-
try.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use asoft sponge to clean.
X
Use amild cleaning agent, such as acar
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Care
247
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
gentle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards
the air inlet or the edges of decorative foils.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the
sponge frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with achamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
paintwork or the decorative foils.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from acircular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior dam-
age to the tires or chassis components.
Componentsdamaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. There is arisk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
vehicle are covered with decorative film.
Maintain adistance of at least 27.5 in
(70 cm) between the film-covered parts of
the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
Information about the correctdistance is
availablefrom the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
The water temperature of the power washer
must not exceed 140 ‡(60 †).
!
Always maintain adistance of at least
12 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
correctdistance is availablefrom the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
Tires
R
Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
Electrical components
R
Battery
R
Plug-type couplings
R
Light bulbs
R
Seals
R
Trim elements
R
Ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components
can lead to leaks or failures.
!
If you clean the tank filler recess when it is
open, do not use apower washer. This can
cause damage to the seals or other compo-
nents.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosivedeposits, areas affected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate care cannot alwaysbecompletely
repaired. In such cases, visit aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X
Remove tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by
rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petro-
leum ether or lighter fluid
X
Remove coolant and brake fluid with amoist
cloth and clear water.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This
is the case approximately every three to five
months, depending on the climate conditions
and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if
the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz should be used.
248
Care
Maintenance and care
Do not usethese careproducts in the sunor
on the hoodwhile the hoodishot.
X
Use asuitabletouch-upstick, e.g.MB
Touch-Up Stick, to repairslightdamageto
the paintwork quicklyand provisionally.
Matte finishcare
!
Never polish the vehicleorthe light alloy
wheels.Polishing causes the finish to shine.
!
The following can give the paint aglossy
appearance and thusreduce the matt
effect:
R
Rubbing hard with unsuitable agents
R
Washing the vehicleindirect sunlight
!
Never usepaint cleaner, buffing or polish-
ing products, or gloss preserver,e.g.wax,
for the purpose of paintwork care. These
products areonlysuitablefor high-gloss sur-
faces.Their useonvehicles with matte
paintwork leadstoconsiderablesurface
damage or, morespecifically,toshiny, spot-
ted areas.
Alwayshavepaintwork repairs carriedout at
aqualified specialistworkshop.
!
Onlyuse automatic car washeswhich cor-
respond to the latest technologicalstand-
ards.Never usewashprograms which finish
by treating the vehiclewithhot wax.
Observe these notesifyourvehiclehas aclear
matte finish. Thiswillhelpyou to avoiddam-
agetothe paintwork duetoincorrect treat-
ment.
These notesalsoapply to light alloywheels
with aclear matte finish.
i
Use onlyinsect removerand car shampoo
fromthe range of recommendedand
approved Mercedes-Benz careproducts.
Cleaningthe decorative film
!
The following mayhaveaneffect on the
servicelifeand color of decorative film:
R
sunlight
R
temperature, e.g.hot-air fan
R
weather conditions
R
stone impacts and dirt
R
chemical cleaning agents
R
greasysubstances
!
Do not useany types of polish on matt
decorative film. Polishing surfaces covered
with filmgives it ashiny finish.
!
Do not treatmattorstructured decorative
filmwithwax.Thismay lead to marks that
cannotberemoved.
Observe the notesinthe sectiononthe care
and treatment of matte paintwork
(Y page 249); these notesalsoapply to matte
decorative film.
To clean, useplenty of water and amildclean-
ing agent withoutadditional or abrasive prod-
ucts,e.g.acar shampooapproved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X
Dry vehicles covered with filmusing asoft,
absorbent cloth after every wash.
Water marks could otherwiseform.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areasaffected
by corrosion and damage caused by inade-
quate carecannotalwaysbecompletely
repaired.Insuchcases, visit aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Removedirtimmediately, where possible,
whileavoidingrubbing too hard.
The decorative filmmay be irreparably dam-
aged.
X
Soakinsect remains with insect remover
and rinse off the treated areasafterwards.
X
Soakbirddroppingswithwater and rinse off
the treated areasafterwards.
The cleaning product, Paint Cleaner, which has
been approved and recommendedby
Mercedes-Benz, shouldbeusedwhendirthas
penetrated the decorative filmsurface or the
decorative filmhas become dull.
The manufacturer can provideyou with infor-
mationonspecial careand cleaning products.
Laminatedsurfaces mayexhibit opticaldiffer-
encestosurfaces which were not protectedby
adecorative filmwhenthe decorative filmis
removed.
i
Haveworkorrepairs on decorative film
carriedout at aqualified specialistwork-
shop. Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou
useanauthorizedMercedes-Benz Center for
thispurpose.
Care
249
Maintenance and care
Z
Cleaning thevehicle parts
Cleaning thewheels
G
WARNING
The waterjet from acircular jetnozzle (dirt
blasters)can causeinvisible exterior dam-
age to thetires or chassis components.
Components damaged in this way may fail
unexpectedly. Thereisariskofanaccident.
Do notuse power washers withcircular jet
nozzles to clean thevehicle.Havedamaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do notuse acidic wheel cleaningproducts
to remove brakedust.This coulddamage
wheel boltsand brakecomponents.
!
Do notpark your vehicle for alongperiod
of timedirectly after cleaning, particularly
after cleaningthe wheel rim withwheel
cleaner. Wheelcleanercan lead to the
increased corrosion of thebrakediscsand
pads. Therefore, drivefor afew minutes
after cleaning. By heating up thebrakes, the
brakediscsand pads dry. The vehicle can
then be parked for alongperiod of time.
Cleaning thewindows
G
WARNING
You couldbecome trapped by thewind-
shield wipersiftheystart moving while
cleaningthe windshield or wiper blades.
Thereisariskofinjury.
Always switch off thewindshield wipersand
theignition before cleaningthe windshield
or wiper blades.
!
Do notuse dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaningagents containing sol-
vents to clean theinside of thewindows. Do
nottouch theinsides of thewindows with
hard objects, e.g.anice scraperorring.
Thereisotherwise ariskofdamaging the
windows.
!
Clean thewaterdrainage channels of the
windshield and therear window at regular
intervals. Deposits suchasleaves, petals
and pollenmay undercertain circumstances
preventwaterfromdraining away. This can
lead to corrosion damageand damageto
electronic components.
X
Clean theinside and outside of thewindows
withadamp cloth and acleaningproduct
that is recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
If thewindshield wipersare set in motion
while you are cleaningthe windshield, you
can be trapped by thewiper arm.Thereisa
riskofinjury.
Always switch off thewindshield wipersand
theignition before cleaningthe windshield.
!
Do notpull thewiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade couldbedamaged.
!
Do notclean wiper blades toooften and
do notrub them toohard.Otherwise, the
graphitecoatingcouldbedamaged. This
couldcausewiper noise.
!
Holdthe wiper arm securely when folding
back.The windshield couldbedamaged if
thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Foldthe windshield wiper armsaway from
thewindshield.
X
Carefully clean thewiper blades witha
damp cloth.
X
Foldthe windshield wiper armsback again
before switching on theignition.
Cleaning theexterior lighting
!
Only use cleaningagents or cleaning
clothsthatare suitable for plastic lenses.
Caustic, irritantorotherwise unsuitable
cleaningagents or cleaningclothscould
scratch or damagethe exterior lighting plas-
tic lenses.
X
Clean theplastic lenses of theexterior lights
withawet sponge and amild cleaning
agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benzcar shampoo or
cleaningcloths.
250
Care
Maintenance and care
Cleaning themirror turn signals
!
Only use cleaningagents or cleaning
clothsthatare suitable for plastic lenses.
Unsuitable cleaningagents or cleaning
clothscouldscratch or damagethe plastic
lenses of themirror turnsignals.
X
Clean theplastic lenses of themirror turn
signals in theexterior mirror housing usinga
wet sponge and mild cleaningagent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benzcar shampoo or withclean-
ing cloths.
Cleaning thesensors
!
If you clean thesensorswithapower
washer, makesure that you keep adistance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm)between the vehi-
cleand thepower washer nozzle. Informa-
tionabout thecorrectdistanceisavailable
from theequipment manufacturer.
X
Clean sensors : of thedriving systems
with water, car shampoo and asoftcloth.
Cleaning therearview camera
!
Do notclean thecamera lensand thearea
aroundthe rear view camera with apower
washer.
X
Open thecamera flap (Y page 160).
X
Use clean waterand asoftcloth to clean
camera lens :.
The camera flap closes:
R
if theignition is switched off
R
if thecamera system is deactivated
R
starting at vehicle speeds above6.2 mph
(10 km/h)
Cleaning theexhaust pipe
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become veryhot.Ifyou comeintocontact
with these partsofthe vehicle,you could
burn yourself. Thereisarisk of burns.
Always be particularly careful and supervise
childrenclosely aroundthe exhaust pipe and
theexhaust pipe trims. Allowthese compo-
nents to cooldown before touching them.
!
Do notclean theexhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaningagents,suchasbathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
X
Clean theexhaust pipe with achromecare
product tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Impurities combined with theeffectsofroad
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
causeflash rust to formonthe surface. You
can restore theoriginal shineofthe exhaust
pipe by cleaningitregularly, especially in win-
terand after washing.
Care
251
Maintenance and care
Z
Where will Ifind...?
Reflective safety jacket
Removing/replacing reflective safety
jackets
The reflective safety jackets are located in the
safety jacket compartments in the stowage
compartments of the front doors.There are
alsosafety jacket compartments in the stow-
age compartments of the rear doors,inwhich
reflective safety jackets can be stowed.
X
To remove: pullout safety jacket bag :
with the reflective safety jacket by the loop.
X
Open safety jacket bag : and pullout the
reflective safety jacket.
X
To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket,
roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :.
X
Slidesafety jacket bag : along the lower
edge of the armrestinto the safety jacket
compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that the
loop hangs out wellwithinreach.
i
Remove anew reflective safety jacket
from its packaging material before sliding it
into the safety jacket compartment. The
packaging material may otherwise causeit
to slipout or make removing it difficult.
Observe the legalrequirements in each coun-
try.
Notes on the reflective safety jacket
:
Maximum numberofwashes
;
Maximum wash temperature
=
Do not bleach
?
Do not iron
A
Do not use alaundry dryer
B
Do not dry-clean
C
This is aclass2vest
R
The reflective safety jackets meet the
requirements defined by the legalstandard
only if:
-
the correct size is usedand
-
the reflective safety jacket is correctly
fastened
R
Before use,ensure that the reflective safety
jacket is cleanand intact. The special prop-
erties may otherwise be compromised.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be
stored in their original packaging in adry
place away from sources of heatand light.
R
The maximumnumberofwashes specified
is not the only factor influencing the life
spanofthe reflective safety jackets. Their
life spanalsodepends on use,care, storage,
etc.
R
The reflective safety jackets should be dis-
posedofand replaced with new ones:
-
after 15 washes, and/or
-
if the reflective strips have become
scratched,and/or
-
if the backing material and/or reflective
strips have become soiled and cannot be
cleaned off, and/or
-
the reflective safety jacket's fluorescence
has faded, e.g. due to the effects of sun-
light
R
Disposeofthe reflective safety jacket in an
environmentally responsiblemanner. To do
252
Where will Ifind...?
Breakdown assistance
so, contact your local waste disposalcom-
pany.
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the trunk
or in the stowage well under the trunk floor.
Apart from certain country-specific variations,
the vehicles are not equipped with atire-
change tool kit. Some tools for changing a
wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more
information on which tools are required to per-
form awheel change on your vehicle, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include, for
example:
R
jack
R
wheel chock
R
lug wrench
R
ratchet wrench
R
alignment bolt
Vehicleswith aTIREFIT kit
:
Tire sealant filler bottle
;
Fuse allocation chart
=
Tire inflation compressor
?
Towing eye
X
Lift the trunk floor up.
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 255).
i
Example: equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
Vehicleswith acollapsible spare
wheel
The collapsible spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the trunk floor
(Y page 228).
:
Folding wheel chock
;
Fuse allocation chart
=
Jack
?
Sheet for faulty wheel
A
Alignment bolt
B
Lug wrench
C
Towing eye
D
Valve extractor
E
Tire inflation compressor
X
Remove the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 295).
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
R
tires with run-flat characteristics
(MOExtended tires) (Y page 254)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on
vehicles with MOExtended tires.
R
an emergency spare wheel (Y page 294)
Vehicles with the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system: in the event of aflat tire,
you can contact the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system customer center.
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
Flat tire
253
Breakdown assistance
teristics, e.g.winter tires. ATIREFIT kit maybe
obtained fromaqualified specialistworkshop.
Informationonchanging and mounting wheels
(Y page 289).
X
Stop the vehicleonsolid,non-slippery and
level ground,asfar away as possiblefrom
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazardwarning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away
(Y page 134).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicleswithout KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKeyfromthe ignition lock.
X
VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO: open the driv-
er'sdoor.
The vehicleelectronics arenow in position
g.Thisisthe same as the SmartKeyhaving
been removed.
X
VehicleswithKEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock
(Y page 118).
X
Make sure thatthe passengers arenot
endangeredastheydoso. Make sure that
no one is nearthe dangerareawhile a
wheelisbeing changed. Anyone whoisnot
directlyassisting in the wheelchange
should, for example, stand behind the bar-
rier.
X
Getout of the vehicle. Payattentiontotraf-
fic conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver's door.
MOExtendedtires(tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtendedtires(tires with runflat
characteristics),you can continue to drive your
vehicleevenifthere is atotallossofpressure
in one or moretires. The affectedtire must not
showany clearly visible damage.
Youcan recognize an MOExtendedtire by the
MOExtendedmarking which appearsonthe
sidewall of the tire.You will findthismarking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speedindex
(Y page 284).
MOExtendedtiresmay onlybeusedincon-
junctionwithanactive tire pressure loss warn-
ing systemorwithanactive tire pressure mon-
itor.
If apressure loss warning message
appears in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the displaymes-
sages(Ypage 202)
R
check the tire for damage
R
if drivingon, observe the following notes
The drivingdistance possibleinrun-flat mode
is approximately 50 miles(80 kilometers)
when the vehicleispartiallyladen and approx-
imately 19 miles(30 kilometers)whenthe
vehicleisfully laden.
In additiontothe vehicleload, the drivingdis-
tance possibledepends upon:
R
Vehiclespeed
R
Road condition
R
Outside temperature
The drivingdistance possibleinrun-flat mode
maybereducedbyextreme drivingconditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrougha
moderate style of driving.
The drivingdistance possibleinrun-flat mode
is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure
loss warning appearsinthe multifunctiondis-
play.
Youmustnot exceed amaximum design
speedof50mph (80 km/h).
When replacing one or alltires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
R
Size
R
Type and
R
The"MOExtended" marking
If atire hasgoneflatand cannot be replaced
with an MOExtendedtire,astandard tire may
be used as atemporary measure. Make sure
thatyou usethe propersizeand type(summer
or winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtendedtiresare
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommended thatyou addition-
ally equipyourvehiclewithaTIREFIT kit if you
mount tiresthatdonot featurerun-flat charac-
teristics, e.g.winter tires. ATIREFIT kit can be
obtained fromaqualified specialistworkshop,
for example.
254
Flat tire
Breakdownassistance
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you driveinemergencymode, the
handlingcharacteristics are impaired.e.g.
when cornering, when accelerating strongly
and when braking.Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Do notexceedthe maximum specified
speed. Avoid any abruptsteering and driving
maneuvers as well as driving overobstacles
(curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in
particular, to aloadedvehicle.
Stop driving in emergencymodeifyou
notice:
R
bangingnoise
R
vehiclevibration
R
smoke whichsmells likerubber
R
continuous ESP
®
intervention
R
cracksinthe tire side walls
Afterdriving in emergencymode, have the
rimschecked by aqualified specialist work-
shopwithregard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replacedinevery
case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFITisatiresealant.
You can use TIREFITtoseal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in thetire
tread. You can use TIREFITatoutside tempera-
tures down to Ò4‡(Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In thefollowingsituationsinparticular, the
tire sealantisunable to provide sufficient
breakdown assistanceasitcannotseal the
tire properly:
R
there are cutsorpunctures in thetire
larger than those mentioned previously.
R
thewheelrim is damaged.
R
you havedriven at verylow tire pressures
or on aflat tire.
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Do notdrivethe vehicle. Contactaqualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealantisharmful and causes irrita-
tion.Itmust notcomeintocontactwithyour
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do
notinhale TIREFITfumes. Keeptiresealant
away from children.Thereisariskofinjury.
If you come intocontactwiththe tire seal-
ant,observethe following:
R
Rinseoff thetiresealantfromyour skin
immediately withwater.
R
If thetiresealantcomes intocontactwith
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly withclean water.
R
If tire sealantisswallowed, immediately
rinse your mouthout thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do notinduce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately changeout of clothing which
has come intocontactwithtiresealant.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
!
Do notoperate thetireinflation compres-
sor for longer than eightminutesatatime
without abreak. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
atedagain once it has cooled down.
Comply withthe manufacturer’s safetyinstruc-
tionsonthe sticker on thetireinflation com-
pressor.
Flat tire
255
Breakdown assistance
Z
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not removeany foreign objects which
have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or
nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-
panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neaththe trunkfloor (Y page 253).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrumentcluster within the driver'sfield of
vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Remove filler hose B and plug = from the
bottom section of the tire inflation compres-
sor housing.
X
Slide the yellow filler hose connector into
the mounting on yellow cap A of tire seal-
ant bottle : until the plug engages.
X
With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow
cap A of tire sealant bottle : intothe
mounting of tire inflation compressor ;.
The cap must engage in both hooks.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D ontothe valve.
X
Insert plug = intothe cigarette lighter
socket (Y page 230) or intoa12Vpower
socket in your vehicle (Y page 230).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1
(Y page 118) in the ignition lock .
X
Press on and off switch ? on the tire infla-
tion compressor to ON.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First,tire sealant is pumped intothe tire.
The pressure may briefly rise to approx-
imately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73psi).
Do not switch off the tireinflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes. The tire should
then have attained apressure of at least
200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
If atire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29psi) is
achieved after amaximum of ten minutes, see
(Y page 257).
If atire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) is
not achieved after amaximum of ten minutes,
see (Y page 257).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. It is preferable to
use clean water.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,
have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a
dry cleaner as soon as possible.
256
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
Tire pressure notreached
If atire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
hasbeenachieved after ten minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the fillerhosefromthe valve of the
faulty tire.
Note thattire sealant mayescapewhenyou
unscrew the fillerhose.
X
Veryslowly drive forwards or reverse
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After amaximum of ten minutes, the tire
pressure must be at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
afterthe specified time,the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe
tire in this instance. Damaged tiresand a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impairthe vehicle's braking and driving
characteristics. There is ariskofaccident.
Do not continuedriving.Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
Atire temporarilysealedwithtire sealant
impairs the vehicle's driving characteristics
and is not suitablefor driving at higher
speeds.There is ariskofanaccident.
Adapt your driving styleaccordingly and
drive carefully.Donot exceedthe maximum
permissible speed for atire sealedwithtire
sealant.
The maximum permissible speed for atire
sealedwithtire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT stickermustbe
affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's
field of vision.
!
Residue from the tire sealant may come
outofthe fillerhoseafteruse.Thiscould
cause stains.
Therefore, place the fillerhoseinthe plastic
bagwhich contained the TIREFIT kit.
H
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottledisposed
of professionally, e.g. at aqualified special-
ist workshop.
If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)
hasbeenachieved afteramaximum period of
ten minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrewthe fillerhosefrom the valve of the
faulty tire.
X
Stow the tire sealant bottleand the tire
inflation compressor.
X
Pullaway immediately.
X
Stop afterdriving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with
the tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure mustnow be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
afterdriving for ashort period,the tire is too
badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot
repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged
tiresand atire pressure that is too low can
significantlyimpairthe vehicle's braking and
driving characteristics. There is ariskof
accident.
Do not continuedriving.Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
i
In casessuchasthe one mentioned
above, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(inthe USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (inCanada).
X
Correct the tire pressure if it is stillatleast
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tireand
Loading Information placard on the driver's
sideB-pillarorthe tire pressure table in the
fuelfillerflapfor values.
X
To increasethe tire pressure: switch on
the tire inflation compressor.
Flat tire
257
Breakdown assistance
Z
X
To reducethe tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button : next to pressure
gage ;.
X
Whenthe tire pressure is correct, unscrew
the fillerhosefrom the valve of the sealed
tire.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of
the sealedtire.
X
To remove the tire sealant bottle from the
tire inflation compressor,press together the
locking tabsonthe yellow cap.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle outofthe tire
inflation compressor.
The fillerhoseremains attachedtothe tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drivetothe nearestqualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there.
X
Havethe tire sealant bottle and the filler
hosereplaced as soonaspossibleata
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Havethe tire sealant bottle replaced every
fouryears at aqualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Specialtoolsand expert knowledge are
required when working on the battery,e.g.
removaland installation. Youshouldtherefore
have allworkinvolving the battery carriedout
at aqualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Workcarriedout incorrectly on the battery
can lead,for example, to ashort circuitand
thusdamagethe vehicleelectronics.This
can lead to functionrestrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g.the lighting
system,the ABS (anti-lock braking system)
or the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program).
The operating safety of your vehiclemay be
restricted.
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the roadconditions
There is ariskofanaccident.
In the event of ashort circuitorasimilar
incident, contact aqualified specialist work-
shopimmediately. Do not drive any further.
Youshouldhaveall work involving the bat-
tery carriedout at aqualified specialist
workshop.
For further informationabout ABS and ESP
®
,
see (Y page 57)and (Y page 60).
G
WARNING
Electrostaticbuild-upcan lead to the crea-
tionofsparks, which could ignite the highly
explosive gases of abattery.There is arisk
of an explosion.
Before handling the battery,touch the vehi-
cle body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highlyflammablegas mixture formswhen
charging the battery as well as when jump-
starting.
258
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Alwaysmakesurethatneither younor the bat-
tery is electrostaticallycharged. Abuild-upof
electrostatic charge can be caused,for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
duetofrictionbetween clothing and seats
R
if youpushorpullthe battery across the
carpetorothersyntheticmaterials
R
if youwipethe battery with acloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process, abattery pro-
duces hydrogen gas. If ashort circuitoccurs
or sparks arecreated,the hydrogen gascan
ignite.There is ariskofanexplosion.
R
Make sure thatthe positive terminalofa
connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicleparts.
R
Never place metalobjects or toolsona
battery.
R
It is important thatyou observe the
describedorder of the battery terminals
when connecting and disconnecting abat-
tery.
R
Whenjump-starting,makesurethatthe
battery poleswithidentical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
describedorder when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumpercables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals whilethe engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acidiscaustic. There is ariskof
injury.
Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhaleany battery gases.Donot lean
overthe battery.Keepchildren away from
batteries. Wash away battery acidimmedi-
ately with plenty of clean water and seek
medicalattention.
H
Environmental note
Batteriescontain pollutants.
It is illegaltodispose of
them with the household
rubbish. Theymustbecol-
lected separately and dis-
posed of in an environmen-
tally responsiblerecycling
system.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentallyresponsible
manner. Take discharged
batteries to aqualified spe-
cialist workshop or to acol-
lectionpoint for used bat-
teries.
!
Havethe battery regularly checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Complywiththe service intervals in the
Maintenance Booklet, or contact aqualified
specialist workshop for more information.
!
Alwayshaveworkonbatteries carriedout
at aqualified specialist workshop.
Should it, in exceptionalcircumstances,be
absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-
voltbattery yourself, please observe the fol-
lowing:
R
Secure the vehicletoprevent it from roll-
ing away.
R
Switch off the ignition.
R
Disconnect the negative terminalfirst and
then the positive terminal.
The transmission is locked in position j
afterdisconnecting the battery.
After the work hasbeendone, installthe
battery and replace the coverofthe positive
terminalclamp firmly.
Complywithsafety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery.Avoidcreating sparks.
Battery (vehicle)
259
Breakdown assistance
Z
Battery acidiscaustic. Avoid con-
tact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wearsuitableprotective clothing,
especiallygloves, apron and face-
guard.
Rinse any acidspillsimmediately
with clearwater. Contact aphysi-
cianifnecessary.
Weareye protection.
Keepchildrenaway.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that youonly use batterieswhich have
beentested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz. These batteriesprovide
increasedimpact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acidburns should
the battery be damaged in the event of an
accident.
In orderfor the battery to achieve the maxi-
mum possible service life, it mustalwaysbe
sufficiently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if youdonot use the vehi-
cle. In this case,havethe battery disconnec-
ted at aqualified specialist workshop.You can
also charge the battery with acharger recom-
mendedbyMercedes-Benz. Contact aquali-
fiedspecialist workshop for further informa-
tion.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if youuse the vehicle mainly
for shorttripsorifyou leave it standing idle
for alengthy period.Consultaqualified spe-
cialist workshop if youwishtoleave your vehi-
cle parked for along period of time.
Remove the SmartKeyifyou park the vehicle
and do not require any electricalconsumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy,
thus conserving battery power.
If the power supplyhas beeninterrupted, e.g.
if youreconnect the battery,you will haveto:
R
resetthe function for automaticallyfolding
the exterior mirrors in/outbyfolding the
mirrors outonce (Y page 93)
R
set the clock
On vehicles with amultimedia system, the
time is set automatically.
Charging the battery
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery.There is
arisk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire,openflames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is suffi-
cient ventilation while charging and jump-
starting. Do not leanover abattery.
G
WARNING
Battery acidiscaustic. There is arisk of
injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases.Donot lean
over the battery.Keepchildrenawayfrom
batteries. Wash away battery acidimmedi-
atelywithplenty of cleanwater and seek
medicalattention.
G
WARNING
Adischarged battery can freeze at tempera-
turesbelow freezing point. Whenjump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery,
gases can escape from the battery.There is
arisk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw outbefore
charging it or jump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers with amaximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment.
260
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
If the indicator/warning lampsdonot light up
at low temperatures, it is very likely that the
discharged battery has frozen. In this case,
you may neither charge the battery nor jump-
start the vehicle.The service life of athawed-
out battery may be shorter. The starting char-
acteristics can be impaired, particularly at low
temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery
checked at aqualifiedspecialist workshop.
Readthe battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
X
Open the hood.
X
Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (Y page 261).
Replacing the 12 Vbattery
Observe the notes on the 12 Vbattery
(Y page 258).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the 12 Vbattery replaced at aqualifiedspe-
cialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you want to replace the battery yourself,
observe the following notes:
R
Alwaysreplace adefective battery with a
battery which meets the specific require-
ments of the vehicle.
The vehicle is equipped with an AGM
(Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery.
Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed
with an AGM battery. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-
Benz.
R
Use detachable parts such as breather
hoses, angled connecting pieces or terminal
covers from the battery which is to be
replaced.
R
Make sure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the originalopening on the bat-
tery side.
R
Install existing or supplied cell caps to pre-
vent gases or battery acid from escaping.
R
Make sure that the detachable parts are
connected again in the same way.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of apositive terminal and aground point.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is arisk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhaleany battery gases.Donot leanover the
battery. Keep childrenawayfrom batteries. Wash awaybattery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medicalattention.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames,creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation whilecharging and jump-starting. Do not leanover abattery.
G
WARNING
During the charging process, abattery produces hydrogen gas. If ashort circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is arisk of an explosion.
Jump-starting
261
Breakdownassistance
Z
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objectsortools on abattery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connect-
ing and disconnecting abattery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnect-
ing the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnectthe battery terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explo-
sion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy startingattempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warninglamps do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen.Inthis case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the
vehicle. The service life of athawed-out battery may be shorter. The startingcharacteristics can
be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at aquali-
fied specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicle using arapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from adonor battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using adonor battery or ajump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen.Let the battery thaw first.
R
Only jump-start from batteries with a12Vvoltage rating.
R
Only use jumper cables which have asufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for afew minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
The jumper cables are not damaged.
R
Bare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while the
jumper cables are connected to the battery.
R
The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such as the V-belt pulleyorthe fan.
X
Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster must
be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position u in the ignition lock and
remove it (Y page 118).
262
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
X
Switch off allelectrical consumers,e.g. rearwindow defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Openthe hood.
Position number B identifiesthe chargedbattery of the othervehicleoranequivalent jump-
starting device.
X
Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicletopositive terminal = of donorbattery B using
the jumper cable,alwaysbegin with positive terminal ; on your ownvehiclefirst.
X
Start the engine of the donorvehicleand run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal ? of donorbattery B to ground point A of your vehicleusing the
jumper cable,beginning with donorbattery B first.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, letthe engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cablesfrom ground point A and negative terminal ?,then from
positive terminal ; and positive terminal =.Begineachtime at the contacts on your own
vehiclefirst.
X
Close cover : of positive terminal ; afterremoving the jumper cables.
X
Have the battery checkedataqualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be anormaloperating condition.
i
Jumpercablesand further information regarding jump-starting can be obtainedatany quali-
fiedspecialist workshop.
Jump-starting
263
Breakdown assistance
Z
Towingand tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-startinganothervehicle
and its weight is greaterthanthe permissi-
blegross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eyecould detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combinationcould roll-
over.
There is ariskofanaccident.
When towing or tow-startinganothervehi-
cle,its weight shouldnot be greaterthan
the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle.
Detailsonthe permissiblegross vehicleweight
of your vehiclecan be found on the vehicle
identification plate (Y page 298).
!
When ActiveBrake Assist, ActiveDistance
Assist DISTRONICorthe HOLD functionis
activated,the vehiclebrakes automatically
in certain situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
these systemsinthe following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Onlysecurethe tow ropeortow baratthe
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehiclecould be
damaged.
!
Do not usethe towing eyefor recovery,
thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt,
recover the vehiclewithacrane.
!
When towing,pullawayslowly and
smoothly. If the tractivepower is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
!
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment.This
could damage the vehicle.
!
When towing away vehicles with KEYLESS-
GO,use the key insteadofthe Start/Stop
button. The automatic transmission may
otherwiseshift to position j when you
open the driver's or front-passengerdoor,
which could damage the transmission.
!
Make sure thatthe electricparkingbrake
is released.Ifthe electricparkingbrake is
faulty, visit aqualified specialistworkshop.
!
Youmay tow the vehiclefor amaximum
distance of 30 miles (50 kilometers). Atow-
ing speedof30mph (50 km/h)mustnot be
exceeded.
For towing distances over30miles
(50 kilometers), the entire vehiclemustbe
raised and transported.
!
When youare tow-startingortowing
anothervehicle, its weight must not exceed
the maximum permissiblegross weight of
your vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicletransported
thantohaveittowed away.
The automatic transmission must be in posi-
tion i when the vehicleisbeing towed away.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannotturnthe SmartKeytoposition 2 in
the ignition lock
R
cannotshift the automatic transmission to
position i
Deactivate the automatic locking feature
beforethe vehicleistowed (Y page 179). You
could otherwisebelocked outwhenpushing
or towing the vehicle.
Installing/removingthe towingeye
Installing the towingeye
G
WARNING
The exhaust tailpipemay be veryhot. There
is ariskofburns when removing the rear
cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe.Takeparticu-
larcarewhenremoving the rearcover.
264
Towingand tow-starting
Breakdownassistance
The bracketsfor the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the front
and at the rear, behind the covers.
X
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit (Y page 253).
X
Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Take cover : off the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as
it will go and tighten it.
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press
until it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing avehicle with both axles on
the ground
G
WARNING
You can no longer steer the vehicle if the
steeringwheel lock has been engaged.
There is arisk of an accident.
Always switch off the ignition when towing
the vehicle with atow cable or atow bar.
The automatic transmission shifts to position
j automatically when you open the driver's
or front-passenger door or when you remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
In order to ensure that the automatic trans-
mission stays in position i when towing
away the vehicle, you must observe the follow-
ing points:
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(Y page 99).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(Y page 118).
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the electric parking brake.
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
In order to signal achange of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator
lamps for the direction of travel flash. When
you reset the combination switch, the hazard
warning flashers start flashing again.
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(Y page 264).
Permitted towing methods
Mercedes-Benz recommends transportingyour
vehicle in the case of abreakdown, rather than
towing it away.
When towing away,use atowing rope or a
towing bar with both axles on the ground. Do
not use any tow bar systems.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
!
The ignition must be switched off if you
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised. Intervention by ESP
®
could other-
wise damage the brake system.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be towed with the rear axle raised. The
vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise
swerve or even roll over.
Towing and tow-starting
265
Breakdown assistance
Z
Transporting the vehicle
Vehicleswithautomatic transmission
!
When the vehicleisloaded for transport,
the front and rearaxles must be stationary
and on the same transportationvehicle.
Positioning overthe connectionpoint of the
transport vehicleisnot permitted.The drive
train mayotherwisebedamaged.
Allvehicles
!
Youmay onlysecurethe vehiclebythe
wheels,not by parts of the vehiclesuchas
axleorsteeringcomponents. Otherwise, the
vehiclecould be damaged.
The towing eyecan be used to pull the vehicle
onto atrailer or transporterfor transporting
purposes.
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition 2 in the igni-
tionlock.
X
Shift the transmission to position i.
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehiclefromrolling away by
applying the electricparkingbrake.
X
Shift the transmission to position j.
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition u in the igni-
tionlockand remove the SmartKeyfromthe
ignition lock.
X
Secure the vehicle.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.You could otherwise
damage the automatic transmission.
Youcan find informationon"Jump-starting"at
(Ypage 261).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If youmanipulate or bridgeafaulty fuse or if
youreplace it with afusewithahigher
amperage,the electriccablescould be over-
loaded.Thiscould resultinafire. There is a
riskofanaccident and injury.
Alwaysreplace faulty fuses with the speci-
fiednew fuses havingthe correct amperage.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating,which youcan recognize by
the color and value. The fuse ratingsare listed
in the fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is locatedinthe vehi-
cle tool kit in the stowagecompartment under
the trunk floor (Y page 253).
If anewly insertedfusealsoblows,havethe
cause traced and rectifiedataqualified spe-
cialist workshop,e.g.anauthorizedMercedes-
Benz Center.
!
Onlyuse fuses thathavebeenapproved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have
the correct fuse rating for the system con-
cerned.Otherwise, components or systems
could be damaged.
!
Make sure thatnomoisture can enterthe
fuse boxwhenthe coverisopen.
!
When closing the cover, make sure thatit
is lying correctlyonthe fuse box. Moisture
seeping in or dirt could otherwiseimpairthe
operationofthe fuses.
The fuses in your vehicleserve to close down
faulty circuits. If afuseblows,all the compo-
nents on the circuitand their functions stop
operating.
Before changingafuse
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Switch off allelectrical consumers.
266
Fuses
Breakdownassistance
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
(Y page 118).
or
X
When using the SmartKey, turn the Smart-
Key to position u in the ignition lock and
remove it (Y page 118).
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(Y page 134).
All indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster
must be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartmentonthe
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
R
Fuse box in the trunk
Fuse box in the engine compartment
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 266).
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured
by the wiper linkage. There is arisk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Open the hood.
X
Use adry cloth to remove any moisture
from the fuse box.
X
To open: open clamps ;.
X
Remove fuse box cover : forwards.
X
To close: check whether the seal is lying
correctly in cover :.
X
Insert cover : at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
X
Fold down cover : and close clamps ;.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the trunk
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (Y page 266).
The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the
partition covering.
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
To open: release cover : on the right and
left-hand sides with aflat object.
X
Open cover : downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
Fuses
267
Breakdown assistance
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you installwheels and tires withincorrect
dimensions, theservicebrakeorwheelsus-
pension componentsmay be damaged.
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Always replace wheels and tires withones
that comply withthe specificationsofthe
original part.
When replacing wheels, pay attention to the:
R
Designation
R
Model
When replacing tires,pay attention to the:
R
Designation
R
Manufacturer
R
Model
G
WARNING
Aflat tire will severely affectthe driving
characteristics as well as thesteering and
braking of thevehicle. Thereisariskofan
accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
Do notdriveonwithaflat tire.
R
Change theflat tire immediately withan
emergencysparewheelorsparewheel.
Alternatively, consult aqualified specialist
workshop.
Tires withrun-flat characteristics:
R
Observethe information and warning
notesonMOExtended tires (run-flat tires).
Accessories that are notapprovedfor your
vehiclebyMercedes-Benzorare notbeing
used correctlycan impair theoperating safety.
Before purchasing and usingnon-approved
accessories, visit aqualified specialist work-
shopand ask about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be foundunder "Wheel/tire combinations"
(Y page 293).
You can ask for information regarding permit-
tedwheel/tire combinationsatanauthorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Information on tire pressurecan be found:
R
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside
(Y page 280)
R
in thetirepressuretable in thefuel filler flap
(Y page 133)
R
in the"Tirepressure" section
Operation
Information on driving
Checkthe tire pressurewhen thevehicleis
heavily laden and adjust priortoatrip.
While driving,pay attention to vibrations,
noises and unusual handlingcharacteristics,
e.g. pullingtoone side.This may indicatethat
thewheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-
pectthatatireisdefective, reduce your speed
immediately. Stop thevehicleassoonaspos-
sible to checkthe wheels and tires for dam-
age. Hidden tire damagecould also be causing
theunusual handlingcharacteristics.Ifyou
findnosignsofdamage, havethe tires and
wheels checkedataqualified specialist work-
shop.
When parking your vehicle, makesurethatthe
tires do notget deformed by thecurborother
obstacles. If they cannotbeavoided, drive
overobstacles suchascurbs slowly and at an
obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe
wheels or tires.
Regularchecking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can causetireinflation pres-
sureloss.Asaresult,you could lose control
of your vehicle. Thereisariskofaccident.
Checkthe tires regularly for signsofdam-
age and replace any damaged tires immedi-
ately.
268
Operation
Wheels and tires
Checkwheelsand tires for damageatleast
once amonth.Checkwheelsand tires after
driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged
wheelscan causealoss of tirepressure. Pay
particular attentiontodamagesuchas:
R
cutsinthe tires
R
punctures in thetires
R
tears in thetires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformationorsevere corrosiononwheels
Regularly check thetiretread depthand the
conditionofthe tread across thewhole width
of all tires (Y page 269). If necessary, turnthe
frontwheelstofull lockinorder to inspectthe
inner side of thetiresurface.
All wheelsmust have avalvecap to protect
thevalveagainst dirt and moisture. Do not
mountanythingontothe valveother than the
standard valvecap or other valvecaps
approved by Mercedes-Benzfor your vehicle.
Do notuse any other valvecaps or systems,
e.g.tirepressuremonitoringsystems.
Regularly check thepressureofall thetires
particularly priortolongtrips. Adjustthe tire
pressureasnecessary (Y page 271).
Observethe notesonthe emergencyspare
wheel (Y page 294).
The servicelife of tires depends, amongother
things, on thefollowingfactors:
R
Drivingstyle
R
Tire pressure
R
Distance covered
Notes on tiretread
G
WARNING
If there is insufficient tiretread, thetiretrac-
tiondecreases. The tiretread is no longer
able to dissipatewater. This increases the
riskofhydroplaning when theroad surface
is wet,particularly when thevehicle's speed
is notadapted to theroad conditions.There
is ariskofanaccident.
When thetirepressureistoo high or too
low, tires may wear differently at different
points on thetiretread. Therefore, regularly
check thetiretread depthand thecondition
of thetread across thewhole widthofall
tires.
Minimum tiretread depthon:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, have thetires replaced
before they reachthe legally prescribedmin-
imum tiretread depth.
Marking : shows wherethe bar indicator for
tread wear (arrow) is integratedintothe tire
tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)are required by
law. Six indicators are positionedonthe tire
tread. They are visible once atread depthof
approximately á in (1.6 mm)has been
reached. If this is thecase, thetireissoworn
that it must be replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
Tiresand wheels
R
Only mounttires and wheels of thesame
type and make.
Exception: it is permissible to mountadif-
ferent type or makeinthe eventofaflat
tire. Observethe "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 254).
R
Only mounttires of thecorrectsizeontothe
wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderatespeeds for
thefirst 60 miles (100km). The new tires
only reachtheir full performanceafter this
distance.
Operation
269
Wheels and tires
Z
R
Do not drive with tireswhich have too little
treaddepth.Thissignificantlyreducesthe
tractiononwet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace the tiresafter sixyears at the lat-
est, regardless of wear.
MOExtendedtires(tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtendedtires(tires with runflat
characteristics),you can continue to drive your
vehicleevenifthere is atotallossofpressure
in one or moretires.
MOExtendedtiresmay onlybeusedincon-
junction with an active tire pressure loss warn-
ing system or with an active tire pressure mon-
itorand on wheels specifically testedby
Mercedes-Benz.
NotesondrivingwithMOExtendedtireswitha
flattire (Y page 254).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtendedtiresare
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is therefore recommendedthatyou addition-
ally equipyourvehiclewithaTIREFIT kit if you
mount tiresthatdonot featurerun-flat charac-
teristics, e.g.winter tires. ATIREFIT kit can be
obtained fromaqualified specialistworkshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Haveyourvehiclewinter-proofed at aqualified
specialistworkshop at the onsetofwinter.
Observe the notesinthe "Changing awheel"
section(Ypage 289).
Driving with summertires
At temperatures below45‡(+7 †),summer
tiresloseelasticity and therefore tractionand
braking power. Changethe tiresonyourvehi-
cle to M+S tires. Usingsummertires at very
cold temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
for this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damagedtires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As aresult, you could lose control
of yourvehicle. There is arisk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of dam-
age and replace any damaged tires immedi-
ately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with atire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in win-
ter and do not providesufficient traction.
There is arisk of an accident.
M+S tires with atread depth of less than ã
in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below45‡(+7 †), use win-
ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire
are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbolinaddition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road condi-
tions.
Only these tires willallow driving safety sys-
tems such as ABS and ESP
®
to function opti-
mallyinwinter. These tires have been devel-
oped specificallyfor driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
all wheels to maintainsafe handling character-
istics.
Always observe the maximumpermissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 274).
X
Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (Y page 275).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(Y page 275).
Information aboutdriving with an emergency
spare wheel(Ypage 294).
270
Winter operation
Wheelsand tires
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is arisk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never install snow chains to the front
wheels
R
always install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that
have been specially approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact aqualified specialist workshop.
If you intendtomount snow chains, please
bear the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations.Permissible
wheel-tire combinations (Y page 293).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to aroad that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of
snow chains. Observe the appropriate regu-
lations if you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
when pulling
away with snow chains installed (Y page 61).
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased
driving force (cuttingaction).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (Y page 294).
Tire pressure
Tire pressurespecifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is arisk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires
including the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning along journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency sparewheel:
information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel can be found in the general notes
in the "Emergencyspare wheel" section
(Y page 295).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at aqualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure
271
Wheels and tires
Z
Tire and LoadingInformationplacard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Informationplacard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 280).
The Tire and Loading Informationplacard con-
tains the recommendedtire pressures for cold
tires. The recommendedtire pressures are
validfor the maximum permissibleloadand up
to the maximum permissiblevehiclespeed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the insideofthe
fuel fillerflap. It shows the tire pressure for all
tirespermitted at the factory for thisvehicle;
see illustration(example).
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for coldtiresfor various
operating conditions, i.e.differingloadand
speedconditions.
If atire size precedes atire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure informationisonlyvalid
for thattire size; see illustration(example).
The load conditions "partiallyladen"and "fully
laden" aredefinedinthe table for different
numbers of occupants and amounts of lug-
gage.The actual numberofseats maydiffer.
Some tire pressure tablesshowonlythe rim
diameters insteadofthe full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rimdiameterispartofthe tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (Y page 284).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighterloads and/or lowerroad
speeds,the pressures shouldbereset to the
highervalues:
R
if youwanttodrive with an increased load
and/or
R
if youwanttodrive at higherroadspeeds
The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or
higherroadspeeds, shown in the tire pressure
table,may have anegative effect on driving
comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan
lead to an excessive build-upofheatand a
sudden loss of pressure.
For moreinformation, contact aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
272
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If thetirepressuredrops repeatedly, the
wheel, valveortiremay be damaged. Tire
pressurethatistoo low may result in atire
blow-out.Thereisariskofanaccident.
R
Checkthe tire for foreign objects.
R
Checkwhether thewheelislosing air or
thevalveisleaking.
If you are unable to rectify thedamage, con-
tactaqualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, thetirevalves may be overloaded
and malfunction,whichcan causetirepres-
sureloss.Due to their design,retrofittedtire
pressuremonitors keep thetirevalveopen.
This can also result in tire pressureloss.
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Only screw thestandard valvecap or other
valvecapsapprovedbyMercedes-Benzfor
your vehicleontothe tire valve.
Use asuitable pressuregauge to checkthe
tire pressure. The outer appearanceofatire
does notpermit any reliable conclusionabout
thetirepressure. On vehicles equipped with
theelectronic tire pressuremonitor, thetire
pressurecan be checkedinthe on-board com-
puter.
The tire temperature and pressureincrease
when thevehicleisinmotion.This is depend-
entonthe driving speedand theload.
Therefore, you should only correcttirepres-
sures when thetires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if thevehiclehas been parked withthe tires
out of direct sunlightfor at least three hours
and
R
if thevehiclehas notbeen driven further
than 1mile (1.6km)
The tire temperature changes depending on
theoutside temperature, thevehiclespeed
and thetireload. If thetiretemperature
changes by 18 ‡(10 †), thetirepressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa(0.1bar/
1.5psi).Takethisintoaccountwhen checking
thepressureofwarm tires.Onlycorrect the
tire pressureifitistoo low for thecurrent
operating conditions. If you checkthe tire
pressurewhen thetires are warm,the result-
ing value will be higher than if thetires were
cold. This is normal. Do notreduce thetire
pressuretothe value specifiedfor cold tires.
The tire pressurewould otherwise be toolow.
Observethe recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside
R
in thetirepressuretable on theinside of the
fuel filler flap
R
printedinyellow on therim of theemer-
gency/collapsible sparewheel(depending
on vehicleequipment)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires withpressurethatistoo low can over-
heat and burstasaconsequence.Inaddi-
tion,theyalso suffer from excessiveand/or
irregular wear,whichcan severely impair the
braking properties and thedriving character-
istics.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Avoid tire pressures that are toolow in all
thetires,includingthe sparewheel.
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leadingtotiredefects
R
adversely affecthandling
R
wear excessively and/orunevenly
R
haveanadverse effectonfuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires withexcessively high pressurecan
burstbecause they are damaged moreeas-
ily by road debris, potholesetc.Inaddition,
they also suffer from irregular wear,which
can severely impair thebraking properties
and thedriving characteristics.Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Tire pressure
273
Wheels and tires
Z
Avoidtire pressures thatare too high in all
the tires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tiresmay:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adverselyaffect handling
R
wear excessivelyand/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ridecomfort
R
be more susceptibletodamage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximumpermissibletire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximumpermissibletire
inflation pressure. Alwaysobserve the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen
adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 271).
i
The actual values for tiresare vehicle-spe-
cificand maydeviate from the values in the
illustration.
Checkingthe tire pressures
Important safety notes
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you
of:
R
incorrectly set tire pressure
R
sudden loss of tire pressure, e.g.from afor-
eign object thathas penetrated the tire
Observethe notes on tire pressure
(Y page 271).
Informationonair pressure for the tireson
your vehiclecan be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-
tionplacard on the B-pillar
R
on the tire pressure table in the fuel filler
flap
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checkingtire pressuresmanually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceedasfollows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire thatisto
be checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gaugesecurelyonto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compareittothe
recommendedvalue on the Tire and Loading
Informationplacard or the tire pressure
table (Y page 271).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the
tire pressure to the recommendedvalue.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air.
To do so, press down the metalpin in the
valve,using the tip of apen for example.
Thencheck the tire pressure againusing the
tire pressure checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat thesestepsfor the othertires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicleisinmotion, the tire pres-
sure loss warning system monitors the set tire
pressure using the rotational speed of the
wheels.Thisenables the system to detect sig-
nificant pressure loss in atire.Ifthe speed of
rotationofawheelchangesasaresultofa
loss of pressure, acorresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunctiondis-
play.
Youcan recognize the tire pressure loss warn-
ing by the Run FlatIndicator ActiveRun FlatIndicator Active
Press 'OK'toRestartPress 'OK'toRestart message which
appearsinthe Serv.Serv. menu of the multifunc-
tiondisplay.Informationonthe message dis-
play can be found in the "Restarting the tire
274
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
pressure loss warning system" section
(Y page 275).
Important safetynotes
The tire pressure warning system does not
warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.
Observe the notes on the recommended tire
pressure (Y page 271).
The tire pressure loss warning does not
replace the need to regularly checkthe tire
pressure. An even loss of pressure on several
tires at the same time cannot be detected by
the tire pressure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn
you of asudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tire is penetrated by aforeign object. In the
event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the
vehicle to ahalt by brakingcarefully. Avoid
abrupt steering movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
R
snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
R
road conditionsare wintry.
R
you are driving on sand or gravel.
R
you adopt avery sportydriving style (corner-
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates
of acceleration).
R
you drive with aheavy load.
Restarting the tirepressure loss warn-
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
if you have:
R
changed the tire pressure
R
changed the wheels or tires
R
mounted new wheels or tires
X
Beforerestarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires
for the respective operatingconditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar.Additionally, atire
pressure table is attached to the fuel filler
flap. The tire pressure loss warning system
can only give reliable warningsifyou have
set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect
tire pressure is set, these incorrect values
will be monitored.
X
Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (Y page 271).
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock (Y page 118).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steer-
ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active PressRun Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
YesYes.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After ateach-in period, the tire pressure
loss warning system will monitor the set tire
pressures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
or
X
If the Tire Pressure Now OK?
Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, use the 9 or : buttonto
select CancelCancel.
X
Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tirepressure monitor
General notes
If atire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensorsthat monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure
monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one
or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor
only functionsifthe correspondingsensors
are installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in
the multifunction display. After afew minutes
of driving,the currenttire pressure of each tire
Tirepressure
275
Wheels and tires
Z
is shown in the Serv.Serv. menuofthe multifunc-
tion display.
Example: current tirepressure display
For information on the message display, refer
to the "Checking the tirepressure electroni-
cally" section (Y page 277).
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
Eachtire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least onceamonth
when cold and inflated to the pressure rec-
ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on
the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure
label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of adifferentsize than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tirepressure
label, you should determinethe proper tire
pressure for those tires.
As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle has
been equipped with atirepressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS)that illuminates alow tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stopand checkyour
tires as soon as possible,and inflate themto
the proper pressure. Drivingonasignifi-
cantly underinflated tirecauses the tireto
overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire
tread life, and may affectthe vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please notethat the TPMS is not asubsti-
tutefor proper tiremaintenance, and it is
the driver's responsibilitytomaintain cor-
recttirepressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tirepressure telltale. When the system
detectsamalfunction, the warninglamp will
flash for approximately aminute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated everytimethe
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumina-
ted, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tirepressure as intended.TPMS
malfunctions may occur for avarietyofrea-
sons, including the installation of incompati-
ble replacementoralternatetires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always checkthe
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacementoralternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(Y page 271).Notethat the correcttirepres-
sure for the current operating situation must
firstbetaught-in to the tirepressure monitor.
If asubstantial loss of pressure occurs, the
warningthreshold for the warningmessage is
aligned to the taught-in reference values.
Restartthe tirepressure monitor after adjust-
ing the pressure of the cold tires
(Y page 278). The current pressures are
saved as new reference values. As aresult,a
warningmessage will appear if the tirepres-
sure drops significantly.
The tirepressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tirepressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tirepressure
(Y page 271).
The tirepressure monitor is not able to warn
you of asudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the
tireispenetratedbyaforeign object.Inthe
eventofasudden loss of pressure, bringthe
276
Tirepressure
Wheels and tires
vehicletoahaltbybraking carefully.Avoid
abrupt steering movements.
The tire pressure monitor has ayellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or amalfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whetheratire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the
tire pressure on one or more tires is signifi-
cantly too low.The tire pressure monitor is
not malfunctioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for approx-
imatelyaminute and then remains lit con-
stantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunc-
tioning.
In addition to the warning lamp,amessage
appears in the multifunction display.Observe
the information on display messages
(Y page202).
It may take up to ten minutes for amalfunc-
tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-
ted. Amalfunction willbeindicated by the tire
pressure warning lamp flashing for approx-
imatelyone minute and then remaining lit.
When the malfunction has been rectified,the
tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a
few minutes of driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at agas station with apressure gage.The
tire pressures shownbythe on-board com-
puter refer to those measured at sea level.At
high altitudes, the tire pressure values indica-
ted by apressure gage are higherthan those
shownbythe on-board computer. In this case,
do not reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radiotrans-
mitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones,
two-wayradios) that may be being operated in
or near the vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 (Y page118) in the ignitionlock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheeltoselect the Serv.
Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
Tire Pressure.
X
Press a.
The current tire pressure of each tire is
showninthe multifunction display.
If the vehiclehas been parked for over
20 minutes,the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will be
displayedafter driving afew minutesdisplayedafter driving afew minutes
message appears.
After ateach-in process, the tire pressure
monitor automatically detects new wheels or
new sensors. As long as aclearallocation of
the tire pressure valuetothe individualwheels
is not possible, the Tire Pressure MonitorTire Pressure Monitor
ActiveActive display message is showninstead of
the tire pressure display.The tire pressures
are already being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheelismounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheelthat has been removed for afew
minutes. Be aware that the valuedisplayed for
the position where the emergency spare wheel
is fitted is not the same as the current tire
pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitorwarningmes-
sages
The tire pressure monitor detects apressure
loss in one or more tires:
R
If the tire pressure monitor detects apres-
sure loss in one or more tires, awarning
message is showninthe multifunction dis-
play. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp
then lights up.
R
If the Please Correct Tire Pressure
Please Correct Tire Pressure
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play, the tire pressure in at least one tire is
too low.The tire pressure must be corrected
when the opportunity arises.
R
If the Check TiresCheck Tires message appears in the
multifunction display,the tire pressure in at
least one tire has dropped significantly. The
tires must be checked.
R
If the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunction mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display,
the tire pressure in at least one tire has
dropped suddenly.The tires must be
checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in
the display messages in the "Tires" section
(Y page202).
Tire pressure
277
Wheels and tires
Z
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-
ted, the tire pressures may be displayedfor
the wrong positions for ashort time. This is
rectified after afew minutes of driving, and the
tire pressures are displayedfor the correct
positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lampsgoout. The monitor uses the
currently set tire pressures as the reference
values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire
pressure monitor willautomatically detect the
new reference values after you have changed
the tire pressure. However, you can also set
reference values manually as describedhere.
The tire pressure monitor then monitors the
new tire pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the valuerecom-
mended for the corresponding driving situa-
tion on the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver's side B-pillar
(Y page 271).
Additional tire pressure values for different
loadscan also be found on the tire pressure
table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap
(Y page 271).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
on all four wheels.
X
Ensure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steer-
ing wheel to select the Serv.
Serv. menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire PressureTire Pressure.
X
Press a.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressure will be displayedTire pressure will be displayed
after driving afew minutesafter driving afew minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as New
Reference ValuesReference Values message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wishtoconfirm the restart:
X
Press a.
The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restarted
message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
After driving for afew minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures
are within the specifiedrange. The new tire
pressures are then accepted as reference
values and monitored.
If you wishtocancel the restart:
X
Press %.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart willcontinue to be monitored.
278
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCCIC ID:MRXGG4 Thisdevice
complies with part 15 of the
FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standardsofIndus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions.(1)
Thisdevice may not cause
harmfulinterference, and (2)
Thisdevice mustaccept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Le present
appareilest conforme d'indus-
trie Canadaapplicables aux
appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est
authorisee auxdeuxconditions
suivantes. (1) L'appareil ne doit
pasproduire de brouillage, et
(2) L'autisatuerdel'appareil
doitaccepter toutbrouillage
radioelectriquesubi, meme si le
brouillageest susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionne-
ment. WARNING:Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
blefor compliance could void
the user'sauthority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:"
before the radio certification
number only signifies Canada
technical specifications were
met.
FCC ID:MRXMC34MA4 This
device complies with part 15 of
the FCC rules and with license
exempt RSS standardsofIndus-
try Canada. Operation is subject
to the following conditions.(1)
Thisdevice may not cause
harmfulinterference, and (2)
Thisdevice mustaccept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Le present
appareilest conforme d'indus-
trie Canadaapplicables aux
appareils radio exempts de
Country Radio type approval number
licence. L'exploitation est
authorisee auxdeuxconditions
suivantes. (1) L'appareil ne doit
pasproduire de brouillage, et
(2) L'autisatuerdel'appareil
doitaccepter toutbrouillage
radioelectriquesubi, meme si le
brouillageest susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionne-
ment. WARNING:Changes or
modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
blefor compliance could void
the user'sauthority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:"
before the radio certification
number only signifies Canada
technical specifications were
met.
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC:2546A-GG4 Thisdevice com-
plieswithpart15ofthe FCC
rules and with license exempt
RSS standardsofIndustry Can-
ada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions.(1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) Thisdevice
mustaccept any interference
received, including interference
that may cause undesired oper-
ation. Le present appareilest
conforme d'industrieCanada
applicables auxappareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploita-
tion est authorisee auxdeux
conditions suivantes. (1) L'ap-
pareilnedoitpas produire de
brouillage, et (2) L'autisatuerde
l'appareil doitaccepter tout
brouillageradioelectriquesubi,
meme si le brouillageest sus-
ceptible d'encompromettre le
fonctionnement. WARNING:
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could voidthe user'sauthority
to operate the equipment. The
term "IC:" before the radio cer-
tification number only signifies
Canadatechnical specifications
were met.
Tire pressure
279
Wheelsand tires
Z
Country Radio type approval number
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading thevehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloadedtires can overheat,causing a
blowout.Overloadedtires can also impair
thesteeringand driving characteristicsand
lead to brakefailure. Thereisarisk of acci-
dent.
Observe theload rating of thetires. The load
rating must be at least half of theGAWR of
your vehicle.Never overload thetires by
exceedingthe maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show
themaximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and LoadingInformation placard
is on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside. The
Tire and LoadingInformation placard
shows themaximum permissible number
of occupantsand themaximum permissi-
ble vehicle load. It also containsdetails of
thetiresizes and corresponding pressures
for tires mounted at thefactory.
(2) The vehicle identification plateisonthe
B-pillar on thedriver'sside. The vehicle
identification plateinformsyou of the
gross vehicle weight rating.Itismade up
of thevehicle weight,all vehicle occu-
pants, thefuel and thecargo. You can also
findinformationabout themaximum gross
axle weight rating on thefront and rear
axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
themaximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle).Never
exceed themaximum load or themaxi-
mum gross axle weight rating for thefront
or rear axle.
:
B-pillar,driver'sside
Maximum permissible grossvehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in theTire and Loading
Information placard: "The combinedweight
of occupantsand cargo should never
exceed XXX kilogramsorXXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed thespecified
value.
i
The specifications shown on theTire and
LoadingInformation placardinthe illustra-
tionare examples. The maximum permissi-
ble gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-
specific and may differ fromthatinthe illus-
tration. You can findthe valid maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight rating for your
vehicle on theTire and LoadingInformation
placard.
280
Loading thevehicle
Wheels and tires
Numberofseats
Maximum numberofseats : indicates the
maximum numberofoccupants allowedto
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
i
Thespecifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Informationplacard in the illustra-
tionare examples.The numberofseats is
vehicle-specific and can differfromthe
details shown. Thenumberofseats in your
vehiclecan be found on the Tire and Load-
ing Informationplacard.
Determining the correctloadlimit
Step-by-stepinstructions
Thefollowing steps have been developed as
required of allmanufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. FederalRegulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "NationalTrafficand Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step1:Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should
neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your
vehicle’sTireand Loading Informationplac-
ard.
X
Step2:Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers thatwillberiding
in your vehicle.
X
Step3:Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers fromXXX kilo-
grams or XXX lbs.
X
Step4:Theresulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggageload
capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150-lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
availablecargo and luggageloadcapacity is
650 lbs(1400 -750 (5 x150) =650 lbs).
X
Step5:Determine the combined weight of
luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle.Thatweightmay not safelyexceed the
availablecargo and luggageloadcapacity
calculated in step4.
Example: steps 1to3
Thefollowing table shows examples on howto
calculate totaland cargo load capacitieswith
varying seating configurations and numberand
size of occupants. Thefollowing examples use
aloadlimit of 1500 lbs(680kg). Thisisfor
illustration purposesonly. Make sure you
areusing the actual load limitfor your vehicle
stated on your vehicle'sTireand Loading Infor-
mationplacard (Y page 280).
Thegreaterthe combined weight of the occu-
pants, the lowerthe maximum luggageload.
Step1
Example1 Example2
Combinedmax-
imumweight
of occupants
and cargo
(data fromthe
Tire and Load-
ingInforma-
tionplacard)
1500 lbs
(680kg)
1500 lbs
(680kg)
Loading the vehicle
281
Wheelsand tires
Z
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2
Number of peo-
ple in the vehi-
cle (driver and
occupants)
1 2
Weight of the
occupants
Occu-
pant 1:
175 lbs
(80 kg)
Occu-
pant 1:
175 lbs
(80 kg)
Occu-
pant 2:
195 lbs
(88 kg)
Gross weight
of all occu-
pants
175 lbs
(80 kg)
370 lbs
(168 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2
Permissible
load (maxi-
mum gross
vehicle weight
rating from
the Tire and
Loading Infor-
mation plac-
ard minus the
gross weight
of all occu-
pants)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) Ò
175 lbs
(80 kg) =
1325 lbs
(600 kg)
1500 lbs
(680 kg) Ò
370 lbs
(168 kg) =
1130 lbs
(512 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo
carefully, you should still make sure that the
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be
found on the vehicle identification plate on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle
(Y page 280).
Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross
weight of the vehicle, all passengers and the
load must not exceed the permissible gross
vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible values (gross vehi-
cle weight and maximum gross axle weight rat-
ing), have your loaded vehicle (including driver,
occupants and the load) weighed on asuitable
vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheelsand tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading
Standards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are
U.S. governmentspecifications. Their purpose
is to provide drivers with uniform reliable infor-
mation on tire performance data. Tire manu-
facturers have to grade tires using three per-
formancefactors: : tread wear grade, ;
traction grade and = temperature grade.
These regulations do not apply to Canada.
Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America
are provided with the correspondingquality
grading markings on the sidewallofthe tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperaturegrade: A
All passenger car tires must conformtothe
statutory safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
282
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is acomparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on aspecified U.S.
government course. For example, atire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government test track as atire graded
100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, ser-
vice practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
The traction grades –from highest to lowest
are AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. Atire marked Cmay have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on awet, snow covered or icy
road is alwayslower than on dry road surfa-
ces.
You should pay special attention to road con-
ditions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends aminimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire
tread depth (Y page 269). Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow-covered
surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The
braking distance is still much further than on
surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow.
Take appropriate care when driving.
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for atire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessiveloading, either separately
or in combination, can cause excessiveheat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A(the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistancetothe
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds
to alevel of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and Arepresent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
All about wheelsand tires
283
Wheels and tires
Z
Tire labeling
Overview
:
UniformTireQualityGradingStandard
(Y page 287)
;
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 286)
=
Maximum tire load (Y page 286)
?
Maximum tire pressure (Y page 274)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 287)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speedrating (Y page 284)
D
Loadindex (Y page 286)
E
Tire name
The markings describedabove areonthe tire
in additiontothe tire name(sales designation)
and the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydevi-
ate fromthe data in the example.
Tire size designation,load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed
could lead to tire damage or the tire burst-
ing.There is ariskofaccident.
Therefore,onlyuse tire types and sizes
approved for your vehiclemodel.Observe
the tire load rating and speedrating
required for your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominalaspectratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rimdiameter
A
Loadbearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards,the size imprinted in the tire wall
maynot contain any letters or maycontain
one letter thatprecedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion(as shown above): these arepassenger
vehicletiresaccording to Europeanmanufac-
turing standards.
If "P"precedes the size description: these are
passengervehicletiresaccording to U.S. man-
ufacturingstandards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tiresaccording to U.S. manufactur-
ing standards.
If "T"precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
areonlydesignedfor temporary useinan
emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
tire width in millimeters.
Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size
ratio between the tire height and tire width
and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is
calculatedbydividing the tire width by the tire
height.
Tire code: tire code = specifiesthe tire type.
"R"represents radial tires; "D" represents
diagonaltires; "B" represents diagonalradial
tires.
284
Allabout wheels andtires
Wheelsand tires
Optionally,tires with amaximum speed of over
149 mph (240km/h)may have "ZR"inthe
size description, depending on the manufac-
turer (e.g. 245/40ZR18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diame-
ter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the
rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is
anumerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of atire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (Y page 280).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates amaximum
load of 1,356 lb (615kg) that the tires can
bear. For further information on the maximum
tire load in kilograms and lbs, see
(Y page 286).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (Y page 286).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer
tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Summer
tires
Index Speed rating
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240km/h)
R
Optionally,tires with amaximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40ZR18).
The service specification is made up of load-
bearing index A and speed rating B.
R
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR"and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find
out the maximum speed.
If aservice specification is available, the
maximum speed is limited according to the
speed rating in the service specification.
Example: 245/40ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-
ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The
letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The
maximum speed of the tire is limited to
186 mph (300 km/h).
R
The size descriptionfor all tires with maxi-
mum speedsofover 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifi-
cation must be given in parentheses.Exam-
ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).Speed rating "(Y)"
indicates that the maximum speed of the
tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the
tire manufactureraboutthe maximum
speed.
All-
weather
tires
and win-
ter tires
Index Speed rating
QM+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
TM+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
HM+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
VM+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
Allabout wheels and tires
285
Wheelsand tires
Z
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires
also have the i snowflake symbol on the
tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Association (RMA) and the Rubber Associa-
tion of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire trac-
tion on snow. They have been especially
developed for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehi-
cle from exceeding aspeed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-
tory may be higher than the maximum speed
that the electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that yourtires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for yourvehicle can be
found in the "tires" section (Y page 293).
Further information aboutreading tire data
can be obtained from any qualifiedspecialist
workshop.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may also be imprinted on the side-
wallofthe tire. You willfind this after the let-
ter that identifies the speed rating
(Y page 284).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above),represents astandard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents areinforced
tire
R
Light Load: represents alight load tire
R
C, D, E: represents aload range that
depends on the maximum load that the tire
can carry at acertain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overloadthe tires by exceeding the
specifiedload limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillaron
the driver's side (Y page 280).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire
manufacturer or retreader must imprint aTIN
in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is auniqueidentification number. The
TIN enablesthe tire manufacturers or retread-
ers to inform purchasers of recalls and other
safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible
for the purchasertoeasily identify the affected
tires.
286
All about wheels and tires
Wheelsand tires
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;,tire size =,tire type code ?
and manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with
the requirementsofthe U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have acode
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have acode
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (Y page 293).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire typecode: tire type code ? can be used
by the manufacturer as acode to describe
specific characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent
the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three and
four represent the year of manufacture. For
example, atire that is marked "3214" was
manufactured in week 32 in 2014.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-
ate from the data in the example.
Definition of termsfor tires and load-
ing
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number
of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
tread and sidewall.These are made of steel,
nylon, polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirementsof
the USDepartment of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupantsfor which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Auniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specificationsfrom the U.S. govern-
ment.The ratings are molded into the sidewall
of the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on afully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recom-
mended pressures for cold tires for various
operating conditions, i.e. differing load and
speed conditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment availablefor the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
All about wheelsand tires
287
Wheels and tires
Z
Rim
Thisisthe part of the wheel on which the tire
is mounted.
GAWR(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWRisthe maximum grossaxleweight
rating. The actual loadonanaxlemustnever
exceedthe grossaxleweightrating. The gross
axleweightrating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driv-
er's side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identifica-
tion. It specifies the speed rangefor which the
tire is approved.
GVW (Gross VehicleWeight)
The grossvehicle weightincludes the weight
of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare
wheel,accessoriesinstalled, occupants, lug-
gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-
ble. The grossvehicle weightmustnot exceed
the grossvehicle weightrating GVWRasspeci-
fiedonthe vehicle identification plate on the
B-pillar on the driver'sside.
GVWR (Gross VehicleWeight Rating)
The GVWRisthe maximum permissible gross
weightofafully loaded vehicle (the weightof
the vehicle including allaccessories, occu-
pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-
weight, if applicable). The grossvehicle weight
rating is specified on the vehicle identification
plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weightisthe sumof:
R
the curb weightofthe vehicle
R
the weightofthe accessories
R
the loadlimit
R
the weightofthe factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metricunitfor tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1psi.Another unitfor tire pressure
is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent
of 1bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprintedonthe sidewallof
the tire.Thisspecifies the load-bearing capa-
city more precisely.
Curb weight
The weightofavehicle with standard equip-
ment including the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-
tioning system and optionalequipment if these
are installed in the vehicle,but doesnot
includepassengers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum loadrating is the maximum per-
missible weightinkilograms or lbsfor which a
tire is approved.
Maximum permissibletire pressure
Maximumpermissible tire pressure for one
tire.
Maximum load on onetire
Maximumloadonone tire.Thisiscalculated
by dividing the maximum axleloadofone axle
by two.
PSI (pounds per square inch)
Astandard unitofmeasure for tire pressure.
Aspectratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
Tire pressure
Thisispressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
pounds per square inch (psi),inkilopascal
(kPa)orinbar.The tire pressure shouldonly
be corrected whenthe tiresare cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tiresare cold:
R
if the vehicle hasbeenparked with the tires
outofdirect sunlight for at leastthree hours
and
R
if the vehicle hasnot beendriven further
than 1mile(1.6 km)
288
Allabout wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Tread
The part of the tire thatcomesinto contact
with the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures thatthe tire sits
securelyonthe wheel. There areseveralsteel
wires in the bead to prevent the tire from com-
ing loose from the wheelrim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the treadand the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combinedweightofthoseoptional extras
thatweigh morethanthe replaced standard
parts and morethan2.3 kg (5 lbs).These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, aroofrackorahigh-per-
formance battery,are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire IdentificationNumber)
Thisisauniqueidentifierwhich can be used
by atire manufacturer to identify tires, for
examplefor aproduct recall,and thusidentify
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
typecodeand the manufacturing date.
Load bearingindex
The load bearing index (alsoloadindex) is a
codethatcontains the maximumloadbearing
capacity of atire.
Traction
Tractionisthe resultoffrictionbetween the
tiresand the roadsurface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrowbars(tread wear bars) thatare distrib-
utedoverthe tire tread. If the tire treadislevel
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
hasbeenreached.
Occupant distribution
The distributionofoccupants in avehicleat
theirdesignated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominalloadand luggage load plus 68 kg
(150lbs)multipliedbythe numberofseats in
the vehicle.
Changingawheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(Y page 253)contains informationand notes
on how to deal with aflattire.Informationon
driving with MOExtendedtiresinthe event of a
flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires
(tires with run-flatcharacteristics"
(Y page 254).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Rotating the frontand rearwheelsifthe
wheels or tireshavedifferent dimensions
mayseverely impairthe driving characteris-
tics.The servicebrake or wheelsuspension
components mayalsobedamaged.There is
ariskofanaccident.
Rotate frontand rearwheelsonlyifthe
wheels and tiresare of the same dimen-
sions.
!
On vehicles equipped with atire pressure
monitor, electronic components arelocated
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting toolsshouldnot be used near
the valve.Thiscould damage the electronic
components.
Onlyhavetireschangedataqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Alwayspay attentiontothe instructions and
safety noteswhenchanging awheel
(Y page 290).
The wear patterns on the frontand reartires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before aclear wear pattern
hasformed on the tires. Front tirestypically
wear moreonthe shoulderand reartiresin
the center.
On vehicles thathavethe same size front and
rearwheels, youcan rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicledocuments. If no
warranty book is available, the tiresshouldbe
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear,thismay
be required earlier. Do not change the direc-
tionofwheel rotation.
Changingawheel
289
Wheelsand tires
Z
Clean thecontactsurfaces of thewheel and
thebrakedisc thoroughly every timeawheel
is rotated. Checkthe tirepressureand,ifnec-
essary, restartthe tirepressureloss warning
system or thetirepressuremonitor.
Direction of rotation
Tireswithaspecifieddirection of rotationhave
additional benefits, e.g.ifthere is ariskof
hydroplaning.Theseadvantages can only be
gained if thetires are installed corresponding
to thedirection of rotation.
An arrow on thesidewall of thetireindicates
its correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheelsthatare notbeingused in acool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires
from oil, grease, gasolineand diesel.
Mounting awheel
Preparingthe vehicle
X
Stop thevehicle on solid,non-slippery and
levelground.
X
Apply theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Bring thefront wheelsintothe straight-
ahead position.
X
Shift thetransmission to position j.
X
Switch off theengine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
theSmartKey from theignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriv-
er'sdoor.
The vehicle electronics nowhave status 0.
This is thesame as theSmartKey having
been removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stopbuttonfromthe ignition lock
(Y page 118).
X
If included in thevehicle equipment, remove
thetire-changetoolkit from thevehicle.
X
Safeguardthe vehicle against rolling away.
i
Due to differences in vehicle equipment,
notall vehiclesare equipped withatire-
changetoolkit.For informationonwhich
tools are required to performawheel
changeonyour vehicle,consultanauthor-
izedMercedes-BenzCenter.
Necessary tire-changing tools can include,
for example:
R
Jack
R
Wheelchock
R
Lug wrench
Securing thevehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped withawheel chock,
it can be foundinthe tire-changetoolkit
(Y page 253).
The folding wheel chockisanadditional safety
measure to preventthe vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing awheel.
X
Foldbothplates upwards :.
X
Foldout lower plate ;.
X
Guide thelugs on thelower platefully into
theopeningsinbase plate =.
X
Placechocksorother suitable items under
thefront and rear of thewheel that is diago-
nallyoppositethe wheel you wish to
change.
290
Changing awheel
Wheels and tires
Raisingthe vehicle
G
WARNING
If youdonot position the jack correctly at
the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle,
the jack could tip overwiththe vehicle
raised.There is ariskofinjury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the
jack mustbepositioned vertically,directly
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, you
could damagethe vehicle.
Observe the following when raising the vehi-
cle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only usethe vehicle-
specificjack that hasbeentestedand
approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-
rectly, the jack could tip overwiththe vehi-
cle raised.
R
The jack is designed only to raise and hold
the vehiclefor ashort time whileawheel
is being changed.Itmustnot be used for
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle.
R
Avoidchanging the wheel on uphilland
downhillslopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from
rolling away by applying the parking brake
and inserting wheel chocks.Donot disen-
gage the parking brake whilethe vehicleis
raised.
R
The jack mustbeplacedonafirm,flatand
non-slip surface. On aloose surface, alarge,
flat, load-bearing underlay mustbeused. On
aslippery surface, anon-slip underlay must
be used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not usewoodenblocks or similar objects
as ajack underlay.Otherwise, the jack will
not be able to achieve its load-bearing capa-
city duetothe restrictedheight.
R
Make sure that the distance between the
undersideofthe tiresand the ground does
not exceed1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Neverplace your hands and feetunder the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lieunder the vehicle.
R
Do not startthe engine when the vehicleis
raised.
R
Do not openorclose adoororthe trunk lid
when the vehicleisraised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in
the vehiclewhenthe vehicleisraised.
X
Using lugwrench :,loosenthe bolts on
the wheel youwishtochange by aboutone
fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-
pletely.
The jacking points are locatedjust behind the
front wheel housingsand just in front of the
rearwheel housings(arrows).
Vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehicle
hascovers installed to protect the vehicle
bodynext to the jacking points on the outer
sills.
Changingawheel
291
Wheelsand tires
Z
X
Fold cover ; upwards.
X
Positionjack ? at jacking point =.
X
Make surethe foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits
completelyonjacking point =.The base of
the jack mustlie evenlyonthe ground.
X
Turn crank A until the tire is raised amaxi-
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm)from the ground.
Removing awheel
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface.The boltand wheel hub
threads could otherwise be damaged when
youscrew them in.
X
Unscrew the uppermost wheel boltcom-
pletely.
X
Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
insteadofthe wheel bolt.
X
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting anew wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hubthreads can cause the
wheel bolts to come loose. As aresult, you
could loseawheel while driving. There is a
risk of accident.
Neveroil or grease wheel bolts. In the event
of damagetothe threads, contact aquali-
fiedspecialist workshop immediately.Have
the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continuedriving.
G
WARNING
If youtighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
whenthe vehicle is raised,the jack could tip
over.There is arisk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
whenthe vehicle is on the ground.
Alwayspay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing awheel" section
(Y page 289).
Only use wheel bolts that havebeendesigned
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which havebeen
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the
respective wheel.
292
Changing awheel
Wheels and tires
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X
Cleanthe wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the
alignment bolt and push it on.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
tight.
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
X
Vehicles with acollapsible spare wheel:
inflate the collapsible spare wheel
(Y page 296).
Only then lower the vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
G
WARNING
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed tightening torque. There is arisk
of an accident.
Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
are tightened to the prescribed tightening
torque.
If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle.
Contact aqualified specialist workshop and
have the tightening torque checked immedi-
ately.
!
Vehicles with acollapsible spare
wheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflate
the collapsible spare wheel with the tire
inflation compressor. The wheel rim could
otherwise be damaged.
X
Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise
until the vehicle is once againstanding
firmly on the ground.
X
Place the jack to one side.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in across-
wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:
to A). The specified tightening torque is
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle
tools in the trunk again.
X
Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the
cover into the outer sill.
X
Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-
ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(Y page 271).
When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss
warning system or the tire pressure monitor
cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire
pressure loss warning system or tire pressure
monitor when the defective wheel has been
replaced with anew wheel.
Vehicles with atire pressure control sys-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped
with functioningsensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-
Benz specificallyfor your vehicle.
Wheel and tire combinations
293
Wheels and tires
Z
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS
or ESP
®
,and are marked as follows:
R
MO =Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE =Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 =Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition,
when driving with aload, tire dimension var-
iations could cause the tires to come into
contact with the bodywork and axle compo-
nents. This could result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels
or accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz,since previ-
ous damage cannot alwaysbedetected on
retreaded tires. As aresult, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires
if you have no information about their previ-
ous usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the fuel filler
flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(Y page 271).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-
nancerecommendations of the tire manufac-
turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment –always
equip the vehicle:
R
with tires of the same size on agiven axle
(left and right)
R
with the same type of tires at agiven time
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
tires)
Exception: it is permissible to mount adif-
ferent type or make in the event of aflat
tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics)" section
(Y page 254).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory.
It is thereforerecommended that you addition-
ally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you
mount tires that do not feature run-flat charac-
teristics, e.g. winter tires. ATIREFIT kit may be
obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.
Emergency sparewheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type
of the spare wheel or emergencyspare
wheel and the wheel to be replaced may dif-
fer. Mountinganemergencyspare wheel
may severely impair the driving characteris-
tics. There is arisk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
R
never mount more than one spare wheel
or emergencyspare wheel that differs in
size.
R
only use aspare wheel or emergency
spare wheel of adifferent size briefly.
R
do not switch ESP
®
off.
R
have aspare wheel or emergencyspare
wheel of adifferent size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimen-
sions as well as the tire type must be cor-
rect.
294
Emergency sparewheel
Wheels and tires
When using an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of adifferentsize, you must not
exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Snowchains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permit-
ted emergency spare wheels at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (Y page 271). The value on the wheel is
valid.
An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on use as well as the
speed limitation specified on the emergency
spare wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss
warning system or the tire pressure monitor
cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire
pressure loss warning system or tire pressure
monitor when the defective wheel has been
replaced with anew wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
mounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-
tem may still display the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for afew minutes.The value
displayed for the mounted emergency spare
wheel is not the same as the currenttire pres-
sure of the emergency spare wheel.
Removing the emergency spare
wheel
Vehicles with acollapsible spare
wheel
The collapsible spare wheel can be found in
the stowage well under the trunkfloor
(Y page 228).
X
Turn retainingscrew ; counter-clockwise
and remove it.
X
Remove collapsible spare wheel :.
Always observe the instructionsand safety
notes in the "Mountingawheel" section
(Y page 290).
Stowing the emergency sparewheel
!
Only place the collapsible spare wheel in
the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, mois-
ture may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow aused col-
lapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collapsi-
ble spare wheel will not fit in the trunkinthe
intended manner. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you have this work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
X
If possible, unscrew the valve insert from
the valve and release the air.
Fully deflating the tires can take afew
minutes.
X
Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X
Screw the valve cap back on.
X
Pull the protective sheet provided with the
spare wheel over the collapsible spare
wheel.
X
Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the
emergency spare wheel well under the
trunk.
X
Use the retainingscrew to pierce the pro-
tective sheet and fasten the collapsible
spare wheel in place.
Emergency sparewheel
295
Wheels and tires
Z
Inflating thecollapsible sparewheel
!
Inflatethe collapsible sparewheelusing
thetireinflation compressor before lowering
thevehicle. The wheelrim could otherwise
be damaged.
!
Do notoperate thetireinflation compres-
sor for longer than eightminutesatatime
without abreak. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be oper-
atedagain once it has cooled down.
X
Mountthe collapsible sparewheelasdescri-
bed (Y page 290).
The collapsible sparewheelmust be moun-
tedbefore it is inflated.
X
Remove thetireinflation compressor from
thestowage spaceunder thetrunk floor
(Y page 253).
X
Pull plug ? out of thehousing.
X
Takethe filler hoseout of thehousing.
X
Insertthe yellow hoseconnector of thefiller
hoseintothe guide in thehousing and push
it intothe fixtureuntil thehoseconnector
engages.
X
Remove thecap from thevalveonthe col-
lapsible sparewheel.
X
Screw unionnut : on thefiller hoseonto
thevalve.
X
Makesurethe tire inflation compressor's
on/off switch A is set to OFF.
X
Insertplug ? intothe socketofthe ciga-
rette lighterorintoa12Vpower socketin
your vehicle.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 1 in theigni-
tion lock(Ypage 118).
X
Press on/off switch A on thetireinflation
compressor to ON.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressureis
shown on pressuregauge =.
X
Inflatethe tire to thespecifiedtirepressure.
The specifiedtirepressureisprintedonthe
yellow label of theemergencysparewheel.
X
When thespecifiedtirepressurehas been
reached, press on/off switch A to OFF,on
thetireinflation compressor.
The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position u in theigni-
tion lock.
X
If thetirepressureishigher than thespeci-
fiedpressure, press pressurerelease but-
ton ; until thecorrect tire pressurehas
been reached.
X
Unscrew unionnut : on thefiller hose
from thevalve.
X
Screw thecap onto thevalveofthe collapsi-
ble sparewheelagain.
X
To remove thefiller hosefromthe tire infla-
tion compressor, push down therocker
switch on thehoseconnector and pull out
thefiller hose.
X
Stow plug ? and thefiller hoseinthe lower
section of thecompressor housing.
X
Stow thetireinflation compressor in the
vehicle.
296
Emergency sparewheel
Wheels and tires
Information regardingtechnicaldata
i
The datastatedherespecifically refers to
avehiclewithstandard equipment. Consult
an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterfor the
datafor all vehiclevariants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Tampering with theengineelectron-
ics
!
Havethe engineelectronics and associ-
atedparts, suchascontrolunits, sensors,
actuating componentsorelectric cables
serviced only at aqualified specialist work-
shop. Vehiclecomponentsmay otherwise
wear morequickly and thevehicle's operat-
ing permit may be invalidated.
Installing two-way radiosand mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
G
WARNING
The electromagneticradiation from two-way
radios can interfere withthe vehicleelec-
tronics if two-way radios are manipulated or
retrofittedincorrectly. This could jeopardize
theoperating safetyofthe vehicle. Thereis
ariskofanaccident.
You should haveall workonelectrical and
electronic componentscarried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you incorrectlyoperate two-way radios in
thevehicle, theelectromagneticradiation
may interfere withthe vehicleelectronics,
for exampleif:
R
thetwo-way radioisnot connectedtoan
exteriorantenna
R
theexteriorantenna is notcorrectly
mountedorisnot low-reflection
This could jeopardizethe operating safetyof
thevehicle. Thereisariskofanaccident.
Havethe low-reflection exteriorantenna
installed at aqualified specialist workshop.
Always connecttwo-way radios to thelow-
reflection exteriorantenna when operating
in thevehicle.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
theinstructionsfor installation and use of
two-way radios are notobserved.
In particular, thefollowingrequirements
must be complied with:
R
only approvedwavebands may be used
R
observethe maximum permissible output
in these wavebands
R
only approvedantenna positionsmay be
used
Excessivelevels of electromagneticradiation
may causedamagetoyour healthand the
healthofothers. Using an exteriorantenna
takes intoaccountcurrentscientific discus-
sionsrelating to thepossible healthhazards
that may result from electromagneticfields.
The followingantenna positionsmay be used if
RF transmitters havebeen properly installed:
Approved antenna positions
:
Rear fenders
i
On therear fenders, it is recommended to
installthe antenna on theside of thevehicle
closesttothe center of theroad.
Use theTechnical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehi-
cles-EMC guidelines for installation of after-
marketradiofrequency transmitting equip-
ment).Observethe legal requirements for
accessory parts.
If your vehiclehas installationsfor two-way
radioequipment, use thepower supplyor
antenna connectionsintended for use withthe
Vehicle electronics
297
Technical data
Z
basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufac-
turer'sSupplementwhen installing.
Deviations with respect to frequency bands,
maximum transmission outputs or antenna
positionsmust be approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at
the base of the antenna must not exceed the
following values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Shortwave
3-54MHz
100 W
4mwaveband
74 -88MHz
30 W
2mwaveband
144 -174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 -460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 -460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle with-
out restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with amaximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 -410 MHz waveband and amaxi-
mum transmission output of up to 2W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positionson
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification platewith
vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver'sdoor.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
:
VIN
;
Vehicle model
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada
only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
i
The data shown on the vehicle identifica-
tion plate is used only as an example. This
298
Identification plates
Technical data
data is differentfor every vehicle and can
deviate from the data shown here. You can
find the data applicable to your vehicle on
the vehicle identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Slide the front-passenger seat as far forward
as possible.
X
Fold trim : upwards.
VIN ; can be seen.
The VIN can also be found in the following
locations:
R
on the vehicle identification plate
(Y page 298)
R
on the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 299)
Engine number
:
Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and
Californian emissionsstandards
;
Engine number (stamped intothe crank-
case)
=
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service productsand filling capaci-
ties
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
Service productsmay be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is arisk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of serviceproductsonthe
labels of the respective original containers.
Always storeserviceproductssealed in their
original containers. Always keep service
productsout of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of serviceproductsinanenviron-
mentally responsible manner.
Service productsinclude the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engineoil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brakefluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Comply with all valid regulationswith respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
fluids.
Components and serviceproductsmust
match. You should therefore only use products
that have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Information about tested and approved prod-
ucts can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can identify service products approvedby
Mercedes-Benzbythe followinginscriptions
on the container:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designationsorrecommendations indi-
catealevel of quality or aspecification in
accordancewith an MB SheetNumber (e.g.
MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been
approvedbyMercedes-Benz.
Service productsand filling capacities
299
Technical data
Z
Other identifications, for example:
R
0W-30
R
5W-30
R
5W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. Improper handling
of fuel creates arisk of fire and explosion.
Avoid fire, open flames, smoking and creat-
ing sparks under all circumstances. Switch
off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary
heating before refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuels are toxic and harmful to health. There
is arisk of injury.
You must avoid fuels coming into contact
with skin, eyes and clothes or being swal-
lowed.
Do not inhale the fuel vapors. Keep children
awayfrom fuels.
Keep doors and windows closed during the
refueling process.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following points:
R
Immediately rinse the fuel off your skin
with soap and water.
R
If you get fuel into your eyes, immediately
rinse your eyes throughly with clean
water. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
R
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capa-
city
SLC 300
18.5 US gal
(70.0 l)
MercedesAMGvehicles
15.8 US gal
(60.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
SLC 300
Approx.
2.4 US gal
(9.0 l)
MercedesAMGvehicles
Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-
tion if you accidentally refuelwith the wrong
fuel.Otherwise, the fuel willenter the fuel
system. Even smallamounts of the wrong
fuel couldresultindamage to the fuel sys-
tem and the engine. Notify aqualified spe-
cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and
fuel lines drained completely.
!
Only refuelusing premium-grade unleaded
gasoline with at least 95 RON that conforms
to European standard EN 228 or an equiva-
lent specification.
Fuel of this specification can contain up to
10% ethanol.YourvehicleisE10-compati-
ble. You can refuelyourvehicleusing E10
fuel.
Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can
leadtoincreasedwearaswellasdamage to
the fuel system, engine and exhaust system.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehiclewith other fuelscan leadtodam-
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
Observe the notes on operating fluids.
300
Serviceproducts and filling capacities
Technical data
!
Never refuel using:
R
Diesel
R
Regular gasoline with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
R
Gasoline with more than 10 vol. %etha-
nol, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
R
Gasoline with more than 3vol. %metha-
nol, e.g. M15, M30
R
Gasoline with metalliferousadditives
If you accidentally refuel with the wrong
fuel:
R
Do not switch the ignition on
R
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommen-
ded for your vehicle.
In accordance with European standard EN
16942, you can find the following compatibility
labelsfor fuel:
R
on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap
of your vehicle
R
on the fuel pump or pump nozzle for your
vehicle, throughout Europe
:
For gasoline with amaximum ethanol con-
tent of 5%byvolume
;
For gasoline with amaximum ethanol con-
tent of 10 %byvolume
!
Damage to the emission control system
caused by fuel with excessive sulfur content
R
Only use sulfur-free fuel (sulfurcontent
10 ppm).
i
In some countries, the available gasoline
may not be sufficiently low in sulfur. This
fuel can temporarily produce unpleasant
odors, especially on short journeys. As soon
as sulfur-free fuel (sulfurcontent <10ppm)
is used for refueling, the odors are reduced.
i
The fuels you can use in your vehicle may
differ from the information in the Operator's
Manual depending on the country. The fuels
that have been approved for your vehicle
can be found on the instruction label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
E400 4MATIC: observe the information on
sulfur content on the instruction label on the
fuel filler flap.
All models: the recommended octane number
for your vehicle can be found on the instruc-
tion label on the fuel filler flap.
E300, E350, E350 4MATIC: only refuel
using super unleadedgasoline with at least
98 RON, if you wish to achieve maximum
engine output. Alternatively, you can also
refuel using premium grade gasoline with at
least 95 RON.
All models: as atemporary measure, if the
recommended fuel is not available, you may
also use unleadedregulargasoline with at
least:
R
E180, E250, E300 e: 93 RON
R
All other models: 91 RON
Additives in gasoline
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can lead to engine failure. Do
not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does
not include additives for the removal and
prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must
only be mixed with additives recommended
by Mercedes-Benz.Comply with the instruc-
tions for use on the product label.More
Service products and filling capacities
301
Technical data
Z
information about recommended additives
can be obtained fromany authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you use
branded fuels that have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countries
may not be sufficient.Residue could build up
in the fuel injection system as aresult.Insuch
cases,and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additiverecommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratiosspecified on the container.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Do not use engineoil or an oil filter with
specifications deviating fromthose
expressly requiredfor the prescribed service
intervals.Donot change the engineoil or oil
filter in order to set replacementintervals
longer than those prescribed. This could
otherwise cause damage to the engineor
exhaustgas aftertreatment.
Follow the instructions on the service inter-
val display for changing the engineoil. This
could otherwise cause damage to the
engineorexhaustgas aftertreatment.
When handlingengineoil, observe the impor-
tantsafetynotes on service products
(Y page 299).
The engineoils are matched to the perform-
anceofMercedes-Benzengines and service
intervals.You should therefore only use engine
oils and oil filters that are approved for vehi-
cles with maintenance systems.
For alist of approved engineoils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engineoils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
All models
229.5
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil con-
tainers.
Filling capacities
The followingvalues refertoanoil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
SLC 300
6.7USqt(6.3l)
Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43
6.9USqt(6.5l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engineoil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brakefluid constantly absorbs moisture
fromthe air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brakefluid. If the boiling point of the
brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may
forminthe brakesystem when the brakes
are applied hard. This would impair braking
efficiency. There is arisk of an accident.
You should have the brakefluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
When handlingbrakefluid, observe the impor-
tantsafetynotes on service products
(Y page 299).
The brakefluid change intervals can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brakefluid approved by Mercedes-
Benzinaccordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
302
Service productsand filling capacities
Technicaldata
Information aboutapproved brake fluidcan be
obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop
or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluidregularly replaced at a
qualifiedspecialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot
components in the engine compartment, it
may ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add
antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not
spilled next to the fillerneck. Thoroughly
clean the antifreeze from components
before starting the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desiredantifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
You can find additional notes on the coolant
in the following places:
R
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for
Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1
-
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com
-
on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app
R
aqualifiedspecialized workshop
!
Alwaysuse asuitable coolant mixture,
even in countries where high temperatures
prevail.
Otherwise,the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualifiedspecialist workshop and the
replacement confirmed in the Maintenance
Booklet.
Complywith the important safety notes for
service products when handling coolant
(Y page 299).
The coolant is amixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It is responsible for
the following:
R
anti-corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
to -35 ‡(-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-
ant during operation is approximately 266
(130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-
tion in the engine cooling system should:
R
be at least 50%.This willprotect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 ‡(-37 †).
R
not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡[-45 †]). Otherwise,heat willnot
be dissipated as effectively.
If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal
amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion
inhibitor.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for Service Products
310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-
led with acoolant mixture that ensures ade-
quate antifreeze and anti-corrosion protec-
tion.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at aqualifiedspecialist work-
shop.
Filling capacities
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model Capacity
SLC 300
Approx. 8.5 US qt
(8.0 l)
MercedesBenz
SLC 43 AMG
Approx. 8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)
Serviceproducts and filling capacities
303
Technical data
Z
Windshield washersystem
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshieldwasher concentrate is highly
flammable. If windshield washer concentrate
gets onto hot components of the engine or
the exhaust system, it can ignite. There is a
risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that windshield washer concen-
trate is not spilled in the vicinity of the filler
neck.
!
Only use washer fluidwhich is suitablefor
lamplenses, e.g. MB SummerFitorMBWin-
terFit. Unsuitablewasher fluidmay damage
the lamplensesofthe headlamps.
!
Only MB SummerFitand MB WinterFit
washer fluidshould be mixed together. The
spraynozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilledorde-ionized water. Other-
wise, the levelsensor may give afalsereading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the
important safety notes on service products
(Y page299).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluidreservoir with amixture
of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.
MB SummerFit.
X
Add 1part MB SummerFitto100 parts
water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluidreservoir with amixture
of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the
information on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid
all yearround.
Climate control systemrefrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control systemofyourvehicleis
filled with refrigerant R134a.
The instructionlabel regarding the refrigerant
type usedcan be found on the radiator cross
member.
!
Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG
oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be
used. The approved PAG oil may not be
mixed with any other PAG oil that is not
approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise,
the climate control systemmay be dam-
aged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant
or replacing component parts, may only be
carriedout by aqualified specialist workshop.
All applicable regulations, as wellasSAE
standard J639, must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control sys-
tem carriedout at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example:refrigerant instructionlabel
:
Symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicablestandards
?
PAG oil part number
A
Typeofrefrigerant
Symbols : advise you about:
R
Possible dangers
R
Having service work carriedout at aquali-
fied specialist workshop
304
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Filling capacities
Model Refrigerant
All models
19.4 ±0.4 oz
(550±10g)
Model PAG oil
All models
2.8oz
80 g
Vehicle data
General notes
Pleasenotethatfor thespecifiedvehicledata:
R
The heightsspecifiedmay varyasaresult of
-
Tires
-
Load
-
Condition of thesuspension
-
Optional equipment
R
Optional equipmentreducesthe maximum
payload
Dimensionsand weights
Model
:: Opening height
Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43
70.75in
(1797 mm)
All other models
70.5 in
(1795 mm)
Missingvalueswere not available at timeof
goingtoprint.
Mercedes-AMG
SLC 43
Vehicle length
163.1in(4143 mm)
Vehicle length
when opening/clos-
ing theroof
Vehicle width
includingexterior
mirrors
78.9 in (2006 mm)
Vehicle height
51.2 in (1303 mm)
Vehicle height
when opening/clos-
ing theroof
61.7 in (1566 mm)
Wheelbase
95.7 in (2431 mm)
Turning radius
All other models
Vehicle length
162.7in(4133 mm)
Vehicle length
when opening/clos-
ing theroof
170.2in(4324 mm)
Vehicle width
includingexterior
mirrors
79.0 in (2006 mm)
Vehicle height
Vehicle height
when opening/clos-
ing theroof
61.06in(1551 mm)
Wheelbase
95.7 in (2430 mm)
Turning radius
34.5 ft (10.52 m)
Vehicle data
305
Technicaldata
Z
306
307
308
47


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Mercedes SLC 2020 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Mercedes SLC 2020 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 49,58 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info